@airbus: Issue: Apr 01/10 Rev: Oct 01/11

@AIRBUS
A330-200F
AIRCRAFT RECOVERY MANUAL
ARM
The content of this document is the property of Airbus.

It is supplied in confidence and commercial security on its contents must be maintained.
It must not be used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied, nor may
information contained in it be disclosed to unauthorized persons.
It must not be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from the owners of
the copyright. Requests for reproduction of any data in this document and the media authorized
for it must be addressed to Airbus.
© AIRBUS S.A.S. 2005. All rights reserved.
AIRBUS S.A.S.
Customer Services
Technical Data Support and Services
31707 Blagnac Cedex
FRANCE
Issue: Apr 01/10 Rev: Oct 01/11

@A330-200F
HIGHLIGHTS
Revision No. 2 - Oct 01/11
LOCATIONS CHG DESCRIPTIONS OF CHANGE

CODE
CHAPTER 01
Subject 01-20-01
DESC 01-20-01-002-B01 R NOTE AMENDED
CHAPTER 02
Subject 02-30-01
TASK 02-30-01-200-801-A01 R
Subject 02-40-01
DESC 02-40-01-001-A01 R WARNING CAUTION
ADDED/REVISED/DELETED
CHAPTER 03
Subject 03-50-01
DESC 03-50-01-002-A01 R NOTE AMENDED
Subtask 03-50-01-558-014-G01 R NOTE AMENDED
CHAPTER 04
Subject 04-80-13
TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01 R TOOL P/N AND/OR DESIGNATION
CROSS REFERENCED MANUAL(S)
Subtask 04-80-13-010-004-A01 R SUBTASK REVISED. UPDATED P/N OF
MDCD MANUAL OPERATION ROD.
CROSS REFERENCED MANUAL(S)
CROSS REFERENCED DOCUMENTARY
UNIT ADDED/REVISED/DELETED
TOOL P/N AND/OR DESIGNATION
NOTE AMENDED
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-006-A01 R UPDATED LAYOUT
HIGHLIGHTS
Page 1
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-007-A01 R UPDATED LAYOUT, CHANGED
PUSHBUTTONS LOCATION.
CHAPTER 05
Subject 05-40-02
TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01 R
Subject 05-40-03
TASK 05-40-03-650-802-A01 R
CHAPTER 06
Subject 06-30-00
TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01 R TEXT REVISED AND COMPLETED
Subtask 06-30-00-581-013-A01 R
Subtask 06-30-00-581-014-A01 R
Subtask 06-30-00-581-015-A01 R
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-010-A01 R ILLUSTRATION COMPLETED, LABEL
ADDED
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-014-A01 N NEW ILLUSTRATION ADDED
ILLUSTRATION ADDED
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A01 R
Subtask 06-30-00-581-002-A01 R NOTE AMENDED
Subject 06-40-00
DESC 06-40-00-001-A01 R CROSS REFERENCED DOCUMENTARY
CHAPTER 07
Subject 07-40-04
DESC 07-40-04-001-A01 R
CHAPTER 09
Subject 09-10-11
DESC 09-10-11-001-A01 R NOTE AMENDED
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-001-B01 R ILLUSTRATION REVISED
Subject 09-20-01
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-001-A01 R CHART REVISED
HIGHLIGHTS
Page 2
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-009-A01 R
Subject 09-30-02
DESC 09-30-02-001-B01 R CROSS REFERENCED DOCUMENTARY
HIGHLIGHTS
Page 3
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
LIST OF EFFECTIVE CONTENT
Revision No. 2 - Oct 01/11
CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CODE DATE
CHAPTER 01
Subject 01-00-00
DESC 01-00-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 01-00-00-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 01-00-02
DESC 01-00-02-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 01-00-02-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 01-00-02-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 01-00-02-002-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 01-00-02-003-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 01-00-02-004-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 01-00-03
DESC 01-00-03-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 01-10-01
DESC 01-10-01-002-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 01-10-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 01-20-01
DESC 01-20-01-001-B01 Apr 01/10
DESC 01-20-01-002-B01 R Oct 01/11
CHAPTER 02
Subject 02-00-00
DESC 02-00-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 02-00-00-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 02-10-01
DESC 02-10-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 02-10-01-002-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 1
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
Subject 02-20-01
TASK 02-20-01-285-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-01-284-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-01-680-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-01-862-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-01-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 02-20-02
TASK 02-20-02-285-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-02-285-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-02-285-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-02-500-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-20-02-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 02-30-01
TASK 02-30-01-200-801-A01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 02-30-01-867-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-867-003-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-867-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-869-003-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-481-004-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-481-005-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-024-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-026-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 02-30-01-867-803-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-581-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 02-30-01-581-002-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 2
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-020-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-021-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-022-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 02-40-01
DESC 02-40-01-001-A01 R Oct 01/11
CHAPTER 03
Subject 03-00-00
TASK 03-00-00-558-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-00-00-558-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-00-00-970-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 03-00-00-991-002-G01 Apr 01/10
Subject 03-20-01
DESC 03-20-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 03-20-01-991-001-B01 Apr 01/10
DESC 03-20-01-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 03-20-02
TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-20-02-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-20-02-970-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 03-20-02-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 03-20-02-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 03-50-01
DESC 03-50-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 03-50-01-002-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 03-50-01-991-003-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 03-50-01-991-004-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 03-50-01-991-005-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 03-50-01-558-812-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-50-01-558-022-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 3
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
FIGURE 03-50-01-991-006-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 03-50-01-558-803-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-50-01-558-003-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 03-50-01-558-810-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-50-01-558-014-G01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 03-50-01-558-010-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 03-50-01-558-811-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 03-50-01-558-021-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 03-60-01
DESC 03-60-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
CHAPTER 04
Subject 04-00-00
DESC 04-00-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-20-00
TASK 04-20-00-588-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-20-00-588-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-20-00-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-30-00
DESC 04-30-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-002-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-003-B01 Apr 01/10
TASK 04-30-00-556-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-30-00-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-30-00-556-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-30-00-556-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-005-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-006-B01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 4
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-40-00
DESC 04-40-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-50-00
DESC 04-50-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-80-00
DESC 04-80-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-80-11
TASK 04-80-11-869-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-11-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-11-010-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-11-010-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-11-991-005-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-11-991-006-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-11-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-80-13
TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 04-80-13-010-004-A01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 04-80-13-010-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-13-010-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-13-010-003-B01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-13-481-001-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-006-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-007-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-001-C01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-002-C01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-004-B01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 5
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-009-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-005-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-010-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-011-B01 Apr 01/10
Subject 04-80-20
TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-20-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-20-867-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 04-80-20-867-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-010-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-006-A01 Apr 01/10
CHAPTER 05
Subject 05-00-00
DESC 05-00-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-10-00
DESC 05-10-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-10-00-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-20-00
DESC 05-20-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 05-20-00-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-20-00-991-013-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-20-00-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-20-00-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 05-20-00-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-20-00-991-014-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 6
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
FIGURE 05-20-00-991-015-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-30-00
TASK 05-30-00-650-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-30-00-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-30-00-650-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-40-00
DESC 05-40-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-40-01
TASK 05-40-01-650-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-40-01-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-40-01-650-003-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-40-02
TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 05-40-02-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-40-02-650-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-40-02-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-40-02-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-40-03
TASK 05-40-03-650-802-A01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 05-40-03-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-40-03-650-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-40-03-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-40-04
TASK 05-40-04-650-802-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-40-04-481-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-40-04-650-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 05-40-04-650-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-50-00
L.E.C.
Page 7
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
DESC 05-50-00-005-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 05-50-01
DESC 05-50-01-005-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-027-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-028-A01 Oct 01/10
TASK 05-50-01-000-801-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-001-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-002-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-029-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-030-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-031-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-032-A01 Oct 01/10
TASK 05-50-01-000-802-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-003-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-004-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-033-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-041-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-042-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-043-A01 Oct 01/10
TASK 05-50-01-000-803-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-005-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-006-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-034-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-035-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-036-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-037-A01 Oct 01/10
TASK 05-50-01-000-804-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-007-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 05-50-01-980-009-A01 Oct 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 8
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-038-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A01 Oct 01/10
Subject 05-60-00
DESC 05-60-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
CHAPTER 06
Subject 06-00-00
DESC 06-00-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 06-00-00-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-00-00-991-001-B01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-10-00
TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-10-00-970-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-10-00-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 06-10-00-970-802-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-10-00-970-002-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 06-10-00-970-803-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-10-00-970-003-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-10-00-970-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-004-B01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-30-00
DESC 06-30-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-006-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01 R Oct 01/11
L.E.C.
Page 9
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
Subtask 06-30-00-581-013-A01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 06-30-00-581-014-A01 R Oct 01/11
Subtask 06-30-00-581-015-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-010-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-014-A01 N Oct 01/11
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A01 R Oct 01/11
TASK 06-30-00-581-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-30-00-581-005-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-30-00-581-002-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-40-00
DESC 06-40-00-002-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 06-40-00-001-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 06-40-00-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 06-40-00-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-40-00-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-40-00-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 06-40-00-581-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-40-00-581-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-50-00
DESC 06-50-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-50-00-991-014-H01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-50-00-991-015-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 06-50-00-991-016-H01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-50-00-991-022-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-50-00-991-019-H01 Apr 01/10
TASK 06-50-00-581-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 06-50-00-581-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-60-00
L.E.C.
Page 10
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
DESC 06-60-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-00-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-60-01
DESC 06-60-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-01-991-006-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-01-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-01-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-60-02
DESC 06-60-02-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-02-991-015-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-02-991-016-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-02-991-017-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 06-60-02-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-02-991-009-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-02-991-010-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-02-991-011-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-60-03
DESC 06-60-03-001-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-03-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-03-991-009-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-03-991-010-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 06-60-03-002-B01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-03-991-023-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-03-991-024-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-03-991-025-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 06-60-04
DESC 06-60-04-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-04-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 06-60-04-991-009-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 11
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
CHAPTER 07
Subject 07-00-00
DESC 07-00-00-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-20-00
DESC 07-20-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-20-00-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-20-00-991-002-D01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-40-00
DESC 07-40-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-40-01
TASK 07-40-01-584-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-500-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-500-002-A01 Oct 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-584-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-869-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-40-01-991-001-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-40-01-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 07-40-01-584-802-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-500-003-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-500-004-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-869-003-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-584-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-01-869-004-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-40-02
TASK 07-40-02-584-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-02-500-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-02-500-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-02-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 12
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
Subtask 07-40-02-584-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-02-869-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-40-02-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-40-03
TASK 07-40-03-584-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-03-584-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 07-40-03-584-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-40-04
DESC 07-40-04-001-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 07-40-04-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-40-04-991-002-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-40-04-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-60-00
DESC 07-60-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-60-01
DESC 07-60-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-60-01-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 07-60-01-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-60-02
DESC 07-60-02-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 07-60-03
DESC 07-60-03-001-A01 Apr 01/10
CHAPTER 08
Subject 08-00-00
DESC 08-00-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
CHAPTER 09
Subject 09-00-00
DESC 09-00-00-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-01
L.E.C.
Page 13
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
DESC 09-10-01-002-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-02
DESC 09-10-02-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-02-003-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-02-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-02-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-03
DESC 09-10-03-001-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-03-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-03-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-05
DESC 09-10-05-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-05-991-001-F01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-06
DESC 09-10-06-001-D01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-06-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-08
DESC 09-10-08-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-08-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-09
DESC 09-10-09-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-09-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-10
DESC 09-10-10-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-10-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-10-991-001-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-10-991-002-B01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-10-003-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 14
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
FIGURE 09-10-10-991-006-B01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-10-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-10-991-010-F01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-10-005-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-10-991-011-B01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-10-006-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-10-991-014-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-11
DESC 09-10-11-001-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-001-B01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-005-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-006-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-11-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-12
DESC 09-10-12-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-001-B01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-12-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-014-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-12-003-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-004-A01 Oct 01/10
DESC 09-10-12-004-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-008-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-009-A01 Oct 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-12-991-015-A01 Oct 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 15
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
DESC 09-10-12-005-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-12-006-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-13
DESC 09-10-13-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-13-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-14
DESC 09-10-14-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-14-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-14-991-001-C01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-14-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-14-991-003-C01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-14-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-14-991-015-C01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-14-991-016-C01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-10-14-005-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-14-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-14-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-15
DESC 09-10-15-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-15-991-001-E01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-10-16
DESC 09-10-16-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-16-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-16-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-16-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-16-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-10-16-991-005-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-20-01
DESC 09-20-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 16
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
DESC 09-20-01-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-001-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-002-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-003-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-005-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-006-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-007-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-008-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-009-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-010-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-011-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-012-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-013-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-014-A01 R Oct 01/11
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-015-A01 R Oct 01/11
DESC 09-20-01-004-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-20-01-005-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-20-01-991-020-A01 Apr 01/10
TASK 09-20-01-869-801-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 09-20-01-869-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subtask 09-20-01-869-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-20-02
DESC 09-20-02-001-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-30-01
DESC 09-30-01-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-30-02
DESC 09-30-02-001-B01 R Oct 01/11
Subject 09-30-03
L.E.C.
Page 17
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

CODE DATE
DESC 09-30-03-001-A01 Apr 01/10
DESC 09-30-03-002-A01 Apr 01/10
Subject 09-50-01
DESC 09-50-01-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-001-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-002-B01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-004-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-005-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-006-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-007-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-008-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-009-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-010-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-011-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-012-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-013-A01 Apr 01/10
FIGURE 09-50-01-991-014-A01 Apr 01/10
L.E.C.
Page 18
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01 INTRODUCTION
01-00 INTRODUCTION
01-00-00 INTRODUCTION
01-00-00-001-A01 General
01-00-00-002-A01 Important Notice to Users of this Document
01-00-02 SEQUENCE OF THE DOCUMENT
01-00-02-001-A01 General
01-00-02-002-A01 Task Oriented ARM
01-00-02-003-A01 Content
01-00-02-004-A01 Effectivity Management
01-00-03 DEFINITIONS
01-00-03-001-A01 General
01-10 RELATED DATA
01-10-01 RELATED DATA
01-10-01-002-A01 Airbus Data
01-10-01-001-A01 Other Data
01-20 GENERAL AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS
01-20-01 GENERAL AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS
01-20-01-001-B01 General Aircraft Description
01-20-01-002-B01 General Aircraft Data
02 SURVEY
02-00 SURVEY
02-00-00 SURVEY
02-00-00-001-A01 General
02-10 CHARTS AND GUIDES
02-10-01 CHARTS AND GUIDES
02-10-01-001-A01 Aircraft Recovery Process
02-10-01-002-A01 Aircraft Recovery Logic Chart
02-20 INITIAL SURVEY
02-20-01 INITIAL AIRCRAFT SURVEY
02-20-01-285-801-A01 Initial Aircraft Survey
02-20-02 INITIAL SITE SURVEY
02-20-02-285-801-A01 Initial Site Survey
02-30 LANDING GEAR
02-30-01 LANDING GEAR
02-30-01-200-801-A01 Landing Gear Survey
02-30-01-481-802-A02 Installation of the Safety Devices on Landing Gears
T.O.C.
Page 1
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
02-30-01-867-803-A01 Jacking for Wheel Change

02-40 HEALTH AND SAFETY ISSUES
02-40-01 HEALTH AND SAFETY ISSUES
02-40-01-001-A01 General
03 WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT

03-00 WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT
03-00-00 WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT
03-00-00-558-801-A01 General
03-20 FUEL LOAD AND CG CONTROL
03-20-01 FUEL LOAD AND CG CONTROL
03-20-01-001-A01 General
03-20-01-002-A01 Tables
03-20-02 MANUAL FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION
03-20-02-970-801-A01 Use of Magnetic Level Indicators (MLI)
03-50 MANAGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND CG
03-50-01 MANAGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND CG
03-50-01-001-A01 Introduction
03-50-01-002-A01 Lower Deck Cargo and Baggage Remaining Effect
03-50-01-558-812-A01 Main Deck Cargo Remaining Effect
03-50-01-558-803-A01 Ballast Added Effect
03-50-01-558-810-A01 Large Components Removed / Missing
03-50-01-558-811-A01 Large Components Movement Effect
03-60 REFERENCE FOR CALCULATION
03-60-01 REFERENCE FOR CALCULATION
03-60-01-001-A01 Information Required and Source Data
04 PREPARATION
04-00 PREPARATION
04-00-00 PREPARATION
04-00-00-001-A01 General
04-20 STABILIZING THE AIRCRAFT
04-20-00 STABILIZING THE AIRCRAFT
04-20-00-588-801-A01 Stabilizing the Aircraft
04-30 TETHERING THE AIRCRAFT
04-30-00 TETHERING THE AIRCRAFT
04-30-00-001-A01 General
04-30-00-556-801-A01 Mooring
04-40 GROUND ANCHORS
04-40-00 GROUND ANCHORS
04-40-00-001-A01 General
T.O.C.
Page 2
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-50 SOIL STABILITY

04-50-00 SOIL STABILITY
04-50-00-001-A01 General
04-80 MANUAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
04-80-00 MANUAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
04-80-00-001-A01 General
04-80-11 LANDING GEAR DOORS
04-80-11-869-801-A01 Manual Operation of the Landing Gear Door
04-80-13 CARGO DOORS
04-80-13-869-801-A01 MANUAL OPERATION OF THE CARGO DOORS
04-80-20 LANDING GEARS
04-80-20-867-801-A01 Manual Operation of the Landing Gears
05 WEIGHT REDUCTION
05-00 WEIGHT REDUCTION
05-00-00 WEIGHT REDUCTION
05-00-00-001-A01 General
05-10 DEFUELING
05-10-00 DEFUELING
05-10-00-001-A01 General - Defueling
05-20 FUEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
05-20-00 FUEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
05-20-00-001-A01 Fuel System Basic Description
05-20-00-002-A01 Tanks
05-20-00-004-A01 Fuel Quantity Indicating System
05-30 MOVING FUEL FOR CG CONTROL
05-30-00 MOVING FUEL FOR CG CONTROL
05-30-00-650-801-A01 Ground Fuel Transfer Procedures
05-40 DEFUEL SCENARIOS
05-40-00 DEFUEL SCENARIOS
05-40-00-001-A01 Defuel Scenarios
05-40-01 DEFUEL SCENARIO 1 NORMAL PRESSURE DEFUEL WITH ALL
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS SERVICEABLE
05-40-01-650-801-A01 Normal Pressure Defuel With All Aircraft Systems Serviceable
05-40-02 DEFUEL SCENARIO 2 SUCTION DEFUEL WHEN NO ELECTRICAL
POWER AVAILABLE
05-40-02-650-801-A01 Suction Defuel Procedures When No Electrical Power Is Available
05-40-03 DEFUEL SCENARIO 3 DEFUEL USING AN EXTERNAL WIRING
HARNESS
05-40-03-650-802-A01 Defuel Using an External Wiring Harness
05-40-04 DEFUEL SCENARIO 4 DRAIN REMAINING FUEL
T.O.C.
Page 3
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-40-04-650-802-A01 Drain Remaining Fuel

05-50 CARGO COMPARTMENTS
05-50-00 CARGO COMPARTMENTS
05-50-00-005-A01 General
05-50-01 CARGO REMOVAL
05-50-01-005-A01 Manual Cargo Unloading Preparation and Safety Precautions
05-50-01-000-801-A01 Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading - A/C Nose Down
05-50-01-000-802-A01 Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading - A/C Nose Up
05-50-01-000-803-A01 Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading -RH Wing Down
05-50-01-000-804-A01 Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading - LH Wing Down
05-60 REMOVAL OF LARGE COMPONENTS
05-60-00 REMOVAL OF LARGE COMPONENTS
05-60-00-001-A01 General
06 LEVELING AND LIFTING

06-00 LEVELING AND LIFTING
06-00-00 LEVELING AND LIFTING
06-00-00-001-A01 General
06-00-00-002-A01 Leveling/Lifting Obstructions
06-10 LOAD DETERMINATION
06-10-00 LOAD DETERMINATION
06-10-00-970-801-A01 Vertical Loads Determination
06-10-00-970-802-A01 Side loads on Jack Fittings
06-10-00-970-803-A01 Arc Movement Calculation
06-30 USE OF JACKS
06-30-00 USE OF JACKS
06-30-00-001-A01 General
06-30-00-581-802-B01 Jacking
06-30-00-581-801-A01 General Preparation and Instructions for Leveling and Lifting the Aircraft
with Jacks
06-40 USE OF PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
06-40-00 USE OF PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
06-40-00-002-A01 General
06-40-00-001-A01 Pneumatic Lifting Bags on Fuselage
06-40-00-003-A01 Pneumatic Lifting Bags on Wings
with Pneumatic Lifting Bags
06-50 USE OF CRANES
06-50-00 USE OF CRANES
06-50-00-001-A01 Fuselage Crane Lifting
T.O.C.
Page 4
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
with Cranes
06-60 LEVELING AND LIFTING SCENARIOS
06-60-00 LEVELING AND LIFTING SCENARIOS
06-60-01 SCENARIO 1 NLG UNSERVICEABLE
06-60-01-001-A01 Scenario 1: NLG Unserviceable
06-60-02 SCENARIO 2 ONE MLG UNSERVICEABLE
06-60-02-001-A01 Scenario 2.1: One MLG Unserviceable
06-60-02-002-A01 Scenario 2.2: One MLG Unserviceable and Engine Missing
06-60-03 SCENARIO 3 NLG AND ONE MLG UNSERVICEABLE
06-60-03-001-A01 Scenario 3.1: NLG and One MLG Unserviceable
06-60-03-002-B01 SCENARIO 3.2 : NLG and One MLG Unserviceable and Engine Missing
06-60-04 SCENARIO 4 ALL L/G UNSERVICEABLE
06-60-04-001-A01 Scenario 4: All L/G Unserviceable
07 MOVING THE AIRCRAFT

07-00 MOVING THE AIRCRAFT
07-00-00 MOVING THE AIRCRAFT
07-00-00-002-A01 General Preparation
07-20 PREPARING A ROADWAY
07-20-00 PREPARING A ROADWAY
07-20-00-001-A01 Preparing a Roadway
07-40 TOWING AND DEBOGGING
07-40-00 TOWING AND DEBOGGING
07-40-00-001-A01 General
07-40-01 TOWING FROM THE NOSE LANDING GEAR
07-40-01-584-801-A01 Towing from the NLG with a Towbar
07-40-01-584-802-A01 Towing from the NLG with a Towbarless Tractor
07-40-02 TOWING FROM THE MAIN LANDING GEAR
07-40-02-584-801-A01 Towing from the Main Landing Gear
07-40-03 TOWING WITH DEFLATED TIRES
07-40-03-584-801-A01 Towing with Deflated Tires
07-40-04 TOWING LOAD LIMITS
07-40-04-001-A01 Load and Angle Limits
07-60 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT
07-60-00 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT
07-60-00-001-A01 General
07-60-01 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT ON TRAILERS
07-60-01-001-A01 Moving Damaged Aircraft on Trailers
07-60-02 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT WITH CRANES
T.O.C.
Page 5
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-60-02-001-A01 Moving Damaged Aircraft with Cranes

07-60-03 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT WITH SPECIALIZED EQUIPMENT
07-60-03-001-A01 Moving Damaged Aircraft with Specialized Vehicles
08 POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

08-00 POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
08-00-00 POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
08-00-00-001-A01 General
09 APPENDIX
09-00 APPENDIX
09-00-00 APPENDIX
09-10 GENERAL INFORMATION
09-10-01 UNITS AND CONVERSIONS
09-10-01-002-A01 Units of Measurements
09-10-01-001-A01 Conversion Tables
09-10-02 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
09-10-02-001-A01 Definition of Terms
09-10-02-003-A01 Abbreviations
09-10-02-002-A01 Aircraft Reference Axes
09-10-03 AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
09-10-03-001-B01 General
09-10-05 COMPOSITE MATERIALS
09-10-05-001-A01 General
09-10-06 FUSELAGE FRAMES AND H-ARM TABLE
09-10-06-001-D01 General
09-10-08 WING RIBS AND STATIONS
09-10-08-001-A01 Wing Ribs and Stations
09-10-09 HORIZONTAL STABILIZERS RIBS AND STATIONS
09-10-09-001-A01 General
09-10-10 DOOR SIZES AND LOCATIONS
09-10-10-001-A01 General
09-10-10-002-A01 Passenger/Crew Doors and Emergency Exit Doors
09-10-10-003-A01 Cargo Compartment Doors
09-10-10-004-A01 Nose Landing Gear Doors
09-10-10-005-A01 Main and Center Landing Gear Doors
09-10-10-006-A01 APU Doors
09-10-11 AIRCRAFT GROUND CLEARANCES
09-10-11-001-A01 General
09-10-12 AIRCRAFT GROUND SERVICE CONNECTIONS
T.O.C.
Page 6
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-12-001-A01 General
09-10-12-002-A01 Hydraulic System
09-10-12-003-A01 Electrical System
09-10-12-004-A01 Fuel System
09-10-12-005-A01 Potable Water System
09-10-12-006-A01 Waste Water Disposal-System
09-10-13 AIRCRAFT GROUNDING POINTS
09-10-13-001-A01 Grounding Points
09-10-14-001-A01 General
09-10-14-002-A01 Forward Cargo Compartment
09-10-14-003-A01 Aft Cargo Compartment
09-10-14-004-A01 Bulk Cargo Compartment
09-10-14-005-A01 Main Deck Cargo Compartment
09-10-15 LOCATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
09-10-15-001-A01 General
09-10-16-001-A01 General
09-20 RECOVERY PREPARATION
09-20-01 QUICK REFERENCE DATA
09-20-01-001-A01 General
09-20-01-002-A01 Aircraft Recovery Logic Chart
09-20-01-004-A01 Airline Aircraft Recovery Process Document
09-20-01-005-A01 Off Runway Incident Reporting Proforma
09-20-01-869-801-A01 IATA Aircraft Recovery Quick Reference Check List
09-20-02 RECOVERY TEAM
09-20-02-001-A01 Composition of the Recovery Team
09-30 TOOLING AND EQUIPMENT
09-30-01 AIRCRAFT RECOVERY EQUIPMENT TOOLING AND MATERIALS
09-30-01-002-A01 General
09-30-02 AIRCRAFT RECOVERY TOOLING
09-30-02-001-B01 General
09-30-03 IATP AIRCRAFT RECOVERY KITS
09-30-03-001-A01 General
09-30-03-002-A01 Example of IATP Recovery Kit
09-50 CALCULATION WORKSHEETS
09-50-01 WEIGHT AND CG CALCULATION WORKSHEETS
09-50-01-001-A01 Worksheets
T.O.C.
Page 7
Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
INTRODUCTION
01-00 INTRODUCTION
01-00-00 INTRODUCTION
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-00-00-001-A01
General
1. This document is intended to provide, for areas which are under Airbus responsibility, aircraft
comprehensive details relative to the procedures, planning, equipment and tooling to effectively
recover the A330-200F aircraft. The airlines and airport authorities can use this information as a
planning tool for aircraft recovery preparations.
2. Aircraft recovery is an operation that is the result of an unplanned incident and as such, advance
preparations should be made. These preparations should include the establishment of an Aircraft
Recovery Team, aircraft recovery training, listings of aircraft recovery equipment availability and the
development of an internal Aircraft Recovery Process Document.
These are general procedures and will vary according to the individual incident and the equipment
available. In most cases the recovery will be carried out under abnormal conditions of both weather
and aircraft attitude.
Country and state rules and regulations have to be followed, even though they may impede the
recovery operation. Make sure that the relevant authorities have formally released the aircraft, before
starting the aircraft recovery process. For further information on aircraft accident and incident
investigation see ICAO Annex 13.
Personal safety and prevention of secondary damage are emphasized in this document.
The data provided in this document is based on a serviceable aircraft in a normal attitude (except
where specified). If the aircraft is in a different condition, the data will have to be adjusted
accordingly.
Procedures for aircraft recovery from water are not covered by this document.
It is recommended that the individual airlines share their aircraft recovery experiences with the
aircraft manufacturer and groups such as the International Airline Transport Association (IATA),
Aircraft Recovery Task Force (ARTF) and the International Airline Technical Pool (IATP). The
International Airline Technical Pool as well as some airports and airlines could provide Aircraft
Recovery Kits, at strategic locations around the world. Information about these groups is available at
the following web sites:
- http://www.iata.org
- http://www.iatp.com
NOTE : IATP website and recovery kits are available for IATP members only.
NOTE : This chapter gives references to web sites for information only. Airbus shall not be held
liable for web site or document content and for update or change of addresses.
Page 1
01-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-00-00-002-A01
Important Notice to Users of this Document
1. General
The technical data contained in this Aircraft Recovery Manual (ARM) is intended only for general
planning, preparations and establishing procedures for the recovery of a disabled A330-200F aircraft
with consideration given for return to service.
Airbus recommends that A330-200F operators and airport authorities use the data in this manual to
develop recovery schemes based on various scenarios, using the equipment available, typical situations
and the recommendations included in the ATA specification.
Airbus strongly recommends that all data and actions related to the recovery are recorded to ensure
that all necessary corrective actions are taken prior to release to service of the aircraft.
The data given in this document is accurate at the date of publication. In case of any conflict, the
Aircraft Technical Specification shall take precedence.
This manual does not include data with regards to any optional modifications. These additions may
have an impact on the weight and CG position calculations, defueling and cargo loading procedures.
Contact Airbus for further information.
2. Disclaimer
THE USER HEREBY WAIVES, RELEASES AND RENOUNCES ALL WARRANTIES,
OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES OF AIRBUS AND RIGHTS, CLAIMS AND REMEDIES OF THE
USER AGAINST AIRBUS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARISING BY LAW OR OTHERWISE, WITH
RESPECT TO ANY NON-CONFORMITY OR DEFECT IN THIS DOCUMENT, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO:
- ANY WARRANTY AGAINST HIDDEN DEFECTS;
- ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS;
- ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF PERFORMANCE, COURSE OF
DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE;
- ANY OBLIGATION, LIABILITY, RIGHT, CLAIM OR REMEDY, WHETHER CONTRACTUAL
OR DELICTUAL AND WHETHER OR NOT ARISING FROM AIRBUS’S NEGLIGENCE,
ACTUAL OR IMPUTED, AND
- ANY OBLIGATION, LIABILITY, RIGHT, CLAIM OR REMEDY FOR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO
PROPERTY.
AIRBUS SHALL HAVE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY, HOWSOEVER ARISING, FOR LOSS OF
USE, REVENUE OR PROFIT OR FOR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY NON-CONFORMITY OR DEFECT IN
THIS DOCUMENT.
AIRBUS SHALL HAVE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE BEHAVIOR
OF TOOLING USED FOR THE RECOVERY OF THE AIRCRAFT.
Page 2
01-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
01-00-02 SEQUENCE OF THE DOCUMENT
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-00-02-001-A01
General
1. This manual obeys the ATA iSpec 2200 specification format.
2. This document uses a three-part identification reference (XX-XX-XX), in which each pair of digit
means: CHAPTER, SECTION and SUBJECT.
3. The ARM contains two categories of data.
A. Description
This part gives the general description of the aircraft or systems, data related to aircraft
recovery (recovery team, recovery charts, landing gear, fuel ...) and worksheets.
For details about the numbering of the description topics, see FIGURE 01-00-02-991-001-A.
B. Task
For details on the task oriented ARM, see DESC 01-00-02-002-A01.
For details about the numbering of the tasks, see FIGURE 01-00-02-991-002-A.
4. Warnings, Cautions and Notes.
- WARNING: Calls attention to use of materials, processes, methods, procedures or limits that
must be carefully obeyed to prevent injury or death.
- CAUTION: Calls attention to methods and procedures that must be obeyed to prevent damage to
equipment.
- NOTE: Calls attention to methods that make the work easier or gives explanations.
5. Abbreviations
All the abbreviations used in this manual are detailed in 09-10-02.
6. Revision bars.
The revision bars show that the content is either new or revised.
7. This manual recommends that the recovery team makes and issues records to help aircraft return to
service and carefully monitors the implementation of corrective actions.
See 08-00-00.
Page 1
01-00-02 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
1 2 3 4 5
Description
Numbering System
PART FUNCTION
@A330-200F
FIGURE-01-00-02-991-001-A01
1 THRU 3 ATA SIX−DIGIT NUMBER FROM THE ATA ISPEC 2200 BREAKDOWN DOCUMENT
THAT IDENTIFIES THE CHAPTER−SECTION−SUBJECT.
4 THREE−DIGIT NUMBER THAT IDENTIFIES THE DESCRIPTIONS.
5 THREE−DIGIT ALPHANUMERICAL IDENTIFIER THAT IDENTIFIES THE CONFIGURATION.
01-00-02
F_AR_010002_1_0010101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 2
**ON A/C A330-200F
1 2 3 4 5 6
Task
Numbering System
@A330-200F
PART FUNCTION
FIGURE-01-00-02-991-002-A01
1 THRU 3 ATA SIX−DIGIT NUMBER FROM THE ATA ISPEC 2200 BREAKDOWN DOCUMENT
THAT IDENTIFIES THE CHAPTER−SECTION−SUBJECT.
4 THREE−DIGIT FUNCTION CODE THAT YOU CAN FIND IN THE FUNCTION CODE LIST
( SEE 01−00−02−002 ) THAT INDICATES THE SPECIFIC PROCEDURE RELATED TO TASKS AND SUBTASKS.
5 THREE−DIGIT NUMBER ALLOCATED TO EACH TASK AND SUBTASK.
01-00-02
TO SEPARATE THE TASKS AND SUBTASKS, THE TASK NUMBERS BEGIN AT
801 AND INCREASE, IN SEQUENCE, TO 999 (MAXIMUM). THE SUBTASK NUMBERS BEGIN AT 001 AND INCREASE
IN SEQUENCE TO 800 (MAXIMUM) WITHIN THE PROCEDURE.
6 THREE−DIGIT ALPHANUMERICAL IDENTIFIER THAT IDENTIFIES THE CONFIGURATION.
F_AR_010002_1_0020101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 3
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-00-02-002-A01
Task Oriented ARM
1. General
In the ARM, the procedures are contained in tasks.
The task is a logical sequence of the procedure steps and is broken down into subtasks.
The subtask gives all the details of the significant steps of the procedure.
For task numbering, see DESC 01-00-02-001-A01.
2. Function Codes
Function
Definition Task/Subtask
Code
000 Removal Task
010 Remove/Open For Access Task/Subtask
020 Remove Unit/Component/Disconnect/Loosen/Remove Item Task/Subtask
040 Deactivation Task/Subtask
081 Remove Safety Locks Task/Subtask
200 Inspection/Check Task
284 Inspection of damage Subtask
285 Survey Damage and Terrain Task/Subtask
481 Install Safety Locks Task/Subtask
500 Material and Aircraft Handling Task/Subtask
556 Mooring Task/Subtask
558 Weight and CG Management Task/Subtask
581 Leveling/Lifting Task/Subtask
582 Moving the Aircraft Task/Subtask
583 Shoring Task/Subtask
584 Towing Task/Subtask
585 Taxiing Task/Subtask
586 Lowering Task/Subtask
587 Debogging Task/Subtask
588 Stabilizing Task/Subtask
650 Fueling/Defueling Task/Subtask
680 Drain Fluid Task/Subtask
862 De-energize Electrical Network Task/Subtask
866 Flight Control Surfaces Movement Task/Subtask
Page 4
01-00-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Function
Definition Task/Subtask
Code
867 Landing Gear Movement Task/Subtask
869 Miscellaneous Task/Subtask
970 Data Recording/Calculating Task/Subtask
972 Damage Recording Subtask
980 Manual Operation or Positioning Subtask
Task/Subtask Function Codes Definition
TABLE 1
3. Task Structure
Each recovery task is broken down into the paragraphs that follow:
A. Task Supporting Data
(1) General
This paragraph gives general information and a short description of the procedure.
(2) Inspection
This paragraph gives instructions to do a preliminary inspection if necessary.
(3) Job Set Up Data
This paragraph collects all the generic data which are not in the Job Set Up Information
and are necessary to do the actions described in the procedure.
(4) Job Set Up Information
This paragraph collects all materials, tools and referenced information necessary to do the
actions described in the procedure.
B. Procedure
This paragraph is broken down into subtasks.
(1) Subtasks
The Subtasks contain actions/instructions to do the procedure.
C. Figures
This part contains all illustrations related to the procedure.
Page 5
01-00-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-00-02-003-A01
Content
1. MANUAL FRONT MATTER
This part of the manual contains the preliminary pages.
Items in this part are:
A. The manual front page.
B. The highlights which give the description of changes at subtask and figure level.
C. The list of effective content which gives for each task, subtask and figure the last revision date
with a change code (which is also used in the highlights):
- blank: no changes
- R: revised content
- N: new content
- D: deleted content.
D. The table of contents which is the list of chapters, subjects, tasks and descriptions contained in
the manual.
2. Chapter 01 - INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives general data and information on the aircraft.
Items in this chapter are:
A. A list of related documents in which it is possible to find more information.
B. A general aircraft description.
3. Chapter 02 - SURVEY
This chapter gives the information that follow for areas which are under Airbus responsibility:
A. An aircraft recovery logic chart, which has been developed for the Aircraft Recovery Manager
and his team, to help obey the necessary steps of the recovery process. It is used with a specific
CHAPTER/SECTION/SUBJECT of the ARM.
B. Details on initial inspection, site survey, soil stability, weather conditions and equipment.
C. Health and safety issues related to aircraft recovery.
4. Chapter 03 - WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT
This chapter contains the items that follow:
A. Weight, H-arm, Y-arm and Z-arm management, with general and specific information for
operations such as calculation of the NRW, associated H-arm, Y-arm and Z-arm locations and
CG.
B. The names of documents where it is possible to find aircraft weight and balance data.
C. The effect of different elements on the CG, such as large aircraft components, fuel, payload…
Page 6
01-00-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
5. Chapter 04 - PREPARATION
This chapter contains the details that follow:
A. The tasks which are necessary before leveling/lifting the aircraft (manual operation of flight
control surfaces, tethering, ground anchoring, check of weight, H-arm and Y-arm, etc.).
B. The tethering procedure.
C. General information and instructions for the manual operation of different units or equipments
such as landing gears, flaps, flight controls, cargo doors…
6. Chapter 05 - WEIGHT REDUCTION
This chapter gives:
A. Detailed information on the aircraft fuel system.
B. The way to manually find the fuel quantity.
C. Various defueling scenarios.
D. Detailed information on payload removal.
E. The removal procedure of the major components.
7. Chapter 06 - LEVELING AND LIFTING
This chapter gives details on:
A. The basic means of leveling/lifting the aircraft.
(1) Jacks,
(2) Pneumatic Lifting Bags,
(3) Cranes.
B. The method to calculate expected load, travel range and arc movement based on aircraft
attitude, NRW and CG calculated in Chapter 03.
C. Detailed leveling/lifting scenarios.
8. Chapter 07 - MOVING THE AIRCRAFT
This chapter gives:
A. Debogging or towing methods and aircraft limits.
B. Procedures to be implemented to return a damaged aircraft to the hard surface.
9. Chapter 08 - POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
This chapter gives:
A. A link to the post recovery AMM inspection.
B. An explanation about the need of recording and monitoring corrective actions during the
recovery operation.
10. Chapter 09 - APPENDIX
The appendices give general information on:
A. Units and Measurements.
Page 7
01-00-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
B. Glossary of terms and list of abbreviations.

C. General aircraft description.
D. Recovery preparation.
E. Tooling and equipment.
F. Calculation worksheets.
Page 8
01-00-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-00-02-004-A01
Effectivity Management
1. The Aircraft Recovery Manual is issued to give the data for A330-200 Freighter aircraft which are
necessary to accomplish a recovery.
The configuration is managed at the aircraft level:
- A330-200 F
Page 9
01-00-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
01-00-03 DEFINITIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-00-03-001-A01
General
1. Terms Definitions
Chapter DESC 09-10-02-001-A01 gives the definition of terms related to aircraft recovery.
2. Abbreviations Definitions
Chapter DESC 09-10-02-003-A01 gives the definitions of abbreviations related to aircraft recovery.
Page 1
01-00-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
01-10 RELATED DATA
01-10-01 RELATED DATA
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-10-01-002-A01
Airbus Data
1. If necessary, you can find additional information/data in the documents that follow:
- A330 Aircraft Characteristics (AC)
- A330 Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM)
- A330 llustrated Parts Catalog (IPC)
- A330-200F Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
- A330 Maintenance Facility Planning (MFP)
- A330/A340 Weight and Balance Manual (WBM)
- A330/A340 Illustrated Tool and Equipment Manual (TEM)
- A330/A340 Cargo Loading System Manual (CLS)
- List of Radioactive and Hazardous Elements Manual (LRE)
- PW 4000 Engine Manual
- RR Trent 700 Engine Manual
- Airn@v, AirbusWorld, …
Page 1
01-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-10-01-001-A01
Other Data
1. Web Sites
This topic gives references to web sites for information only. This list is not exhaustive and is made
from the data available to Airbus at issue of the ARM.
2. Publications - Manuals - Documents
This topic gives references to non-Airbus manuals or documents for information only. This list is not
exhaustive and is made from the data available to Airbus at issue of the ARM. Airbus shall not be
held liable for document content.
- Country Regulation
- ICAO Annex 14
- ICAO Annex 13
- ICAO 9137 Part 5
- FAA AC 150/5200-31A
- FAR 139.325 Airport Emergency Plan
- JAR/FAR 145
3. Airline Documents
This topic gives references to airline documents for information only. This list is not exhaustive.
- Airline Aircraft Recovery Process Documents (see DESC 09-20-01-004-A01)
- Airline Load and Trim Sheet Document
- Airline Weight and Balance Manual
- Airline Aircraft Modification Record
Page 2
01-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
01-20 GENERAL AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS
01-20-01 GENERAL AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-20-01-001-B01
General Aircraft Description
1. The A330-200F aircraft is a subsonic long-range aircraft. This aircraft is suitable for cargo
commercial transport.
The A330-200F aircraft has 2 turbofan engines under the wings:
- PW 4000 engine,
- RR Trent 700 engine.
The A330-200F aircraft has:
- 7 slats on each wing,
- 2 flaps (inboard and outboard) on each wing,
- 2 ailerons (inboard and outboard) on each wing,
- 6 spoilers on each wing,
- 1 trimmable horizontal stabilizer (THS) with 2 elevators,
- 1 vertical stabilizer with a rudder,
- A standard configuration with 4 main fuel tanks (1 inner fuel tank and 1 outer fuel tank on each
wing) and 1 trim fuel tank. 1 center fuel tank can be installed between the wings, related to the
airline configuration.
- 1 standard 2.5 in refuel/defuel couplings under each wing,
- 1 nose landing gear with two wheels,
- 2 main landing gears with a four-wheel bogie,
- 1 potable water tank in the pressurized section of the fuselage,
- 1 waste water tank,
- 1 main deck cargo compartment,
- 1 lower deck forward cargo compartment,
- 1 lower deck aft cargo compartment,
- 1 lower deck bulk cargo compartment.
2. The appendix gives detailed aircraft description.
See 09-00-00.
Page 1
01-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 01-20-01-002-B01
General Aircraft Data
1. This section gives general data (weight, payload, fuel capacity, ...) related to the A330-200F aircraft.
Refer to the operator’s documentation for accurate values related to the specific aircraft.
Weight Variant WV000 WV001 WV002 *
Maximum Ramp Weight
(MRW) 233 900 kg 227 900 kg 233 900 kg
Maximum Taxi Weight (515 660 lb) (502 432 lb) (515 660 lb)
(MTW)
Maximum Takeoff Weight 233 000 kg 227 000 kg 233 000 kg
(MTOW) (513 676 lb) (500 448 lb) (513 676 lb)
Maximum Landing Weight 182 000 kg 187 000 kg 187 000 kg
(MLW) (401 240 lb) (412 263 lb) (412 263 lb)
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 173 000 kg 178 000 kg 173 000 kg to 178 000 kg
(MZFW) (381 399 lb) (392 422 lb) (381 399 lb to 392 422 lb)
Maximum Payload 64 742 kg 69 742 kg 64 742 kg to 69 742 kg
with PW 4000 Engines (142 732 lb) (153 755 lb) (142 732 lb to 153 755 lb)
Maximum Payload 65 000 kg 70 000 kg 65 000 kg to 70 000 kg
with RR TRENT 700 Engines (143 300 lb) (154 324 lb) (143 300 lb to 154 324 lb)
139 090 l
Usable Fuel Capacity (36 744 US gal)
(Density = 0.785 kg/l) 109 185 kg
(240 711 lb)
Aircraft Data for A330-200F
TABLE 1
NOTE : * Dynamic payload between WV000 and WV001.
Page 2
01-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
SURVEY
02-00 SURVEY
02-00-00 SURVEY
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 02-00-00-001-A01
General
1. Introduction
The objective is to define a recovery scenario based on a recovery plan and implement it:
- Without causing secondary damage,
- By ensuring traceability of actions performed.
The recovery must be set up and controlled according to a recovery process.
If a recovery contributing factor (see FIGURE 02-00-00-991-002-A) changes or is not as expected,
each section must be reviewed to reconsider the recovery process.
The recovery process is detailed in chapter 02-10-01 and is valid when there is no worldwide recovery
standard procedure for events of an infinite variety, even if there are basic leveling techniques:
- Use of Jacks (see 06-30-00),
- Use of Pneumatic Lifting Bags (see 06-40-00),
- Use of Cranes (see 06-50-00).
The ARM planning chart, aircraft recovery logic chart or the IATA aircraft recovery quick reference
checklist could be used to support this recovery process (see 09-20-01).
2. Recovery Secondary Damage
The objective of a successful aircraft recovery operation is to move the aircraft from the incident or
accident site to a repair area or facility without causing any secondary damage.
The secondary damage is a damage which is not due to the initial event, and can increase the repair
time. However, due to time or cost constraints, secondary damage will be accepted from involved
parties. In that case make sure that the time saving is acceptable in comparison with the cost.
The insurance underwriters can probably contest any secondary damage. Therefore every step of the
recovery process must be continually monitored with appropriate action taken to prevent it.
NOTE : The damage on airport infrastructure or field can be considered as secondary damage if
adequate action is not done in due time.
Page 1
02-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
LOCATION OF RECOVERY AIRCRAFT SECURITY
AIRCRAFT DAMAGE OPERATION CONTROL−

ASSESSMENT FOR MONITORING REPORTING
RECOVERY PURPOSE
AIRCRAFT RELEASE
REPAIR TO ENABLE FROM INVESTIGATIVE
RECOVERY AUTHORITY
− PLANNING
− LEAD TIME
− LOGISTICS
− CONTRACT
AIRCRAFT AND TOOLING RECOVERY
STABILITY SCENARIO
POST RECOVERY
ACTIONS DUE TO
RECOVERY SCENARIO
TERRAIN ANALYSIS
MISCELLANEOUS
TOOLING AVAILABILITY
TOWING / DEBOGGING
INTENTIONAL
AIRCRAFT LEVELING SECONDARY DAMAGE
AIRCRAFT LIFTING
AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND

AIRCRAFT TETHERING BALANCE MANAGEMENT
F_AR_020000_1_0020101_01_00
Recovery Process
Contributing Factors
FIGURE-02-00-00-991-002-A01
Page 2
02-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
02-10 CHARTS AND GUIDES
02-10-01 CHARTS AND GUIDES
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 02-10-01-001-A01
Aircraft Recovery Process
1. General
The recovery methods used are specific to each recovery operation, are dependent on multiple drivers
and constraints, including non aircraft specific drivers, as well as the individual aircraft recovery
considerations.
The recovery process can be divided into five basic sections:
- Survey,
- Planning,
- Preparation,
- Recovery,
- Reporting.
A. Survey
(1) Before you get access to the incident or accident site and while waiting for release of the
aircraft from the Investigative Authorities, some preliminary tasks can be carried out.
Some general issues are:
- Get and record the initial incident or accident data,
- Secure the site: fire, theft and access control,
- Confirm that members of the Aircraft Recovery Team are available,
- Arrange delivery of any local aircraft recovery equipment,
- Make communication with airport and Investigative Authorities,
- Identify the hazardous materials which are on board,
- Get an airport plan to assess aircraft or recovery team travel path difficulty, etc.
(2) After access to the incident or accident site, you must do a detailed inspection and a
record of the items that follow:
- Integrity of the aircraft structure and landing gear,
- Survey of the soil conditions,
- Local weather conditions,
- Personnel health and safety issues,
- Environmental concerns.
(3) The other issues to consider if the incident took place at a secondary or international
airport are:
- Transportation of personnel and equipment,
- Visas, passports and vaccinations certificates,
- Hotels and local transport.
Page 1
02-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
B. Planning
The main planning issues are (not in order of importance) :
- Identification of your recovery drivers,
- Adverse weather conditions or critical forecast which can have an impact on material
required, recovery plan and recovery team operation, etc.
- Limitation of airport use with the disabled aircraft,
- Type of leveling, lifting or removal plan,
- Aircraft weight and balance management operation, if necessary,
- Unserviceable aircraft systems,
- Storage of removed fuel,
- Aircraft movement possibility and path,
- Compilation of all corrective actions, necessary logistics and planning,
- Necessary tooling.
C. Preparation
The main preparation issues are (not necessary in the applicable order) :
- Control weight and CG by removal or transfer of the required amount of fuel and payload,
- Make the aircraft stable,
- Assemble the required equipment for the leveling/lifting method that you will use,
- Remove components which are damaged,
- Remove components to help the weight reduction,
- Test and stabilize the soil if necessary.
D. Recovery
The main recovery issues are (in priority order) :
- Obey the safety conditions for personnel,
- Monitor and record load when you level, lift and move the aircraft,
- Level the aircraft as required,
- Lift the aircraft as required,
- Move the aircraft.
E. Reporting
It is necessary to do the recovery records. The Recovery Manager must hand these records over
to the maintenance team. They will be used to do the necessary corrective action and release
the aircraft back to service, for systems and structure.
Page 2
02-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 02-10-01-002-A01
Aircraft Recovery Logic Chart
1. General
The Aircraft Recovery Logic Charts (see DESC 09-20-01-002-A01) are an aid for the Aircraft
Recovery Manager and his team. The recovery charts describe the necessary steps of the recovery
process and can be used as a checklist by ticking off the boxes when completed. Although detailed,
the chart must be used with the complete ARM. These charts give the specific areas of the ARM
where you can find additional and more detailed data on a specific subject.
Page 3
02-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
02-20 INITIAL SURVEY
02-20-01 INITIAL AIRCRAFT SURVEY
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 02-20-01-285-801-A01
Initial Aircraft Survey
1. General
A detailed aircraft condition report must be completed as soon as possible to help the basic approach
to the recovery process, to ensure safety of the personnel and to anticipate the repairs. The
inspection and the subsequent report do not need to be as detailed for the recovery as for repair of
the aircraft.
Photographs, sketches, measurements, notes, etc. can complete the documentation. Digital cameras,
video recorders and pocket audio recorders can help to record the data.
The documentation will help engineering staff, insurance surveyors and manufacturer representatives
to discuss the details of the recovery scenarios/options. This information will be helpful to fill in a
report when the recovery is completed.
The future airworthiness of the aircraft can be dependent on the accuracy of the data recorded during
the recovery operation. These records must include accurate figures on all loads applied to the
aircraft during the recovery.
In most cases, the accident investigation will be more important than the aircraft recovery process.
The objective of the accident investigation is to determine the cause of the incident or accident and
provide details to prevent the re-occurrence of such an event.
Keep in mind that the time between the notification of the event and release of the aircraft by the
Investigative Authorities can be several hours.
If the Investigative Authority asks for removal of the Aircraft Flight Data and Cockpit Voice
Recorders, qualified personnel must do it and obey AMM procedures. These units are to be handed
over to the Investigative Authority. In return, the Investigative Authority will give you a receipt with
the aircraft registration and the serial numbers of the removed units.
It is necessary to note current and forecast weather.
2. Inspections
It is necessary to estimate the fuel quantity, the cargo on board.
It is also necessary to identify and quantify hazardous materials with any required personnel
protective equipment.
3. Job Setup References
Not Applicable.
Page 1
02-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
4. Job Set-up Information

A. Referenced Information
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
AMM
Referenced Information
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
WARNING : DO NOT CLIMB ON, GO INTO OR GO BELOW THE AIRCRAFT UNTIL THE
AIRCRAFT IS STABLE.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS CORRECTLY GROUNDED.
NOTE : The information or principle contained in this chapter are given as a guide to assist an
aircraft recovery.
Subtask 02-20-01-284-001-A01
A. Inspection of Damage
(1) Without climbing on, going into or going below the aircraft, identify and record all obvious
and visible damage. Note the location on the fuselage with frame (station) and stringer
numbers, and on the wing with rib and station numbers.
(2) The types of damage include cracked, creased, distorted or torn fuselage and wing skin
panels and also missing or broken fasteners (bolts, rivets…) and fittings.
(3) These types of damage are signs of failed structural components and must be considered as
suspect. These failed structural components cannot be relied on to carry their designed
loads. It is necessary to do a more detailed inspection on these areas prior to leveling,
lifting or moving the aircraft.
(4) It is necessary to record any evidence of fire or overheating.
(5) It is also necessary to identify missing and damaged components such as landing gear, flap
sections and non-structural fairings. Broken fairings can be a sign of hidden damage to
other structural areas.
(6) It is necessary to do a more detailed inspection on these areas prior to leveling, lifting or
moving the aircraft.
Subtask 02-20-01-680-001-A01
B. Fluid Leaks
(1) Fluid leaks must be identified.
Page 2
02-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) These fluid leakages can be fuel, hydraulic fluid, lavatory waste water, potable water and
any fluid transported in the cargo compartments.
At the first indication of a fluid leak, the airport or Investigative Authorities must call for a
hazardous materials response company to contain these leaking fluids.
(3) Cap lines and manually close valves to stop or control fluid leaks. Or temporarily plug holes
or openings to stop the flow. If there is a fuel leak, defueling must be a primary task.
NOTE : This step can be required at any point during the initial aircraft survey.
Subtask 02-20-01-862-001-A01
C. Batteries
(1) If there is any structural damage on the fuselage or wings, it is necessary to remove or
isolate the aircraft batteries as soon as the aircraft is stable.
NOTE : This step can be required at any point during the initial aircraft survey.
(2) It is possible to keep the batteries connected if there is no structural or system damage.
This can be useful later for the recovery process. This decision can be re-examined during
the survey and recovery.
NOTE : At this point, it is possible to try to make the aircraft stable and safe so that it is
possible to do a detailed inspection in and below the aircraft.
Subtask 02-20-01-869-001-A01
D. Landing Gear
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK PINS ARE INSTALLED IF
THEIR INSTALLATION IS POSSIBLE.
(1) If a landing gear malfunction caused the event, it can be possible to continue to use the
aircraft landing gear to move the aircraft when lifted. It is necessary to make sure that the
structure and landing gear (when extended) can support the aircraft weight. Examples are:
- One or more landing gear(s) remained retracted at touchdown,
- One or more landing gear(s) collapsed after touchdown due to downlock failures,
- One or more landing gear(s) folded or collapsed when the aircraft left the runway and
bogged down in mud, snow or sand.
(2) In these cases, it can be possible to extend and lock the landing gear down after lifting the
aircraft and after carrying out temporary repairs to strengthen or brace damaged parts. If
repairs are necessary, it is usually less difficult and less time consuming to do these repairs
than to have secondary damage when moving the aircraft on a trailer or a recovery
transport vehicle.
(3) Make sure that spare landing-gear assemblies are available to replace damaged or missing
ones, if required.
Page 3
02-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
02-20-02 INITIAL SITE SURVEY
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 02-20-02-285-801-A01
Initial Site Survey
1. General
This procedure gives details on how to do a full survey of the incident site around the aircraft.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Get an airport map from the airport authority (we recommend a topographical map, which includes
subterranean infrastructure localization) of the incident area.
AC 07-00-00
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
aircraft recovery.
Subtask 02-20-02-285-001-A01
A. Terrain
(1) If the ground is sufficiently flat, the recovery process can be more direct. It will be more
difficult to move the aircraft on a rolling terrain with hills and it can be necessary to grade
the ground.
You can report on the airport site plan the position of the aircraft, the flatness, slopes,
hills, width and depth of any ditches or culverts and surrounding vegetation. You can
examine the area to know if there is any animal life (rodents and snakes).
Page 1
02-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 02-20-02-285-002-A01
B. Soil Characteristics
(1) The load bearing capacity is very important. This information is necessary to set up the
support equipment to level, lift or move the aircraft.
It is also necessary to do the selection of the type of tethering. The type of ground anchors
is dependent on the soil properties.
(2) The type of soil can be noted in addition to the substrate. It is possible to use the ruts
made by the landing gear to identify the subsurface soil type.
(3) Subterranean airport infrastructure must be known.
Signs of recent excavations must be noted. The airport site plan must be amended to
indicate any of these areas. Signs of recent excavations usually show soft and unstable
ground.
This information is very important, as it will influence the path to move the aircraft during
the recovery.
(4) One of the standards used to compare different soil conditions is the California Bearing
Ratio or CBR.
This test measures the load necessary to make a plunger of a standard area penetrate a
soil sample. The information is recorded on a standard graph and the plot of the test gives
the CBR result of the soil test.
The CBR is a procedure to put a figure on the inherent strength of the soil. The soil must
have a homogeneous CBR rating through a sufficient depth. For more details, you can refer
to a ground engineer.
(5) The possible effect of rainfall on the ground load bearing capabilities can change with the
surface hardness, smoothness or drainage.
Use pumps to remove standing water and dig drainage ditches from the work area.
Subtask 02-20-02-500-001-A01
C. Access Routes
(1) Access routes to the incident site can be planned with the airport site map. In most cases,
it is necessary to go across active runways.
The air traffic control service must plan and control these routes.
(2) Carefully review of the path of the aircraft from the runway to the resting point.
The distance to runways, taxiways and aprons, the type of soil, rut depth and terrain will
all influence in which direction the aircraft will be moved once the actual recovery starts.
(3) Pavement requirements for the particular aircraft are derived from the static analysis of
loads imposed on the main landing gear struts.
These main landing gear loads are used as the point of entry to the pavement design
charts (See AC 07-00-00).
Make sure that the surfaces you will move the aircraft on are able to support these loads.
Page 2
02-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(4) Make sure that the specific ground tooling or road used to level, lift or move the aircraft
are able to support aircraft load.
(5) Make sure that the loads applied to the aircraft are not more than aircraft allowable loads.
Subtask 02-20-02-869-001-A01
D. Weather
(1) Weather conditions can play a major role during aircraft recovery operations. General
meteorological conditions (temperature, wind speed and precipitation) must be recorded.
(2) Temperature, both extreme heat and extreme cold, will determine the type of clothing,
meals and liquid intake for the manpower involved in the recovery. The need for shelter
from heat or cold will also have to be determined.
(3) Forecast conditions must be acquired and recorded. The forecast will help to prepare the
type of personal protective clothing and to determine the recovery plan.
(4) Make sure that the required tooling can be used within forecast conditions.
(5) Wind and projected wind gust speeds will determine the amount of tethering and will
influence any attempts at lifting the aircraft.
(6) Any type of precipitation will have consequences in the grading, soil support and general
recovery operation.
Page 3
02-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
02-30 LANDING GEAR
02-30-01 LANDING GEAR
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 02-30-01-200-801-A01
Landing Gear Survey
1. General
WARNING : LET THE BRAKES AND THE WHEELS BECOME COOL BEFORE YOU GO NEAR
THE LANDING GEAR. DO NOT APPLY A LIQUID OR GAS FIRE EXTINGUISHER
DIRECTLY ON A HOT WHEEL OR BRAKE UNIT. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE
PRECAUTIONS, THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING GEAR IS UPLOCKED BEFORE YOU OPEN
THE GEAR DOORS MANUALLY. IF THE GEAR IS NOT UPLOCKED, THE
WEIGHT OF THE GEAR CAN BE ON THE DOORS. IF YOU OPEN THE DOORS IN
THIS CONDITION, THERE IS A RISK THAT THE LANDING GEAR WILL EXTEND
BY GRAVITY AND CAUSE INJURY.
The principles outlined in this chapter are provided as a guide to assist aircraft recovery.
The chapter gives the general inspections required to find the extent of any damage to the landing
gear and the recommended steps required to recover the aircraft.
You must do the applicable inspections before moving the aircraft.
For the description of the landing gears, see 09-10-16.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
A.Referenced Information
TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02 TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02-Installation of the Safety Devices on
Landing Gears
09-10-16 09-10-16-LANDING GEARS
04-20-00 04-20-00-STABILIZING THE AIRCRAFT
07-60-00 07-60-00-MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT
07-40-03 07-40-03-TOWING WITH DEFLATED TIRES
07-40-00 07-40-00-TOWING AND DEBOGGING
06-00-00 06-00-00-LEVELING AND LIFTING
04-80-00 04-80-00-MANUAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
Page 1
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
AMM 29-00-00-864
AMM 24-41-00-862-801
AMM 32-51-00-040
AMM 32-42-00PB401
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-001-A FIGURE 02-30-01-991-001-A-Landing Gear
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 02-30-01-867-001-A01
A. Safety Precautions
(1) Make sure that the aircraft is stable, see 04-20-00.
(2) Make sure that the Ground Lock Pins are installed on the landing gear where possible, see
TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02.
(3) Make sure that the MLG and NLG wheels are chocked where possible.
(4) Make sure that the Landing-Gear Control Lever (6GA) is in the DOWN position and put a
warning notice to tell people not to operate the landing gear lever.
(5) On the center pedestal, make sure that the Landing-Gear GRVTY Switches are in the OFF
position and safe, see FIGURE 02-30-01-991-001-A.
(6) If the aircraft wheel brake hydraulic circuits are serviceable:
(a) On the center pedestal, see FIGURE 02-30-01-991-002-A, set the PARK BRK switch
to the ON position.
(b) On the center panel, see FIGURE 02-30-01-991-002-A, make sure that the pressure
indication on the triple-indicator is correct. The pointer of the top gage (ACCU
PRESS) must be in the green range.
(c) Make sure that the hydraulic systems are depressurized, see AMM 29-00-00-864.
(d) Make sure that the aircraft electrical circuits are de-energized, see AMM
24-41-00-862-801.
(7) Put safety barriers around the Landing Gear(s) that are not correctly extended and
downlocked.
Page 2
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 02-30-01-867-003-A01
B. Landing Gear Positions
(1) A Landing Gear can be found in the following conditions:
(a) Fully extended and downlocked.
(b) Not fully extended or retracted.
(c) Retracted and uplocks released (Landing Gear Doors closed).
(d) Retracted and uplocked.
(e) Collapsed or missing.
(f) Bogged.
WARNING : IF THE LANDING GEAR DOES NOT FULLY EXTEND WHEN THE AIRCRAFT
IS LEVEL, SAFETY THE LANDING GEAR TO PREVENT UNWANTED
MOVEMENT.
(2) Before doing the inspection, make sure you know the position of the Landing Gear.
(a) Landing Gear fully extended and downlocked, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02:
1 Do the applicable inspection for that Landing Gear (NLG or MLG).
(b) Landing Gear not fully extended or retracted:
1 See 06-00-00 for the procedure to level and lift the aircraft.
2 It will be necessary to secure the Landing Gear to prevent it travelling further
and becoming a danger to anyone or to the recovery operations.
3 To support the gear, put a hydraulic lifting platform under the Landing Gear to
be supported. The platform must be able to support the weight of the landing
gear. Make sure that the lifting surface is covered with support materials, such
as tires or foam, to protect the Landing Gear from damage.
4 To further support the gear, raise the platform until the support materials make
good contact with the Landing Gear to prevent accidental movement of the gear
during the inspection.
5 You must make sure that all other ground lock pins are installed, then in the
cockpit, set the Landing-Gear GRVTY Switches to DOWN. This will open the
hydraulic system to RETURN and allow the unlocked leg to be lifted. See
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-001-A.
(c) Landing Gear Retracted and uplocked:
1 If the NLG is retracted and uplocked, it must be lowered and downlocked before
an inspection can be done, see 04-80-00 for the manual extension procedure.
Page 3
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
2 If the MLG is retracted and uplocked, it must be lowered and downlocked before
an inspection can be done, see 04-80-00 for the manual extension procedure.
(d) Landing Gear Retracted and uplocks released (Landing Gear Doors closed):
1 If the NLG is retracted with the Landing Gear Doors closed, see 04-80-00 for the
procedure to manually extend the gear, then do the applicable inspection.
2 If the MLG is retracted with the Landing Gear Doors closed, see 04-80-00 for the
procedure to manually extend the gear, then do the applicable inspection.
(e) Landing Gear Collapsed or missing:
If a Landing Gear is collapsed, missing or unusable, see 07-60-00 for the procedure to
move a damaged aircraft using special recovery vehicles.
(f) Landing Gear locked down and bogged down:
2 See TBD for the debogging procedure.
Subtask 02-30-01-867-004-A01
C. Landing Gear Inspection
(1) Main Landing Gear
(a) Do a visual inspection of the Main Landing Gear, the attachments to the Airframe,
the doors. Look for signs of distortions, cracks and ruptures. If this type of damage is
found on a component, it must be replaced before you move the aircraft.
(b) The following components can be removed if they are not usable or if they will
impede the recovery operation:
- The wheel brake components, see AMM 32-42-00PB401 for information on the
deactivation of brake components before you remove them.
- The Main Door.
- The Hinged Door.
- The Fairing Door.
(c) If the repair or replacement of damaged components is not possible because of general
area damage, the aircraft must be recovered on specialised recovery vehicles, see
07-60-00.
(d) Do a visual inspection of the tires. If there are deflated tires, see 07-40-03 for the
applicable limitations.
(2) Nose Landing Gear
(a) Do a visual inspection of the Nose Landing Gear, the attachments to the Airframe,
the two Forward and the two Rear Doors. Look for signs of distortions, and ruptures.
If this type of damage is found on a component, it must be replaced before you move
the aircraft.
Page 4
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(b) The following components can be removed if they are not usable or if they will
impede the recovery operation:
- The Forward Doors.
- The Rear Doors.
- The Nosewheel Steering components.
(c) See AMM 32-51-00-040 for the procedure to deactivate the NWS.
(d) If the repair or replacement of damaged components is not possible because of general
area damage, the aircraft must be recovered on specialised recovery vehicles, see
07-60-00.
(e) If the NLG is bogged, see TBD. If the NLG is on a hard surface see 07-40-00.
(f) Do a visual inspection of the tires. If there are deflated tires, see 07-40-03 for the
applicable limitations.
Page 5
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
UP
DOWN
LDG GEAR
L/G CONTROL LEVER GRVTY EXTN
A RESET
OFF
DOWN
L/G GRAVITY
EXTENSION SWITCHES
B
F_AR_023001_1_0010101_01_02
Landing Gear
L/G Control Lever and L/G GRVTY Switches
FIGURE-02-30-01-991-001-A01
Page 6
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A
B
PSI X1000
ACCU PRESS
0 4
3 3
1 1
BRAKES
OFF 117VU
A PARK BRK
ON
PULL & TURN
F_AR_023001_1_0020101_01_02
Landing Gear
Brakes - Indication and Control
FIGURE-02-30-01-991-002-A01
Page 7
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02
Installation of the Safety Devices on Landing Gears
1. General
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING GEAR AND DOOR TRAVEL RANGES ARE
CLEAR. MOVEMENT OF THE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS CAN CAUSE INJURY
AND/OR DAMAGE.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT, IF THE LANDING GEAR DOORS ARE OPEN, THEY ARE
SAFETIED BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE LANDING GEAR SAFETY-DEVICES. IF
THE LANDING GEAR DOORS ARE OPEN BUT NOT SAFETIED THERE IS A RISK
THAT THEY CAN CLOSE AND CAUSE INJURY.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE SAFETY DEVICES AND THE WARNING NOTICES ARE
IN POSITION BEFORE YOU START A TASK ON OR NEAR THE FLIGHT
CONTROLS, THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES, THE LANDING GEARS AND
RELATED DOORS AND COMPONENTS THAT MOVE. MOVEMENT OF
COMPONENTS CAN KILL OR CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE.
The chapter gives the recommended steps to install the safety devices on the landing gears and
landing gear doors prior to recover the aircraft.
For the description of the landing gears, see 09-10-16.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
A. Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment
460007174 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, MLG
D23304000 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, NLG
15461-103 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, CLG
30-1132001-00 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, NLG/CLG
30-1132004-00 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, NLG/CLG
Page 8
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
98F32204001001 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR
98F32104013000 COLLAR-SAFETY, MLG DOOR
98F32104015000 COLLAR-SAFETY, CLG DOOR
98F32204003000 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR
Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment
TABLE 1
B. Referenced Information
09-10-16 09-10-16-LANDING GEARS
AMM 29-00-00-864-804
AMM 32-16-00-010-801
AMM 32-12-00-010-801
AMM 32-22-00-010-801
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-026-A FIGURE 02-30-01-991-026-A-Landing Gear Doors
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 02-30-01-869-003-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Safety Precautions
(a) Make sure that the aircraft is stable, see 04-20-00.
(b) Make sure that the MLG wheels are chocked where possible.
(c) Make sure that the Landing-Gear Control Lever (6GA) is in the DOWN position and
put a warning notice to tell people not to operate the landing-gear control lever.
(d) Make sure that the Landing-Gear GRVTY Switches are in the OFF position.
(e) Make sure that the Green hydraulic system is depressurized, see AMM
29-00-00-864-804.
(2) Get Access
(a) Put the adjustable access platform adjacent to the applicable leg:
- the MLG, zone 731 (741).
Page 9
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- the NLG, zone 711.
Subtask 02-30-01-481-004-A01
B. Installation of the Safety Devices on the Landing Gears
(1) Installation of the Main Landing Gear Safety Locks:
(a) See FIGURE 02-30-01-991-024-A.
(b) Make sure that the holes in the MLG lock stay are aligned.
(c) Make sure that the 460007174 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, MLG is in a clean and
serviceable condition.
(d) Push and hold the button on the 460007174 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, MLG and install
it in the holes of the MLG lock stay.
(e) Make sure that the flag is in view from the ground.
(2) Installation of the Nose Landing Gear Safety Locks:
(a) See FIGURE 02-30-01-991-024-A.
(b) Make sure that the holes in the NLG lock stay are aligned.
(c) Make sure that the D23304000 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, NLG is in a clean and
serviceable condition.
(d) Push and hold the button on the D23304000 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, NLG and install
it in the holes of the NLG lock stay.
(e) Make sure that the flag is in view from the ground.
Subtask 02-30-01-481-005-A01
C. Installation of the Safety Devices on the Landing Gear Doors
(1) Installation of the safety devices on the Main Landing Gear Doors:
(a) See FIGURE 02-30-01-991-026-A.
(b) Open the MLG door, see AMM 32-12-00-010-801.
(c) Make sure that the piston rod of the MLG door actuator is clean.
(d) Remove the pins and open the 98F32104013000 COLLAR-SAFETY, MLG DOOR.
(e) Make sure that the 98F32104013000 COLLAR-SAFETY, MLG DOOR is clean and in
the correct condition.
(f) Put the 98F32104013000 COLLAR-SAFETY, MLG DOOR in position on the piston
rod of the MLG door actuator.
(g) Close the 98F32104013000 COLLAR-SAFETY, MLG DOOR around the piston rod.
(h) Push and hold the buttons of the pins and install them.
(i) Make sure that the flags are in view from the ground.
Page 10
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) Installation of the safety devices on the Nose Landing Gear Doors:
NOTE : Because each forward NLG door is hydraulically independent, you must install a
98F32204001001 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR on each on both door
actuators.
(a) See FIGURE 02-30-01-991-026-A.
(b) Open the NLG doors, see AMM 32-22-00-010-801.
(c) Make sure that the piston rod of the NLG door actuator is clean.
(d) Remove the pins and open each 98F32204001001 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR.
(e) Make sure that the 98F32204001001 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR is clean and in
the correct condition.
(f) Put the 98F32204001001 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR in position on the piston
rod of the MLG door actuator.
(g) Close the 98F32204001001 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR around the piston rod.
(h) Push and hold the button of the pins and install them.
(i) Make sure that the flags are in view from the ground.
Page 11
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
Z731 (Z741)
FLAG
PIN
GROUNDLOCK
MAIN LANDING GEAR
Z711
PIN
GROUNDLOCK
B FLAG
TYPICAL
NOSE LANDING GEAR

F_AR_023001_1_0240101_01_02
Landing Gear
Safety Devices of the MLG and NLG
FIGURE-02-30-01-991-024-A01
Page 12
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
Z731 (Z741)
DOOR ACTUATING
CYLINDER
MLG PIN
DOOR ACTUATOR
FLAG
PIN
COLLAR−SAFETY
A FLAG
A
Z711
NLG
DOOR ACTUATOR
F_AR_023001_1_0260101_01_02
Landing Gear Doors

Safety Devices of the MLG Doors and NLG Doors
FIGURE-02-30-01-991-026-A01
Page 13
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 02-30-01-867-803-A01
Jacking for Wheel Change
1. General
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE GROUND SAFETY-LOCKS ARE CORRECTLY

INSTALLED ON THE LANDING GEAR. THIS PREVENTS UNWANTED
MOVEMENT OF THE LANDING GEAR.
CAUTION : DO NOT DO THIS JACKING FOR WHEEL CHANGE PROCEDURE DURING

REFUELING OR DEFUELING PROCEDURES. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS ON JACKS
AND IF A FIRE OR IMPORTANT FUEL SPILLAGE OCCURS IT WILL NOT BE
POSSIBLE TO MOVE THE AIRCRAFT.
This procedure gives details for the replacement of the wheels.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
GSE NLG WHEEL JACK
TABLE 1
AMM 32-41-12PB401
AMM 32-41-11PB401
AMM 32-41-13PB401
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-020-A FIGURE 02-30-01-991-020-A-Jacking for Wheel Change
Page 14
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 02-30-01-869-001-A01
A. Safety Precautions
(1) Make sure that the aircraft is stable before you do any jacking operation, see 04-20-00.
(2) Make sure that the wheels are on the aircraft axis.
Subtask 02-30-01-581-001-A01
B. Jacking for Wheel Change of the Nose Landing Gear
(1) Put the wheel chocks in position at the MLG wheels.
(2) See TABLE 3 for specification of the wheel jack.
The aircraft can be lifted at its maximum takeoff weight.
CAPACITY CLOSED HEIGHT HYDRAULIC STROKE WIDTH
(MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX)
28 000 daN 170 mm 285 mm 180 mm
(62 947 lbf) (6.69 in) (11.23 in) (7.09 in)
Specification of the Wheel Jack
TABLE 3
(3) Put the GSE NLG WHEEL JACK in position and adjust the GSE NLG WHEEL JACK until
its adapter touches the ball pad, see FIGURE 02-30-01-991-020-A.
NOTE : The size of the jacking ball is 3/4 inch.

(4) Make sure that the GSE NLG WHEEL JACK is stable and in the vertical position.
(5) Slowly operate the GSE NLG WHEEL JACK to lift the tire off the ground.
(6) Change the wheel, see AMM 32-41-12PB401.
(7) Slowly operate the GSE NLG WHEEL JACK to lower the NLG.
(8) When the aircraft is on its wheels, remove the GSE NLG WHEEL JACK.
Page 15
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 02-30-01-581-002-A01
C. Jacking for Wheel Change of the Main Landing Gear
(1) Put the wheel chocks in position at the NLG and at the MLG, on the side where you do
not remove the wheels.
(2) See TABLE 4 and TABLE 5 for specification of the wheel jack.
The aircraft can be lifted at its maximum takeoff weight.
(a) Case of two inflated wheel tires and two deflated wheel tires:
60 000 daN 190 mm 410 mm 690 mm
(134 886 lbf) (7.49 in) (16.15 in) (27.17 in)
TABLE 4
(b) Case of four deflated wheel tires:

65 000 daN 118.5 mm 495 mm 690 mm
(146 126 lbf) (4.67 in) (19.49 in) (27.17 in)
TABLE 5
(3) Put the GSE MLG WHEEL JACK in position, see FIGURE 02-30-01-991-021-Aand
FIGURE 02-30-01-991-022-A.
(a) If there are two deflated wheel tires and two inflated wheel tires:
- put the GSE MLG WHEEL JACK in position on the side where the tires are
deflated so that the adapter touches the ball pad of the bogie.
If the two aft wheel tires are deflated:
- it is mandatory to lift the landing gear from the aft of the bogie.
NOTE : The size of the jacking ball is 3/4 inch.

(b) You can lift the two axles of the bogie beam of the same MLG at the same time if
you keep the bogie beam in a more or less level position to prevent extension of the
pitch trimmer on to its outstop.
(c) You can lift the two bogie beams of the two MLGs at the same time if you obey the
instructions that follow.
If all the tires are deflated and if you lift each axle independently, you must:
- lift the aft axles first,
Page 16
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- change the aft tires before you lift the forward axles,
- keep the aft jack in position while you lift the forward axles to prevent too much
loads on the aft axles.
(4) Slowly operate the GSE MLG WHEEL JACK to lift the tire off the ground with a ground
clearance of approximately 25 mm (0.98 in).
(5) Change the wheel, see AMM 32-41-11PB401.
(6) Slowly operate the GSE MLG WHEEL JACK to lower the MLG.
(7) When the aircraft is on its wheels, remove the GSE MLG WHEEL JACK.
Page 17
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
(15.74 in)
400 mm
170 mm
(6.69 in)
25 mm
(0.98 in)
110 mm 1 FLAT TIRE

180 mm MAX (4.33 in)
(7.09 in)
F_AR_023001_1_0200103_01_01

Jacking of the Nose Landing Gear
FIGURE-02-30-01-991-020-A01
Page 18
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
JACKING POINT
570 mm
(22.44 in)
25.4 mm
(1.00 in)
MAX DIAMETER
1443.7 mm
(56.84 in)
JACKING POINT
25.4 mm
(1.00 in)
570 mm
(22.44 in)
690 mm
(27.17 in)
F_AR_023001_1_0210101_01_02

Jacking of the Main Landing Gear
FIGURE-02-30-01-991-021-A01
Page 19
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
JACKING POINT JACKING POINT
145.9 mm 376 mm
(5.74 in) (14.80 in)
JACKING POINT
JACKING POINT
376 mm 145.5 mm
(14.80 in) (5.73 in)
JACKING POINT JACKING POINT
157 mm 157 mm
(6.18 in) (6.18 in)
F_AR_023001_1_0220101_01_01

Jacking of the Main Landing Gear with Flat Tires
FIGURE-02-30-01-991-022-A01
Page 20
02-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
02-40 HEALTH AND SAFETY ISSUES
02-40-01 HEALTH AND SAFETY ISSUES
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 02-40-01-001-A01
General
1. The emphasis during all aircraft recovery operations is SAFETY. All necessary precautions must be
taken to avoid injury to personnel and the occurrence of secondary damage to the aircraft. Not only
the members of aircraft recovery team, but everyone at the incident site must know all the safety
issues as they evolve. A number of different factors must be taken into account to make sure the
safety issue is properly controlled.
Make sure that adherence to a recovery close loop process is ensured to control and set up mitigation
plan if needed. By definition this implies that recovery plan engineering, tooling capability and
personnel qualification or expertise are correctly assessed.
Paragraphs are not in order of importance.
A. Communication
Make sure sufficient and correct communication equipment is available for communication at
the recovery site. Communication equipment can include two-way radios and cell phones. Voice
activated, lightweight headsets with microphones are ideal for recovery operations. Extra
batteries or a power supply must be available.
A direct link with the air traffic control service will most likely be required, depending on the
location of the incident site. The main problem will be to cross active runways and taxiways in
order to access the incident or accident site. In most cases the local air traffic control service
will provide an alternative access route to the site in order to reduce the amount of
communication.
It is absolutely mandatory that lines of communication are established and kept open between
all groups at the site, including the recovery team, fire department, Investigative Authority,
police, airport personnel and any contracted assistance.
Short briefing sessions must be held between all groups and parties involved with the recovery
process. These briefings will alert personnel to the upcoming steps, and to any possible hazards
and dangers.
B. Personnel
It should be understood that the aircraft is by definition not under normal maintenance or
operational status. Therefore its recovery involves multiple personnel/parties competencies,
which have not necessarily worked previously together and do not know each other’s
constraints-outcomes. As parties have incompatible goals it is of prime importance that the
recovery manager ensure that information, caution etc are well understood and put in practice
by all.
All personnel at the incident site must have proper and adequate personal protective clothing
and equipment. This will change greatly if the existing climate and weather conditions change.
Page 1
02-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Examples: Safety boots, personal breathing mask, rainwear, parkas and gloves, etc.
Personnel must be kept at a safe distance during any leveling/lifting operation. The recovery
manager must make sure that the personnel knows the dangers of steel cable during pulling and
winching operations, as well as dangers arising due to the nature of the corrective actions
embodiment.
Make sure that everyone knows the dangers of going into, climbing-on or going below the
aircraft until it is stable and or adequately shored.
First-aid kits must be available at the site to cope with minor injuries. Detailed information on
how to contact and arrange for emergency medical attention must be available.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS CORRECTLY GROUNDED.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL NETWORK IS DE-ENERGIZED

BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT THE EXTERNAL POWER CONNECTOR. IF YOU
DISCONNECT THE EXTERNAL POWER CONNECTOR WHEN THE ELECTRICAL
NETWORK IS ENERGIZED, DANGEROUS ARCING CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL NETWORK IS DE-ENERGIZED

BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT THE EXTERNAL POWER CONNECTOR. IF YOU
DO NOT DO SO, THERE IS A RISK OF ARCING AND THIS CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
C. Electrical Systems
If you took the decision to leave the aircraft with the batteries connected, do an investigation
before you energize the circuits. Leaving the batteries connected can help during the different
steps of the recovery process.
Before you use external aircraft power-supply to help the recovery operations, make sure that
the systems are serviceable.
If the aircraft structure is damaged, it is better to disconnect the batteries and not to try
energize the aircraft with the external supply.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY ALL THE APPLICABLE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WHEN YOU WORK ON THE OXYGEN SYSTEM OR WITH OXYGEN EQUIPMENT.
D. Oxygen Systems
When the aircraft is stable and it is possible to get into the aircraft, make sure that the oxygen
bottle valves in the cockpit and cabin are closed. If they are not, close them manually. If
possible, remove the bottles from the aircraft. Take the decision as to remove or secure the
oxygen generators. As this is a time-consuming task, this decision will be based on the current
dangers involved, the condition of the aircraft and the time available.
WHEN YOU REMOVE FUEL OR WHEN YOU WORK IN AN ENVIRONMENT
WHERE THERE IS FUEL.
Page 2
02-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE TANKER AND THE AIRCRAFT ARE CONNECTED TO
AN APPROVED GROUND AND THAT ELECTRICAL BONDING BETWEEN THE
AIRCRAFT AND THE TANKER IS CONNECTED. ONLY IF THESE CONDITIONS
ARE MET, YOU CAN CONNECT FUEL HOSES OR ADAPTERS BETWEEN THE
AIRCRAFT AND THE FUEL TANKER.
E. Defueling
Make sure that only qualified and approved personnel is near the aircraft during the defuel
process. Steps should be taken to have the Fire Department stand by until the end of this
process.
If there is any sign of fuel leaks, a hazardous materials team must try to contain any fuel
leakage.
F. Equipment
Make sure that contracted assistance, such as heavy-equipment operators, become part of the
group safety team approach and are briefed on all relative safety issues. Keep in mind that most
heavy-equipment operators never worked near an aircraft. It is necessary give them relevant
safety issues. Discuss with these operators the concerns of overloading equipment and the
subsequent possible dangers. Most heavy-equipment operators know these concerns but not as
they relate to the aircraft. These discussions can include areas such as maximum lifting loads
during crane lifts. Maximum jacking point loads and pneumatics lifting bags loading figures and
charts must be available.
G. Recovery Operations
Make sure that all equipment in use is properly rated for the loaded anticipated. Make sure that
the aircraft is stable during all the recovery actions and that tooling used will not cause aircraft
instability. Adherence to maximum wind speeds is required during lifting and leveling operations.
AIRBUS recommends that all loads imposed on the aircraft during a recovery operation must be
recorded. If it is not possible to record the loads, record all the steps used to make sure that you
do not exceed maximum loads. This will have a direct impact on corrective actions to do for
return to service.
Page 3
02-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT
03-00 WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT
03-00-00 WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 03-00-00-558-801-A01
General
1. General
The aim is to calculate the weight of the aircraft and the CG location in order to anticipate aircraft
stability changes.
The weight of the aircraft and the CG location are the basic data used to calculate the expected
loads and to select a recovery technique (selection of tooling and equipment).
The choice of a leveling/lifting scenario (see 06-60-00 ) and the use of the logic chart (see 09-20-01)
will help to control aircraft weight and CG.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Use aircraft reference axes, glossary of terms (see 09-10-02 ) and the aircraft reference OEW or
DOW.
A. Worksheet Principle
The worksheets are used to calculate the NRW and moments.
Chapter 03-60-01 gives the source of the specific data used to complete the ”interim
worksheets” and calculate the final NRW.
The NRW and CG worksheet indicates in front of each item which ARM chapter will give
relevant data to allow completion of ”interim worksheets” and final NRW calculation.
It is understood that NRW, CG position and calculation of expected loads will not be accurate if
generic data is used for the OEW, H-arm and Y-arm data.
It should be noted that the OEW or DOW and the H-arm and Y-arm apply to a specific aircraft
with all landing gears extended, flight controls retracted and thrust reversers in stowed position.
See 09-50-01 for the calculation worksheets.
06-60-00 06-60-00-LEVELING AND LIFTING SCENARIOS
09-20-01 09-20-01-QUICK REFERENCE DATA
09-10-02 09-10-02-GLOSSARY OF TERMS
03-60-01 03-60-01-REFERENCE FOR CALCULATION
Page 1
03-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-50-01 09-50-01-WEIGHT AND CG CALCULATION WORKSHEETS
FIGURE 03-00-00-991-002-G FIGURE 03-00-00-991-002-G-CG Conversion Principle
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT ALL PERSONNEL IS AT A SAFE DISTANCE DURING THE
REMOVAL OF FUEL, CARGO OR LARGE COMPONENTS. AN UNEQUAL
REMOVAL OF FUEL OR CARGO OR THE REMOVAL OF LARGE COMPONENTS
CAN CHANGE THE CG AND THE LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL STABILITY OF
THE AIRCRAFT. DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT IF THE AIRCRAFT
FALLS ON RECOVERY PERSONNEL.
WARNING : YOU MUST MONITOR AIRCRAFT STABILITY, WEIGHT AND CG DURING THE
RECOVERY PROCESS.
NOTE : It is important to use accurate data for the calculation related to the recovery process.
Some of the necessary data is the responsibility of the operator and to be accurate, it must
be applicable to the specific MSN involved. Data supplied by the manufacturer as generic
data is not necessarily accurate for a specific MSN. Refer to the operator’s documentation
for precise calculations.
If some of the necessary data is not available or if it is not possible to get it, then it is the
responsibility of the recovery manager to decide to use estimated data and to continue with
the process.
Subtask 03-00-00-558-001-A01
A. CG Conversion Principle
(1) The CG location (in the longitudinal axis) can be expressed in % of the Reference Chord
(%RC) or in lever arm distance (H-arm). See FIGURE 03-00-00-991-002-G.
In this manual, the lever arm distance (H-arm and Y-arm) is used to calculate the CG
location calculation.
(a) Use the formula that follows to convert the CG expressed in %RC from other manuals
into H-arm.
- H-arm (in meters) = (%RC × 0.0727) + 31.338
- H-arm (in inches) = (%RC × 2.8622) + 1233.780
(b) Use the formula that follows to convert H-arm into %RC.
- %RC = (H-arm -- 31.338) / 0.0727 (H-arm in meters)
- %RC = (H-arm -- 1233.780) / 2.8622 (H-arm in inches)
Page 2
03-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 03-00-00-970-001-A01
B. Principle of the NRW and Related CG Position Calculation
NOTE : All calculations are based on OEW or DOW aircraft configuration and related CG. The
weight differences between the OEW or DOW and the real status of the aircraft are
then recorded on calculation worksheets. The data on these worksheets is used to
calculate the NRW and CG location of the aircraft.
(1) Find the weight and calculate the related H-arm moment of a known aircraft configuration
(OEW or DOW).
NOTE : For the OEW or DOW configuration, the Y-arm = 0.

(2) Record the values on the NRW and CG worksheet (see 09-50-01) applicable to the
configuration (OEW or DOW) that you will use for the calculation.
(3) For each item on the NRW and CG worksheet, use the related chapter and related interim
worksheet to record the weight, the H-arm moment and the Y-arm moment of each item
which remains on the aircraft, which is removed or missing from the aircraft and which has
an effect on the known OEW or DOW.
NOTE : It is considered that the Y-arm of components located inside the fuselage is
negligible for the calculation made, therefore they are ignored.
NOTE : The ARM gives all necessary data (for each scenario) to allow completion of
interim worksheet.
(4) Use the ”NRW and Related H and Y Moment” worksheet (see 09-50-01) to find the NRW,
the total H-arm moment and the total Y-arm moment.
NET RECOVERABLE WEIGHT =
TOTAL H-ARM MOMENT =
TOTAL Y-ARM MOMENT =
(5) Divide the ”total H-arm moment” value by the NRW value to find the longitudinal CG
position (XG).
(LONGITUDINAL CG POSITION) XG =
(6) Divide the ”total Y-arm moment value” by the NRW value to find the lateral CG position
(YG).
(LATERAL CG POSITION) YG =
Page 3
03-00-00 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
25% RC
Z
33.15 m
(1305.33 in)
31.34 m
(1233.78 in)
7.27 m REFERENCE CHORD

(286.22 in)
6.38 m
Reference Chord Data

(251.28 in)
CG Conversion Principle
@A330-200F
FIGURE-03-00-00-991-002-G01
FUSELAGE
DATUM LINE
7.00 m
(275.59 in)
H − arm = 0
03-00-00
0 X
F_AR_030000_1_0020701_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 4
@A330-200F
03-20 FUEL LOAD AND CG CONTROL
03-20-01 FUEL LOAD AND CG CONTROL
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 03-20-01-001-A01
General
1. To safely level or lift a damaged aircraft so that it can be moved on it’s own Landing Gear (or on a
suitable ground equipment trailer) you must establish the weight and center of gravity (CG) of the
aircraft.
This chapter contains the method and calculations needed to establish the effect of the fuel load on
the position of the aircraft CG. The weight and CG positions of the aircraft will change due to the
quantity of fuel in each tank. To find the changes in weight and CG position, calculate:
- The H-arm dimension along the longitudinal plane from nose to tail
(H-arm is a dimension from the CG of an item/component to the horizontal reference datum
plane)
- The Y-arm dimension along the lateral plane from wing tip to wing tip
(Y-arm is a dimension from the CG of an item/component to the lateral arm reference datum
plane).
The tables (see DESC 03-20-01-002-A01) in this chapter contain fuel weight and CG data for
selected incremental fuel volumes for each fuel tank and for each scenario (when applicable).
Page 1
03-20-01 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
LIFTING
LOAD
MOMENTS TAKEN
AT CONTACT POINT
Aircraft Loads
OUTER TANK INNER TANK AIRCRAFT INNER TANK OUTER TANK
WEIGHT WEIGHT WEIGHT WEIGHT WEIGHT
@A330-200F
FIGURE-03-20-01-991-001-B01
Type and Position of Loads Acting on the Aircraft

CENTER TANK
WEIGHT
03-20-01
TRIM TANK
WEIGHT
NOTE: RELATED TO AIRCRAFT ATTITUDE AND WEIGHT

F_AR_032001_1_0010201_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 2
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 03-20-01-002-A01
Tables
1. How to Find the Weight and Associated CG Position of Remaining Fuel
To find the weight and associated CG of remaining fuel on board, you must know the quantity of fuel
remaining in each tank. If you do not know the quantity of fuel remaining in each tank see 03-20-02
for information about how to assess the fuel quantity without serviceable aircraft systems.
Using the fuel quantity, you must determine the weight and moment (generated by H-arm and Y-
arm) of the fuel, using the applicable table.
When you have found the data from the relevant tables, enter this data in the fuel remaining onboard
effect ’worksheet’ boxes (see DESC 09-50-01-001-A01 for calculation worksheets) with the weight,
the H-arm moment and the Y-arm moment values for the remaining fuel in each tank.
For the following tables (when applicable):
- Unsuckable means ”The quantity of fuel that remains after a defuel using the suction pumps on
the Fuel Tanker”
- Unpumpable means ”The quantity of fuel that remains after a defuel using the aircraft fuel
pumps”
- Undrainable means ”The quantity of fuel that remains after the final defuel procedure using the
Water Drain Valves”.
For information on defuel procedures, see 05-10-00.
2. Tables
NOTE : The tables that follow, give estimated values to help you estimate the CG position. The
values are calculated without any pitch or roll angle of the aircraft.
Accurate data are related to your aircraft configuration.
The following tables give the H-arm and Y-arm related to important fuel capacities.
NOTE : Fuel density used in calculations is: 0.785 kg/liter and 1.7306138 lb/liter.
Outer Tank
Volume Weight H-arm Moment Y-arm Moment
Fuel Liters kg Kg.m Kg.m
(US Gal) (lb) (lb.in) (lb.in)
Full 3 650 2 865 110 538 57 623
(964) (6 317) (9 594 314) (5 001 458)
3/4 2 800 2 198 83 990 42 727
(740) (4 846) (7 290 006) (3 708 532)
1/2 1 800 1 413 53 491 26 518
(476) (3 115) (4 642 772) (2 301 640)
Page 3
03-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Outer Tank
1/4 800 628 23 619 11 501
(211) (1 385) (2 050 045) (998 205)
Outer Tank
TABLE 1
Inner Tank
Full 42 000 32 970 1 055 732 241 472
(11 095) (72 686) (91 633 499) (20 958 863)
3/4 31 600 24 806 773 650 140 873
(8 348) (54 688) (67 149 796) (12 227 257)
1/2 20 800 16 328 503 066 77 133
(5 495) (35 997) (43 664 161) (6 694 888)
1/4 10 400 8 164 249 998 33 415
(2 747) (17 999) (21 698 863) (2 900 315)
Inner Tank
TABLE 2
Center Tank
Full 41 560 32 625 971 397 0
(10 979) (71 925) (84 313 555)
3/4 31 200 24 492 733 682 0
(8 242) (53 996) (63 680 799)
1/2 20 800 16 328 490 118 0
(5 495) (35 997) (42 540 316)
Page 4
03-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Center Tank
1/4 10 400 8 164 246 765 0
(2 747) (17 999) (21 418 256)
Center Tank
TABLE 3
Trim Tank
Full 6 230 4 891 292 934
(1 646) (10 782) (25 425 556)
3/4 4 800 3 768 224 034 0
(1 268) (8 307) (19 445 285)
1/2 3 200 2 512 148 502 0
(845) (5 538) (12 889 393)
1/4 1 600 1 256 74 045 0
(423) (2 769) (6 426 818)
Trim Tank
TABLE 4
Page 5
03-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
03-20-02 MANUAL FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01
Use of Magnetic Level Indicators (MLI)
1. General
The Magnetic Level Indicators (MLI) are used on ground to calculate the fuel quantity in the wing
and center tanks. The MLI located in the trim tank is solely used to confirm a trim tank empty state.
No electrical power is required.
See AMM 12-11-28PB301.
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
- Not applicable
98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN
TABLE 1
AMM 12-11-28PB301
AMM 28-00-00PB301
AMM 12-32-28PB301
AMM 12-11-28-650-806
FIGURE 03-20-02-991-002-A FIGURE 03-20-02-991-002-A-Magnetic Level Indicators
FIGURE 03-20-02-991-004-A FIGURE 03-20-02-991-004-A-Attitude Monitor
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
WARNING : THIS PROCEDURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY TO HELP YOU PREPARE THE
RECOVERY OPERATION. TO DO THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST REFER TO THE
OPERATORS CUSTOMIZED DOCUMENTATION.
Page 1
03-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
CAUTION : DO NOT LET THE MLI’S FALL FREELY.
CAUTION : RETRACT THE MLI’S AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. YOU CAN EASILY CAUSE
DAMAGE TO AN EXTENDED MLI.
Subtask 03-20-02-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Safety Precautions
(a) You must obey the refuel/defuel safety precautions. See AMM 12-11-28PB301 and
AMM 28-00-00PB301.
(b) Put the safety barriers in position.
(2) Fuel Sampling
(a) Use the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN to get a fuel sample
from the aircraft. See AMM 12-32-28PB301.
(b) Measure the Specific Gravity (SG) of the fuel sample.
(3) Get Access
(a) Put an access platform below the applicable MLI. See FIGURE 03-20-02-991-002-A.
(b) Open the access door 198DB, see FIGURE 03-20-02-991-004-A.
(4) Aircraft Attitude
(a) Find and write down the aircraft attitude (pitch and roll). See 06-60-00.
(b) Or, if installed, read the attitude shown by the bubble on the attitude monitor, see
FIGURE 03-20-02-991-004-A.
See TABLE 3 and TABLE 4 to convert the attitude angles and grid square letters on
the attitude monitor.
Pitch Ref Roll Ref
-2.5˚ 1 -1.5˚ A
-2˚ 2 -1.0˚ B
-1.5˚ 3 -0.5˚ C
-1.0˚ 4 0.0˚ D
+0.5˚ 5 +0.5˚ E
0.0˚ 6 +1.0˚ F
Page 2
03-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Pitch Ref Roll Ref

+0.5˚ 7 +1.5˚ G
Left Wing
TABLE 3
Pitch Ref Roll Ref

-2.5˚ 1 1.5˚ G
-2˚ 2 1.0˚ F
-1.5˚ 3 0.5˚ E
-1.0˚ 4 0.0˚ D
+0.5˚ 5 -0.5˚ C
0.0˚ 6 -1.0˚ B
+0.5˚ 7 -1.5˚ A
Right Wing
TABLE 4
Subtask 03-20-02-970-004-A01
B. Use of the Magnetic Level Indicators (MLI)
(1) Use a screwdriver to push the applicable MLI and turn it through 90 deg.
(2) Hold and carefully lower the MLI fully. Then carefully lift the MLI until you feel the
magnets engage.
(3) Read the units mark nearest to the bottom-skin of the wing and write down the number.
(4) Retract the MLI and use a screwdriver to turn it through 90 deg. to lock it.
(5) Find the volume of the fuel in each tank:
(a) Use the applicable MLI stick number and the applicable aircraft attitude grid-square
letter to find the corresponding fuel quantity table. See AMM 12-11-28-650-806 for
the fuel quantity tables.
(b) Find the applicable MLI unit number row and the applicable A/C attitude (grid-
square letter and number) in the table.
Find the intersection of the applicable rows to give the correct volume of fuel in the
tank.
(c) Multiply the total volume of the fuel by the specific gravity (SG) of the fuel to obtain
the mass of the fuel.
NOTE : The MLI are accurate to +/- 5 % of their indication.
Page 3
03-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
RIB1
MLI CENTER TANK EXTERNAL VIEW OF RETRACTED

AND LOCKED M.L.I.
RIB2 MLI 1 INNER TANK
INDICATOR ROD EXTENDED

RIB23
RIB25 MLI 5 OUTER TANK
RIB33
MLI 6 OUTER TANK
F_AR_032002_1_0020101_01_00
Magnetic Level Indicators

Location
FIGURE-03-20-02-991-002-A01
Page 4
03-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR53.5 FR53.3
198DB
ATTITUDE MONITOR
5000QT
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B
C
D
E
F
G
F_AR_032002_1_0040101_01_01
Attitude Monitor
Location
FIGURE-03-20-02-991-004-A01
Page 5
03-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
03-50 MANAGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND CG
03-50-01 MANAGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND CG
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 03-50-01-001-A01
Introduction
1. General
Management of the aircraft weight and related CG is one of the key issues of the recovery plan and
operation. It has a direct impact on aircraft stability, calculation of expected loads and the loads
recorded for a given recovery process.
2. Purpose
For a given aircraft attitude (See 06-60-00), it is necessary first to calculate the aircraft NRW and
CG (See 03-00-00) to make the calculations of the expected loads, based on the leveling/lifting
techniques that will be used.
These expected loads, and then the applied loads must be in the limits that follow:
- Aircraft allowable loads,
- Tooling capabilities.
If these loads are not in the limits, it will be necessary:
- To find an alternative leveling/lifting procedure to make sure that the aircraft, tooling and
equipment support loads that are not more than the allowable loads,
- To manage aircraft weight and related CG to bring the expected loads in the allowable loads,
- To use other tooling, if only the tool cannot support the expected loads.
NOTE : The tooling should not only be able to support expected loads, but should also be
appropriate for the travel range, arc movement, aircraft stability, ground stability, etc.…
The installation of ballast or the removal of equipment, payload, fuel, etc. can help to change the
aircraft weight and CG location.
Every effort should be made to reduce the Total Weight of the aircraft to the minimum possible by
removal of significant amounts of payload. The easiest way to remove quickly large amounts of
weight can be fuel and cargo removal.
In some cases, it may be necessary to remove major aircraft components that are damaged. Before
removal of these components, it is important to do a careful study because it may be better to secure
them in place temporarily.
Galley catering units (trolleys, etc.) have a significant weight and every effort should be made to
remove them. If they remain on board, carefully evaluate their weight when you make the H-arm
calculations.
NOTE : Food in the catering units can deteriorate quickly. During a long recovery operation, it may
become a priority to remove the catering units for health reasons.
Draining of potable water and lavatory waste and removal of the escape slides and slide rafts can also
reduce the weight.
Page 1
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
It is not necessary to drain the fluids, such as hydraulic fluid, from closed systems unless there is
significant leakage that it is not possible to contain.
As every aircraft recovery is different, it will be necessary to decide what and how much must be
removed. These decisions will be based on access, time, cost and the actual ability to do the task.
The records made during the damage survey of the aircraft should include all major components that
are missing or that it is necessary to remove because of damage. It is necessary to include the weight
changes related to these components in the calculation of the aircraft weight and CG location.
Removal of any aircraft components and equipment should be done in accordance with the Aircraft
Maintenance Manual (AMM), and recorded with the data collected during the aircraft survey.
NOTE : It is important to make sure that the aircraft is stable before and during the
implementation of the recovery phase/steps.
3. Calculation Iteration
The calculation iteration from NRW and CG up to expected loads, travel range, arc movement should
be continued until aircraft stability, expected loads, travel range, arc movement etc.… are in the
acceptable limits.
Changes to the different inputs used in the calculations can help to get satisfactory value related to
the settings of a recovery scenario.
4. List of Item Used for NRW and CG Calculation
See the related topic or task for the related item weight input.
Weight Inputs See
OEW 03-00-00
DOW 03-00-00
Fuel Remaining on Board Effect 03-20-01
Lower Deck Cargo and Baggage Remaining Effect DESC 03-50-01-002-A01
Main Deck Cargo Remaining Effect TASK 03-50-01-558-812-A01
Ballast Added Effect TASK 03-50-01-558-803-A01
Potable Water Removed Effect TBD
Large Component Removed /Missing Effect TASK 03-50-01-558-810-A01
Large Component Movement Effect TASK 03-50-01-558-811-A01
List of Item Used for NRW and CG Calculation
TABLE 1
Page 2
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 03-50-01-002-A01
Lower Deck Cargo and Baggage Remaining Effect
1. General
RECOVERY PROCESS.
WARNING : IF CARGO AND BAGGAGE ARE NOT - OR CANNOT BE - REMOVED, MAKE

SURE THAT THEY ARE SAFELY FASTENED AND THAT LOADS ARE AS
SYMMETRICAL AS POSSIBLE BEFORE YOU START THE RECOVERY PROCESS.
The aircraft has three cargo compartments in the lower deck.
- The LD FWD Cargo Compartment in zone 130,
- The LD AFT Cargo Compartment in zone 150,
- The BULK Cargo Compartment in zone 160.
NOTE : For location see 09-10-14
the process.
2. Standard Container and/or Pallet Combination Tables
The tables that follow are built with a standard combination of containers and/or pallets. If the cargo
compartments contain a mixed combination, use the value given in the standard combination or in
your WBM to find the applicable H-arm and Y-arm.
A. LD FWD Cargo Compartment
(1) Half Size Containers NAS3610-2K, IATA Contour E, G
See your WBM to determine applicable Y-arm.
Page 3
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Position ULD Remaining Weight H-arm Moment to add

11L, 11R 15.433 m
(607.60 in)
12L, 12R 17.195 m
(676.97 in)
13L, 13R 18.778 m
(739.29 in)
14L, 14R 20.360 m
(801.57 in)
21L, 21R 22.123 m
(870.98 in)
22L, 22R 23.705 m
(933.27 in)
23L, 23R 25.288 m
(995.59 in)
Half Size Containers in FWD Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 1
(2) Half Size Containers NAS3610-2K, IATA Contour C, H

11L or R 15.433 m
(607.60 in)
12L or R 17.195 m
(676.97 in)
13L or R 18.778 m
(739.29 in)
14L or R 20.360 m
(801.57 in)
21L or R 22.123 m
(870.98 in)
22L or R 23.705 m
(933.27 in)
23L or R 25.288 m
(995.59 in)
Half Size Containers in FWD Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 2
Page 4
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(3) Full Size Containers NAS3610-2L, IATA Contour F
NOTE : The Y-arm moment is negligible.

11 15.433 m
(607.60 in)
12 17.195 m
(676.97 in)
13 18.778 m
(739.29 in)
14 20.360 m
(801.57 in)
21 22.123 m
(870.98 in)
22 23.705 m
(933.27 in)
23 25.288 m
(995.59 in)
Full Size Containers in FWD Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 3
(4) Full Size Containers NAS3610-2A2C, 2A6C, IATA Contour F

12 P 17.546 m
(690.79 in)
13 P 20.010 m
(787.80 in)
21 P 22.473 m
(884.76 in)
22 P 24.937 m
(981.77 in)
TABLE 4
(5) Full Size Containers NAS3610-2M1C-2M3C, IATA Contour F
Page 5
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

12 P 17.444 m
(686.77 in)
13 P 19.908 m
(783.78 in)
21 P 22.372 m
(880.79 in)
22 P 24.836 m
(977.80 in)
TABLE 5
(6) Half Size Pallets NAS3610-2K, IATA Contour P

11L, 11R 15.433 m
(607.60 in)
12L, 12R 17.195 m
(676.97 in)
13L, 13R 18.778 m
(739.29 in)
14L, 14R 20.360 m
(801.57 in)
21L, 21R 22.123 m
(870.98 in)
22L, 22R 23.705 m
(933.27 in)
23L, 23R 25.288 m
(995.59 in)
Half Size Pallets in FWD Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 6
(7) Full Size Pallets NAS3610-2L3P, 2L4P, IATA Contour F, P

11 15.433 m
(607.60 in)
Page 6
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

12 17.195 m
(676.97 in)
13 18.778 m
(739.29 in)
14 20.360 m
(801.57 in)
21 22.123 m
(870.98 in)
22 23.705 m
(933.27 in)
23 25.288 m
(995.59 in)
Full Size Pallets in FWD Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 7
(8) Full Size Pallets NAS3610-2A1, 2A2P, 2A3P, 2A4P, 2A6P, IATA Contour F, P

12 P 17.546 m
(690.79 in)
13 P 20.010 m
(787.80 in)
21 P 22.473 m
(884.76 in)
22 P 24.937 m
(981.77 in)
TABLE 8
(9) Full Size Pallets NAS3610-2M1P, 2M2P, 2M3P, IATA Contour F, P

12 P 17.444 m
(686.77 in)
Page 7
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

13 P 19.908 m
(783.78 in)
21 P 22.372 m
(880.79 in)
22 P 24.836 m
(977.80 in)
TABLE 9
B. LD AFT Cargo Compartment

(1) Half Size Containers NAS3610-2K, IATA Contour E, G
31L, 31R 37.607 m
(1480.59 in)
32L, 32R 39.190 m
(1542.91 in)
33L, 33R 40.772 m
(1605.20 in)
41L, 41R 42.749 m
(1683.03 in)
42L, 42R 44.332 m
(1745.35 in)
43L, 43R 45.914 m
(1807.64 in)
Half Size Containers in Aft Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 10
(2) Half Size Containers NAS3610-2K, IATA contour C, H

31L or R 37.607 m
(1480.59 in)
32L or R 39.190 m
(1542.91 in)
Page 8
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

33L or R 40.772 m
(1605.20 in)
41L or R 42.749 m
(1683.03 in)
42L or R 44.332 m
(1745.35 in)
43L or R 45.914 m
(1807.64 in)
Half Size Containers in Aft Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 11
(3) Full Size Containers NAS3610-2L, IATA Contour F

31 37.607 m
(1480.59 in)
32 39.190 m
(1542.91 in)
33 40.772 m
(1605.20 in)
41 42.749 m
(1683.03 in)
42 44.332 m
(1745.35 in)
43 45.914 m
(1807.64 in)
Full Size Containers in Aft Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 12
(4) Full Size Containers NAS3610-2A2C-2A6C, IATA Contour F

31 P 37.958 m
(1494.41 in)
Page 9
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

32 P 40.421 m
(1591.38 in)
41 P 43.100 m
(1696.85 in)
42 P 45.360 m
(1785.83 in)
TABLE 13
(5) Full Size Containers NAS3610-2M1C-2M3C, IATA Contour F

31 P 38.059 m
(1498.39 in)
32 P 40.523 m
(1595.39 in)
41 P 42.998 m
(1692.83 in)
42 P 45.462 m
(1789.84 in)
TABLE 14
(6) Half Size Pallets NAS3610-2K IATA Contour P

31L, 31R 37.607 m
(1480.59 in)
32L, 32R 39.190 m
(1542.91 in)
33L, 33R 40.772 m
(1605.20 in)
41L, 41R 42.749 m
(1683.03 in)
42L, 42R 44.332 m
(1745.35 in)
Page 10
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

43L, 43R 45.914 m
(1807.64 in)
Half Size Pallets in Aft Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 15
(7) Full Size Pallets NAS3610-2L3P, 2L4P, IATA Contour F, P

31 37.607 m
(1480.59 in)
32 39.190 m
(1542.91 in)
33 40.772 m
(1605.20 in)
41 42.749 m
(1683.03 in)
42 44.332 m
(1745.35 in)
43 45.914 m
(1807.64 in)
Full Size Pallets in Aft Lower Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 16
(8) Full Size Pallets NAS3610-2A1P, 2A2P, 2A3P, 2A4P, 2A6P IATA Contour F, P

31 P 37.958 m
(1494.41 in)
32 P 40.421 m
(1591.38 in)
41 P 43.100 m
(1696.85 in)
Page 11
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

42 P 45.360 m
(1785.83 in)
TABLE 17
(9) Full Size Pallets NAS3610-2M1P, 2M2P, 2M3P IATA Contour F, P

31 P 38.059 m
(1498.39 in)
32 P 40.523 m
(1595.39 in)
41 P 42.998 m
(1692.83 in)
42 P 45.462 m
(1789.84 in)
TABLE 18
C. BULK Cargo Compartment

Section number (Frame Remaining Weight H-arm Moment to add
Station)
51 (FR65A -FR67 47.427 m
(1867.20 in)
52 (FR65A - FR69) 47.957 m
(1888.07 in)
53 (FR69/69A - FR73) 50.002 m
(1968.58 in)
Total (FR65A - FR73) 49.007 m
(1929.41 in)
Lower Bulk Cargo Compartment Remaining Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 19
Page 12
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
D. Lower Crew Rest Compartments

Depending on the airline configuration, there can be an optional crew rest compartment
installed in the forward cargo compartment or in the aft cargo compartment.
See the customized WBM for your specific aircraft configuration to find data related to the
cargo crew rest compartment, if installed.
3. Determine the Effect of Cargo and Baggage Remaining on the Lower Deck
A. Use the tables in TBD to determine H-arm moments by reporting the masses of each container
or pallet.
B. Record the calculated values on the LD FWD Cargo Compartment (in Zone 130), LD AFT
Cargo Compartment (in Zone 150), BULK Cargo Compartment (in Zone 160) into boxes of the
Cargo and Baggage Interim Worksheet (See, DESC 09-50-01-001-A01).
C. Use the data related to the Cargo Crew Rest Compartment from the customized WBM and
record them into the Cargo and Baggage Interim Worksheet.
Page 13
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
Z130
E
11R 12R 13R 14R 21R 22R 23R
A
11L 12L 13L 14L 21L 22L 23L
E
11R 12R 13R 14R 21R 22R 23R
OR
H
C
11L 12L 13L 14L 21L 22L 23L
11 12 13 14 21 22 23
F
11 12P 13P 21P 22P
11 12P 13P 21P 22P

F
A
FWD
F_AR_035001_1_0030201_01_00
FWD Cargo Compartment Arrangements

Half Size / Full Size - Containers / Pallets
FIGURE-03-50-01-991-003-B01
Page 14
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
Z150
E
31R 32R 33R 41R 42R 43R
31L 32L 33L 41L 42L 43L
E
31R 32R 33R 41R 42R 43R
OR
H
C
31L 32L 33L 41L 42L 43L
31 32 33 41 42 43
F
31P 32P 41P 42P
F
31P 32P 41P 42P

F
A
FWD
F_AR_035001_1_0040201_01_00
AFT Cargo Compartment Arrangements

Half Size / Full Size - Containers / Pallets
FIGURE-03-50-01-991-004-B01
Page 15
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
Z160
F_AR_035001_1_0050101_01_00
BULK Cargo Compartment

Arrangement
FIGURE-03-50-01-991-005-A01
Page 16
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 03-50-01-558-812-A01
Main Deck Cargo Remaining Effect
1. General
The aircraft has one cargo compartment located in the main deck between FR 20 and FR 80.
NOTE : For location see 09-10-14.

2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
The tables that follow are built with a standard combination of pallets and give the location, the
average H-arm and the average Y-arm for each ULD.
If the main deck cargo compartment contain a mixed combination of containers and/or pallets, use
the values given in your WBM to find the applicable H-arm and Y-arm.
A. Standard Container and/or Pallet Combination Tables
A. Full Size Pallets 125 in. X 96 in. NAS3610-2M1, 2M2, 2M3, IATA Contour P, Weight and
Related H-arm.
Position ULD Remaining Weight Average H-arm Moment to add
ABL, ABR 16.232 m
(639.06 in)
BCL, BCR 19.432 m
(765.04 in)
CEL, CER 22.633 m .
(891.06 in)
EFL, EFR 25.833 m
(1017.05 in)
FHL, FHR 29.034 m
(1143.07 in)
HJL, HJR 32.234 m
(1269.06 in)
JKL, JKR 35.434 m
(1395.04 in)
KML, KMR 38.635 m
(1521.06 in)
MPL, MPR 41.861 m
(1648.07 in)
PP 45.455 m
(1789.57 in)
Page 17
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Position ULD Remaining Weight Average H-arm Moment to add

RR 47.919 m
(1886.58 in)
SS 50.382 m
(1983.54 in)
TT 52.846 m
(2080.55 in)
Full Size Pallets in Main Deck Cargo Compartment Weight and Related H-arm
TABLE 1
B. Full Size Pallets 125 in. X 96 in. NAS3610-2M1, 2M2, 2M3, IATA Contour P, Weight and
Related Y-arm.
Position ULD Remaining Weight Average Y-arm Moment to add
ABL-MPL 1.232 m
(48.50 in)
ABR-MPR -1.232 m
(-48.50 in)
PP-TT 0m
(0.000 in)
Full Size Pallets in Main Deck Cargo Compartment Weight and Related Y-arm
TABLE 2

DESC 09-50-01-001-A01 DESC 09-50-01-001-A01-Worksheets
09-10-14 09-10-14-CARGO COMPARTMENTS
TABLE 3
5. Procedure
Page 18
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
RECOVERY PROCESS.
WARNING : IF CARGO AND BAGGAGE ARE NOT - OR CANNOT BE - REMOVED, MAKE

SURE THAT THEY ARE SAFELY FASTENED AND THAT LOADS ARE AS
SYMMETRICAL AS POSSIBLE BEFORE YOU START THE RECOVERY PROCESS.
the process.
Subtask 03-50-01-558-022-A01
A. How to find the Effect of Cargo Remaining on the Main Deck
(1) Use the tables in Job Setup References to determine H-arm moments by reporting the
masses of each container or pallet.
(2) Record the calculated values on Main Deck Cargo Compartment (between FR 20 and FR
80) of the Cargo and Baggage Interim Worksheet ( See DESC 09-50-01-001-A01).
Page 19
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR80
A
FR20
FR20 FR80
ABR BCR CER EFR FHR HJR JKR KMR MPR

PP RR SS TT
ABL BCL CEL EFL FHL HJL JKL KML MPL
FULL SIZE 125 in X 96 in (NAS3610−2M1, 2M2, 2M3)

IATA CONTOUR P
A
FWD
F_AR_035001_1_0060101_01_00
Basic Main Deck Cargo Compartment Arrangements

Full Size - Containers/Pallets
FIGURE-03-50-01-991-006-A01
Page 20
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 03-50-01-558-803-A01
Ballast Added Effect
1. General
Ballast is any heavy material that you use to add weight if you want to stabilize the aircraft with the
CG change method.
Ballast can be non recovery kit stock items (such as sand bags, drums filled with water, livestock feed
sacks, etc.) that you can buy in-situ. It is important that the ballast is easily transportable to the site,
easily managed by the personnel on site and that, if there is a shift in the aircraft CG, no secondary
damage will occur if the ballast moves inside the aircraft or when it is necessary to transport the
aircraft.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
09-50-01 09-50-01-WEIGHT AND CG CALCULATION WORKSHEETS
09-10-06 09-10-06-FUSELAGE FRAMES AND H-ARM TABLE
09-10-08 09-10-08-WING RIBS AND STATIONS
09-10-09 09-10-09-HORIZONTAL STABILIZERS RIBS AND STATIONS
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
RECOVERY PROCESS.
the process.
Page 21
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 03-50-01-558-003-A01
A. How to find the Effect of Added Ballast
(1) To find the effect of added ballast, you need to find the H-arm and, if applicable, the Y-
arm of the zone in which you added ballast.
To calculate the necessary average H-arm and Y-arm:
- See 09-10-06 for ballast added inside of fuselage,
- See 09-10-08 for ballast added on the wing,
- See 09-10-09 for ballast added on the horizontal stabilizer.
(2) Calculate the H-arm and Y-arm moments generated by the weight of ballast you use and
record them on the Ballast Added Effect Interim Worksheet (See 09-50-01).
Page 22
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 03-50-01-558-810-A01
Large Components Removed / Missing
1. General
The equipments or aircraft parts that follow may have a significant effect on weight and balance
management for the recovery.
- APU
- APU Exhaust
- Pax doors
- Cargo doors
- Radome
- Pylons Equipped
- Thrust reversers
- Engines equipped
- Rudders
- THS Equipped
- Elevators
- Slats
- Flaps
- Ailerons
- Spoilers
- Wing Tip/ Wing Tip Fence
- Landing Gears Equipped
- Wheels Equipped
- Wheels
- Tires
- Brakes
If you need to remove some of these large components during recovery or if some of these large
components are missing when you start the recovery process, use the data that follow and calculation
tables to determine the effect on NRW and the CG position.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable
Page 23
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

TABLE 1
5. Procedure
RECOVERY PROCESS.
the process.
Page 24
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 03-50-01-558-014-G01
A. Equipment Tables
(1) Wing Equipment Table
Item Weight H-arm H-arm Moment to
Substract
N ˚1 155.1 kg 28.346 m 4 396.465 kg.m
(341.94 lb) (1 115.98 in) (381 596.177 lb.in)
N ˚2 73.9 kg 31.577 m 2 333.540 kg.m
(162.9 lb) (1 243.19 in) (202 542.301 lb.in)
N ˚3 63.1 kg 33.775 m 2 131.203 kg.m
(139.1 lb) (1 329.72 in) (184 980.160 lb.in)
N ˚4 66.4 kg 35.578 m 2 362.379 kg.m
Slats (146.4 lb) (1 400.71 in) (205 045.406 lb.in)
N ˚5 58.7 kg 37.754 m 2 216.160 kg.m
(129.4 lb) (1 486.38 in) (192 354.126 lb.in)
N ˚6 45.6 kg 39.884 m 1 818.710 kg.m
(100.5 lb) (1 570.24 in) (157 857.051 lb.in)
N ˚7 38.5 kg 41.364 m 1 592.514 kg.m
(84.9 lb) (1 628.50 in) (138 224.075 lb.in)
Inner 259.1 kg 35.984 m 9 323.454 kg.m
(571.2 lb) (1 416.69 in) (1809 239.895
lb.in)
Flaps
Outer 388.7 kg 38.327 m 14 897.705 kg.m
(856.9 lb) (1 508.94 in) (1 293 063.347
lb.in)
N˚ 1 24.9 kg 35.152 m 875.285 kg.m
(54.9 lb) (1 383.94 in) (75 971.346 lb.in)
N˚ 2 23.0 kg 35.685 m 820.755 kg.m
(50.7 lb) (1 404.92 in) (71 238.370 lb.in)
N˚ 3 25.5 kg 36.472 m 930.036 kg.m
(56.2 lb) (1 435.91 in) (80 723.539 lb.in)
Spoilers
N˚ 4 25.5 kg 37.282 m 950.691 kg.m
(56.2 lb) (1 467.80 in) (82 516.313 lb.in)
N˚ 5 25.5 kg 38.122 m 972.111 kg.m
(56.2 lb) (1 500.87 in) (84 375.487 lb.in)
N˚ 6 22.5 kg 39.132 m 880.470 kg.m
(49.6 lb) (1 540.63 in) (76 421.401 lb.in)
Page 25
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

Substract
Inner 93.2 kg 40.942 m 3 815.794 kg.m
(205.5 lb) (1 611.89 in) (331 196.242 lb.in)
Ailerons
Outer 81.5 kg 42.677 m 3 478.176 kg.m
(179.7 lb) (1 680.20 in) (301 892.223 lb.in)
63.5 kg 43.512 m 2 763.012 kg.m
Wing Tip
(140.0 lb) (1 713.07 in) (239 818.789 lb.in)
62.0 kg 44.196 m 2 740.152 kg.m
Wing Tip Fence
(136.7 lb) (1 740.00 in) (237 834.629 lb.in)
Wing Equipment (per Side)
TABLE 2
(2) Fuselage Equipment Table

Substract
FWD 131 kg 12.180 m 1 595.580 kg.m
Cabin Doors (289 lb) (479.53 in) (138 490.192 lb.in)
FWD 190 kg 15.913 m 3 023.470 kg.m
(419 lb) (626.50 in) (262 425.539 lb.in)
AFT 201 kg 45.479 m 9 141.279 kg.m
(443 lb) (1 790.51 in) (793 427.773 lb.in)
Cargo Doors
BULK 34 kg 48.363 m 1 644.342 kg.m
(75 lb) (1 904.06 in) (142 722.546 lb.in)
MAIN DECK 520 kg 16.290 m 8 470.800 kg.m
(1 146 lb) (641.34 in) (735 232.781 lb.in)
28 kg 7.140 m 199.920 kg.m
Radome (62 lb) (281.10 in) (17 352.285 lb.in)
41 kg 63.163 m 2 589.683 kg.m
APU Exhaust (90 lb) (2 486.73 in) (224 774.500 lb.in)
250 kg 61.701 m 15 425.250 kg.m
APU (551 lb) (2 429.17 in) (1 338 852.228
lb.in)
Fuselage Equipment
TABLE 3
Page 26
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(3) Vertical Tail Equipment Table

Substract
676 kg 58.507 m 39 550.732 kg.m
Box (1 490 lb) (2 303.43 in) (3 432 851.050
lb.in)
335 kg 61.802 m 20 703.670 kg.m
Rudder (739 lb) (2 433.15 in) (1 796 998.733
lb.in)
134 kg 57.573 m 7 714.782 kg.m
Removable Leading Edge
(295 lb) (2 266.65 in) (669 613.333 lb.in)
17 kg 63.388 m 1 077.596 kg.m
Tip
(37 lb) (2 495.59 in) (93 531.178 lb.in)
30 kg 53.872 m 1 616.160 kg.m
Fuselage Fairing
(66 lb) (2 120.94 in) (140 276.457 lb.in)
Vertical Tail Equipment
TABLE 4
(4) Horizontal Tail Equipment Table

Substract
1 220 kg 60.008 m 73 209.760 kg.m
Box (2 690 lb) (2 362.52 in) (6 354 324.908
lb.in)
270 kg 62.155 m 16 781.850 kg.m
Elevator (595 lb) (2 447.05 in) (1 456 599.878
lb.in)
213 kg 59.337 m 12 638.781 kg.m
Removable Leading Edge (470 lb) (2 336.10 in) (1 096 997.462
lb.in)
34 kg 63.365 m 2 154.410 kg.m
Tip
(75 lb) (2 494.69 in) (186 994.482 lb.in)
54 kg 58.397 m 3 153.438 kg.m
Tailplane Fuselage Fairing
(119 lb) (2 299.09 in) (273 706.260 lb.in)
Horizontal Tail Equipment (per Side)
TABLE 5
Page 27
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(5) Pylon and Nacelle Equipment Tables

Item Weight H-arm H-arm Moment Y-arm Y-arm Moment
to
Substract
227 kg 25.300 m 5 743.100 kg.m - -
Inlet Cowl (500 lb) (996.06 in) (498 478.938
lb.in)
136 kg 26.655 m 3 625.080 kg.m - -
Fan Cowl (300 lb) (1 049.41 in) (314 642.968
lb.in)
816 kg 28.250 m 23 052.000 kg.m - -
Thrust Reverser (1 799 lb) (1 112.20 in) (2 000 824.723
lb.in)
30.314 m 7 487.558 kg.m - -
Common Nozzle 247 kg
(1 193.46 in) (649 891.166
Assembly (545 lb)
lb.in)
27.719 m 146 522.634 - -
5 286 kg (1 091.30 in) kg.m
Bare Engine
(11 654 lb) (12 717 599.715
lb.in)
27.775 m 186 425.800 9.370 m 62 891.440
Complete Power 6 712 kg (1 093.50 in) kg.m (368.90 in) kg.m
Plant (14 797 lb) (16 181 040.677 (5 458 734.515
lb.in) lb.in)
29.753 m 38 976.430 kg.m - -
1 310 kg
Pylon (1 171.38 in) (3 383 003.851
(2 888 lb)
lb.in)
RR Trent 772B-60 - Pylon and Nacelle Equipment (per Side)
TABLE 6

to
Substract
216 kg 25.339 m 5 473.224 kg.m - -
Inlet Cowl (476 lb) (997.60 in) (475 054.741
lb.in)
143 kg 26.586 m 3 801.798 kg.m - -
Fan Cowl (315 lb) (1 046.69 in) (329 981.409
lb.in)
Page 28
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

to
Substract
778 kg 27.986 m 21 773.108 kg.m - -
Thrust Reverser (1 715 lb) (1 101.81 in) (1 889 821.828
lb.in)
30.272 m 2 421.760 kg.m - -
80 kg
Exhaust Nozzle (1 191.81 in) (210 199.431
(176 lb)
lb.in)
27.785 m 163 014.595 - -
5 867 kg (1 093.90 in) kg.m
Bare Engine
(12 935 lb) (14 149 038.345
lb.in)
27.737 m 196 488.908 9.370 m 66 377.080
Complete Power 7 084 kg (1 092.01 in) kg.m (368.90 in) kg.m
Plant (15 618 lb) (17 054 479.653 (5 761 274.628
lb.in) lb.in)
29.847 m 37 607.220 kg.m - -
1 260 kg
Pylon (1 175.08 in) (3 264 161.702
(2 778 lb)
lb.in)
PW 4170 - Pylon and Nacelle Equipment (per Side)
TABLE 7
(6) Landing Gear Equipment Tables

Substract
824 kg 12.986 m 10 700.464 kg.m
Landing Gear Complete
(1 816.61 lb) (511.26 in) (928 759.020 lb.in)
196 kg 13.054 m 2 558.584 kg.m
Wheel with Tire (432.11 lb) (513.94 in) (222 075.227 lb.in)
Nose Landing Gear Equipment
TABLE 8
NOTE : Values are given for two wheels. Each equipped with a tire.
Page 29
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

to
Substract
4 167 kg 34.934 m 145 569.978 kg.m 5.342 m 22 260.114 kg.m
Landing Gear Complete (9 186.66 (1 375.35 in) (12 634 912.847 (210.31 in) (1 932 092.072
lb) lb.in) lb.in)
479 kg 34.239 m 16 400.481 kg.m - -
Wheel with (1 056.01 (1 347.99 in) (1 423 498.519
Tire lb) lb.in)
FWD
Bogie 250 kg 34.239 m 8 559.750 kg.m - -
Brake (551.16 lb) (1 347.99 in) (742 953.298
lb.in)
479 kg 36.220 m 17 349.380 kg.m - -
Wheel with (1 056.01 (1 425.98 in) (1 505 859.294
Tire lb) lb.in)
AFT
Bogie 250 kg 36.220 m 9 055.000 kg.m - -
Brake (551.16 lb) (1 425.98 in) (785 939.089
lb.in)
Main Landing Gear Equipment (per Side)
TABLE 9
NOTE : Values are given for two wheels. Each equipped with a tire and a brake.
Subtask 03-50-01-558-010-A01
B. How to find the Effect of Large Components Removed / Missing
(1) See the above tables to determine the weight, H-arm and Y-arm Moment.
(2) Record Weight, H-arm and Y-arm Moment into the relevant boxes of the Large
Component Removed / Missing Effect Interim Worksheet (See DESC 09-50-01-001-A01).
Page 30
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 03-50-01-558-811-A01
Large Components Movement Effect
1. General
The CG positions of the OEW or the DOW apply to specific aircraft conditions which include the
landing gear extended and the flaps and slats retracted.
NOTE : The thrust reverser extension effect is negligible on the A/C CG.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
AND/OR DAMAGE.
RECOVERY PROCESS.
the process.
Page 31
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 03-50-01-558-021-A01
A. How to Find the Effect of Large Component Movement
(1) To find the effect of large component movement, you must know the moments (generated
by H-arm) depending of Aircraft Landing Gear retraction, Slats and Flaps extension.
(2) To know this, see Tables below and record the H-arm moment on the Large Component
Movement Effect Interim Worksheet (See DESC 09-50-01-001-A01).
(3) Landing Gear Retraction
Landing Gear Retraction H-arm Moment to Subtract
1 018 kg.m
NLG (88 358 lb.in)
5 659 kg.m
MLG (491 179 lb.in)
L/G Retraction Effect
TABLE 2
(4) Slats and Flaps Extension Effect

Cockpit Indication (Degrees) H-arm Moment
SLATS
Inboard/Outboard FLAPS SLATS FLAPS TOTAL
-498 kg.m 0 kg.m -498 kg.m
14/16 0 (-43 224 lb.in) (0 lb.in) (-43 224 lb.in)
-498 kg.m 823 kg.m 325 kg.m
14/16 8 (-43 224 lb.in) (71 433 lb.in) (28 209 lb.in)
-638 kg.m 966 kg.m 328 kg.m
17.7/20 14 (-55 376 lb.in) (83 845 lb.in) (28 469 lb.in)
-719 kg.m 1 087 kg.m 368 kg.m
19.6/23 22 (62 406 lb.in) (94 347 lb.in) (31 941 lb.in)
-719 kg.m 1 195 kg.m 476 kg.m
19.6/23 23 (62 406 lb.in) (103 721 lb.in) (41 315 lb.in)
Slats and Flaps Extension Effect
TABLE 3
Page 32
03-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
03-60 REFERENCE FOR CALCULATION
03-60-01 REFERENCE FOR CALCULATION
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 03-60-01-001-A01
Information Required and Source Data
1. General
CAUTION : THE NRW AND CG LOCATION CAN ONLY BE AS ACCURATE AS THE DATA
USED TO CALCULATE THEM. IF ACCURATE DATA IS NOT AVAILABLE OR IF
THE DATA USED ARE EXTRAPOLATIONS, THIS WILL HAVE AN EFFECT ON
THE RESULTS THAT YOU GET.
This section gives the details on definitions related to CG management, and the source of the
required data. It also tells you how to use these data to calculate the NRW and CG location.
In most cases, several sources exist to find the required data.
Accurate calculations require specific data based on the specific aircraft MSN and actual airline load
and trim sheet information.
In case of a serious aircraft accident and subsequent freeze of the aircraft documentation, generic
aircraft type data can be used. This can also apply if it is impossible to power the onboard
computers.
NOTE : Contact telephone numbers for the load and weight and balance office should be readily
available.
2. Where to find the data
CAUTION : IF YOU USE THE OEW GENERIC DATA TO CALCULATE THE NRW, THE CG
POSITION AND THE EXPECTED LOADS, THE RESULTS YOU GET WILL NOT
BE ACCURATE.
A. OEW (Operating Empty Weight) and associated H-arm:
It is possible to take the data from these sources:
- Airline Load and Trim Sheet,
- Onboard Computers,
- Weight and Balance Manual,
- The generic OEW with an associated CG at 25%RC is about 109358 kg (241093 lb) with
PW 4000 engines or 109100 kg (240524 lb) with RR TRENT 700 engines.
NOTE : The OEW and the associated H-arm are given for a specific aircraft configuration: all
landing gears extended flight controls retracted and thrust reversers in stored position.
Page 1
03-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
B. Remaining Fuel
(1) There are three possibilities for the remaining fuel in the Trim Tank :
- Event occurred at take-off: FUEL IN TRIM TANK POSSIBLE,
- Event occurred after a normal flight: NO FUEL IN TRIM TANK,
- Event occurred after an emergency descent: FUEL IN TRIM TANK POSSIBLE.
(2) The means of extracting data can be used:
- Use data from the total fuel weight from load and trim sheet,
- Use data from MCDU,
- Do the measurements from magnetic fuel indicators or do an estimation based on fuel
load of 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 (See 03-20-01and 03-20-02),
- Do an estimation of the remaining fuel weight from the trim load sheet based on the
operator’s known fuel consumption.
(3) Find the associated H-arm and Y-arm. These values depend on the distribution of the fuel
load. See 03-20-02 to asses the fuel quantity (magnetic fuel indicators, MCDU, or specific
method), and associated H-arm and Y-arm.
C. Cargo Payload
- Use the total cargo payload weight from the load and trim sheet,
- H-arm and Y-arm: the operator should give the H-arm and Y-arm associated to cargo
compartments,
- H-arm and Y-arm: extract generic data from the Weight and Balance Manual,
- Calculate H-arm and Y-arm, see 03-50-01,
- Do approximate weight and position estimations based on observation,
- Ask for assistance of airline load office.
D. Weight and H-arm of any Missing or Removed Large Components
- Take the weight of the removed units,
- Use weights and moments listed in chapter 03-50-01,
- Use details from the Weight and Balance Manual.
E. Weight of Fluids either Removed or On Board
- Use data from the Weight and Balance Manual,
- H-arm calculated in chapter 03-50-01.
F. Change of the moment with landing gear retracted or leading edge and trailing edge surfaces
extended
- See 03-50-01.
Page 2
03-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
PREPARATION
04-00 PREPARATION
04-00-00 PREPARATION
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 04-00-00-001-A01
General
1. Tethering
It is generally agreed that the aircraft must be tethered during recovery leveling and lifting operations.
However, it is necessary to evaluate carefully the benefit and purpose.
A. During leveling or lifting, make sure that the aircraft is stable, and prevent uncontrolled
movement of the aircraft.
This movement can be caused by:
- Change of CG position during aircraft lifting/leveling,
- Weather conditions,
- Terrain conditions change: humidity, temperature, soil capability.
B. These conditions will help you decide whether to tether the aircraft or not:
- Aircraft attitude,
- Leveling/lifting procedure used,
- Terrain conditions,
- Wind/weather condition,
- Increase of aircraft stability foreseen.
It is necessary to do an evaluation of the tethering loads. They must be in the aircraft allowable
limits. During the tethering operation, it is necessary to continuously monitor these loads.
2. Shoring
Shoring of the aircraft can also be necessary to make it stable prior to remove fuel or cargo payload
or to allow a change/repositioning of the recovery tooling.
For the shoring operation, it is possible to use large timbers to support or stabilize the forward or aft
fuselage and/or the lower wing surfaces. These supports must be placed in the correct load bearing
areas and be adequately padded to prevent damage.
For example, it is possible to make fuselage supports or cradles to match the contours of the fuselage
frames. Adequate padding can consist of heavy felt, rubber sheets, rubber tires, mattresses or sand
bags.
The same conditions as above will help you decide whether to shore the aircraft or not.
The shoring loads must be evaluated, be in the aircraft allowable limits and monitored. All applied
loads for allowable skin pressure and fuselage bending moment calculations must also be in the ARM
limits.
Page 1
04-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
3. Lifting and Tethering Material

See 09-30-01.
Page 2
04-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-20 STABILIZING THE AIRCRAFT
04-20-00 STABILIZING THE AIRCRAFT
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 04-20-00-588-801-A01
Stabilizing the Aircraft
1. General
The operations that follow are necessary to stabilize the aircraft.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
TASK 02-30-01-200-801-A01 TASK 02-30-01-200-801-A01-Landing Gear Survey
03-50-01 03-50-01-MANAGING AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND CG
04-30-00 04-30-00-TETHERING THE AIRCRAFT
05-30-00 05-30-00-MOVING FUEL FOR CG CONTROL
04-80-00 04-80-00-MANUAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
FIGURE 04-20-00-991-001-A FIGURE 04-20-00-991-001-A-Aircraft Stability
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 04-20-00-588-001-A01
A. General
(1) Make sure that maximum weight has been removed to make the aircraft as light as
possible.
(2) Calculate the NRW and CG position, see 03-50-01.
(3) You must also make sure that the wind speed is not more than the maximum allowable
speed, see FIGURE 04-20-00-991-001-A.
Page 1
04-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(4) Monitor visually the ground contact point of the A/C (either L/G or jack) to detect any
movement or attitude change during the leveling and lifting operation. If load cells are
available on recovery jacks, monitor load indication shift.
The monitoring of the vertical position of the shock absorber in the strut with a reference
line can be also an indicator of A/C stability.
(5) Select the method that you will use to control the CG during the leveling/lifting operation
by addition or removal of ballast and transfer of fuel.
(6) Make sure the aircraft is correctly grounded.
(7) Install landing gear downlock pins in all landing gears that are extended, see TASK
02-30-01-200-801-A01.
(8) Install tethers as soon as possible if the aircraft is unstable and moves in the wind, see
04-30-00.
(9) Install temporary shoring timbers in relation with the tethers to help stabilize the aircraft
when necessary.
(10) Transfer fuel from the low wing to the opposite wing to move weight and leveling/lifting
load from the low wing, see 05-30-00.
It is also possible to use this procedure to reduce the loads on an engine resting on the
ground.
(11) The shock absorber of the low wing landing gear can be inflated while the shock absorber
of the landing gear on the high wing can be deflated to help raise a low wing.
(12) It is possible to operate the spoilers in strong wind conditions to help stabilize the aircraft,
see 04-80-00.
(13) Put the horizontal stabilizer to a slightly nose down position.
NOTE : You can do this only if power is available on the aircraft.

(14) Stabilize the soil around the aircraft so that cargo loading equipment and fuel tankers can
come near to the aircraft.
(15) Make sure that the aircraft CG position stays at least 500 mm (20 in) forward the aircraft
balance point (which is the aircraft support point: the main landing gear or the wing main
jacks).
NOTE : Other operations may be necessary depending on the specific recovery conditions.
(16) To determine the aircraft stability refer to FIGURE 04-20-00-991-001-A.
Page 2
04-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
230
220
210
200
190
)
Kt
180
0
(7
)
/h
Kt
km
170 W
5
NRW IN TONS
IN
(6
)
0
Kt
D
13
/h
160 SP
9
km
(5
EE
Kt
/h
0
D
12
4
km
150
(5
)
Kt
0
/h
11
km
140
)
(4
Kt
)
0
Kt
/h
)
10
Kt
km
(4
(5
130
)
8
Kt
/h
/h
(3
90
km
km
t)
2
/h
(3
120 (1 K )
km
G
80
/h (16 Kt
10
/h
1 t)
(2
IN
km
km /h (22
70
)
PP
/h
Kt
110
km
60
TI
20 km /h
30 km
)
50
Kt
100
40
(0
/h
km
90
TING
0
SHIF
80
15 20 25 30 35 40 CG %RC
F_AR_042000_1_0010101_01_00
Aircraft Stability
Wheels on Dry Ground (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-04-20-00-991-001-A01
Page 3
04-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
230
220
t)
70 K
m/h (
210 130 k
200
)
Kt
9
Kt)
(5
190
/h (65 W
)
/h
m
Kt
120 k IN
km
D
4
180
(5
SP
0
)
11
/h
Kt
EE
km
9
170 D
(4
NRW IN TONS
)
0
Kt
10
/h
3
km
160
(4
)
Kt
90
/h
8
km
(3
)
Kt
150
/h
80
10 km /h (22 Kt)
km
(3
140 /h
20 km /h (27
)
70
km /h (16 Kt
km
km /h ( 11 K Kt)
30 km /h
60
130
km
t)
t)
50
K
120
(
5
40
)
Kt
(0
110
/h
G
IN
PP
100
0
TI
TING
90 SHIF
80
15 20 25 30 35 40 CG %RC
F_AR_042000_1_0010102_01_00
Aircraft Stability
Wheels on Wet Ground (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-04-20-00-991-001-A01
Page 4
04-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-30 TETHERING THE AIRCRAFT
04-30-00 TETHERING THE AIRCRAFT
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 04-30-00-001-A01
General
1. Tethering the aircraft
CAUTION : YOU MUST NOT USE THE SAME FITTING TO TETHER THE AIRCRAFT AND
TO LIFT IT AT THE SAME TIME.IF YOU USE THE SAME FITTING, THERE IS A
RISK THAT THE LOADS APPLIED WILL BE MORE THAN THE ALLOWABLE
LOADS. THIS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE STRUCTURE.
CAUTION : DURING THE LEVELING AND LIFTING PROCESS, YOU MUST MONITOR AND
ADJUST THE TENSIONING DEVICES TO MAKE SURE THAT THE LOADS
APPLIED ARE NOT MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM LOADS.
aircraft recovery.
During the lifting operations of a damaged aircraft with cranes, jacks and/or pneumatic lifting bags,
you should tether the aircraft to prevent horizontal movement due to lifting side force (weight of the
aircraft, wind force, etc.).
You can attach the tether to fabric straps installed around the fuselage or the engine pylons or to
different fittings such as pylon hoist fittings, fuselage fittings and vertical stabilizer fittings.
To make sure that the horizontal stability is satisfactory, it is necessary to safely attach the aircraft
tethering cables to heavy vehicles or to a deadman tightly attached to the ground. The tethers should
make different angles with the fuselage centerline to prevent aircraft movement in all the directions.
A tensioning device should be provided for each tethering line so that tension is satisfactory at each
tether during the lifting operation.
The number of tethers changes with the type of recovery operation and is related to the strength and
direction of the wind.
See FIGURE 04-30-00-991-001-A for wind loads applied on the aircraft on ground.
2. Tethering Using the Mooring Fittings
Mooring fittings can be installed on the fuselage. See FIGURE 04-30-00-991-002-B for the location of
the Mooring fittings.
At each position, remove the blanking screws and the remaining sealant before you install the
mooring fitting.
Page 1
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Tethering Position Fitting P/N

FR 17 LH
PRE MOD 48082S30507 98F07203000 MOORING FITTING - 132
POST MOD 48082S30507 98F07203000 MOORING FITTING - 150
FR 17 RH
PRE MOD 48082S30507 98F07203000 MOORING FITTING - 133
POST MOD 48082S30507 98F07203000 MOORING FITTING - 151
FR 36 LH 98F07203000 MOORING FITTING - 134
FR 36 RH 98F07203000 MOORING FITTING - 135
Mooring Fitting Positions
TABLE 1
3. Tethering Using Straps or Cables

You can install straps or cables around the engine pylons and the fuselage main frames: FR15, FR36,
FR59 and FR76.
You must install a protection (plywood sheet covered with thick padding) between these straps or
cables and the fuselage and engine pylons. You can attach the tethers, tightly connected to the
ground, to these straps or cables.
4. Tether Lines Installation
The tethering load distribution must be symmetric around the fuselage. For this purpose, you must
install the tethering lines on each side of the fuselage.
Chapter 04-40-00 gives details on the ground anchors that you can use for tethering the aircraft.
Figure FIGURE 04-30-00-991-003-B gives an example of tethering line installation.
Page 2
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
Fz
Mz
Fy
Fx
Tethering
Ground Wind Loads
@A330-200F
FIGURE-04-30-00-991-001-A01
Mx
My
04-30-00
CASE 3
45° STRIKE
CASE 1
FRONTAL STRIKE CASE 2
SIDE STRIKE
CASE 1: WILL CAUSE NOSE TO RISE (My)

CASE 2: WILL CAUSE AIRCRAFT TO ROLL AND YAW (Mx + Mz)
CASE 3: WILL CAUSE AIRCRAFT TO ROLL, YAW AND PITCH (Mx + Mz + My)
F_AR_043000_1_0010101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 3
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR17 FR36 FR59 FR76
A C D
B
C
D
F_AR_043000_1_0020201_01_01
Tethering
Location of the Mooring Fittings
FIGURE-04-30-00-991-002-B01
Page 4
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR17 FR36 FR76
F_AR_043000_1_0030201_01_01
Tethering
Typical Tethering Lines Installation
FIGURE-04-30-00-991-003-B01
Page 5
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 04-30-00-556-801-A01
Mooring
1. General
During the recovery operation, you can moor the aircraft to help the tethering.
2. Inspections
Make sure that there is no damage on the landing gears.
Not applicable.
98F10201000000 MOORING KIT
TABLE 1
B.Referenced Information
Landing Gears
04-40-00 04-40-00-GROUND ANCHORS
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-006-B FIGURE 04-30-00-991-006-B-Mooring on the Main Landing Gear
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-007-A FIGURE 04-30-00-991-007-A-Mooring
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-004-A FIGURE 04-30-00-991-004-A-Mooring on the Nose Landing Gear
FIGURE 04-30-00-991-005-B FIGURE 04-30-00-991-005-B-Mooring on the Nose Landing Gear
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 04-30-00-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that the landing gear safety devices are in position, see TASK
02-30-01-481-802-A02.
(2) Install the wheel chocks in front and behind the wheels.
Page 6
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 04-30-00-556-001-A01
B. Mooring of the Nose Landing Gear
(1) With the mooring kit:
(a) Put the 98F10201000000 MOORING KIT in position, see FIGURE 04-30-00-991-004-
A.
See 04-40-00 for details of the ground anchors.
(2) With ropes:
(a) Attach the short ropes (1) with a diameter of 50.8 mm (2.0 in) on the towing fitting
of the nose landing gear, see FIGURE 04-30-00-991-005-B and FIGURE
04-30-00-991-007-A.
NOTE : If manila or sisal rope is used, make sure that there is not too much tension
on the rope because contraction can occur in wet weather.
(b) Attach the other ropes (2) with a diameter of 50.8 mm (2.0 in).
(c) Attach all the ropes on the ground with the ground anchors. Put tension on this
assembly.
Subtask 04-30-00-556-002-A01
C. Mooring on the Main Landing Gear with Ropes
(1) Attach the ropes (3) and (4) with a diameter of 50.8 mm (2.0 in) on the debogging lugs of
the main landing gear or by strapping both axles as only one lug is available (AFT or
FWD), see FIGURE 04-30-00-991-006-B and FIGURE 04-30-00-991-007-A.
NOTE : If manila or sisal rope is used, make sure that there is not too much tension on
the rope because contraction can occur in wet weather.
(2) Attach the ropes on the ground with the ground anchors. Put tension on this assembly.
Page 7
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TOWING FITTING
TOWING FITTING
B
A
GROUND ANCHOR
A
TOWING FITTING
FLAG
F_AR_043000_1_0040101_01_00
Mooring on the Nose Landing Gear

NLG Mooring Kit
FIGURE-04-30-00-991-004-A01
Page 8
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TOWING BRACKET
1 2
GROUND ANCHOR
F_AR_043000_1_0050201_01_01
Mooring on the Nose Landing Gear

Installation of the Mooring Ropes
FIGURE-04-30-00-991-005-B01
Page 9
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DEBOGGING LUG DEBOGGING LUG
3 4
F_AR_043000_1_0060201_01_00
Mooring on the Main Landing Gear

Installation of the Mooring Ropes
FIGURE-04-30-00-991-006-B01
Page 10
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
SHORT ROPE FWD

OF NOSE LANDING GEAR
45°
TYPICAL ALL
POSITIONS
F_AR_043000_1_0070101_01_00
Mooring
Position of the Mooring Ropes
FIGURE-04-30-00-991-007-A01
Page 11
04-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-40 GROUND ANCHORS
04-40-00 GROUND ANCHORS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 04-40-00-001-A01
General
1. Ground Anchors for Tethers
aircraft recovery.
There are three basic ways of supplying anchors for the tether lines:
- Commercial type ground anchors,
- Dead-man anchors,
- Heavy vehicles.
A. Commercial Type Ground Anchors
There are several types of commercially manufactured ground anchors on the market. Before
installation of any type of ground anchor the manufacturer’s instructions must be reviewed and
the stability of the soil must be analyzed. Different sizes of these anchors are available to cater
for the various loads. Most anchor units must be hammered or turned to a necessary depth
depending on the stability of the soil. Generally longer models are required for loose soils and
shorter ones for harder soils.
B. Dead-Man Anchors
Dead-man anchors are those constructed on the site from available materials such as vehicle
wheels complete with tires, heavy cribbing timbers or railroad ties. A hole is excavated to an
adequate depth and the materials are buried after being attached to cables. The hole is then
back-filled with the cables forming an angle of approximate of 30 degrees between the wheel or
timber and the ground. Use of this type of anchors requires a good experience of their use to
ensure adequate strength.
C. Heavy Vehicles
It is possible to use large and/or heavy vehicles, if there is an adequate supply. Once the vehicle
is used as anchor, it cannot be used for its original purpose during the recovery operation.
2. Anchor Holding Capacity
A. Anchor holding capacity is dependent on the type of soil and the depth of the anchor.
B. The holding capacity of the anchor will decrease as the moisture content of the soil increases.
C. It is necessary to test the soil stability:
- Evaluate the type of anchoring method,
- Determine the holding capacity of a given anchor in various soil types.
D. The soil stability can be tested in the field using a number of portable soil test probes.
Page 1
04-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-50 SOIL STABILITY
04-50-00 SOIL STABILITY
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 04-50-00-001-A01
General
1. Soil stability is of prime importance to ensure personnel safety, avoidance of secondary damage,
selection of ground corrective action or of tooling to be used to allow implementation of the recovery
procedure.
aircraft recovery.
Basically you must make sure that ground remains stable for the intended purpose and keep in mind
that load bearing capacity of soil might change with weather conditions.
Page 1
04-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-80 MANUAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
04-80-00 MANUAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 04-80-00-001-A01
General
1. Manual Operation of Flight Control Surfaces
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE TRAVEL RANGES OF THE FLIGHT CONTROL
SURFACES AND THE LANDING GEARS AND RELATED DOORS ARE CLEAR.
MOVEMENT OF THE CONTROL SURFACES AND LANDING GEARS/DOORS CAN
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR
EQUIPMENT.
DAMAGE.
WARNING : YOU MUST CONTACT AIRBUS BEFORE YOU MANUALLY OPERATE A SYSTEM
OR REMOVE A COMPONENT WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS IN AN ABNORMAL
ATTITUDE OR DISABLED. THE AMM PROCEDURES ARE APPLICABLE ON AN
AIRCRAFT IN A LEVEL CONFIGURATION ONLY.
For the manual operation of flight control surfaces, see the AMM tasks that follow:
- Manual Retraction of the Flaps, see AMM 27-50-00-866-804,
- Manual Retraction of the Slats, see AMM 27-80-00-866-806,
- Extension of the Spoilers For Maintenance, see AMM 27-60-00-866-801,
- Retraction of the Spoilers After Maintenance, see AMM 27-60-00-866-802.
2. Manual Operation of Landing Gears and Doors
For the manual operation of the landing gears, see TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01.
For the manual operation of the landing gear doors, see TASK 04-80-11-869-801-A01.
3. Manual Operation of Cargo Doors
For the manual operation of the cargo doors, see TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01.
Page 1
04-80-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-80-11 LANDING GEAR DOORS
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 04-80-11-869-801-A01
Manual Operation of the Landing Gear Door
1. General
These procedures can be used to open the Landing gears doors for Maintenance on ground. But only
use these procedures when there is no structural damage.
If these procedures do not give the correct result, then move the aircraft with special recovery
vehicles, see DESC 07-60-03-001-A01.
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
See TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01 for Manual Operation of the Landing Gear.
TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01 TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01-Manual Operation of Landing Gears
Landing Gears
DESC 07-60-03-001-A01 DESC 07-60-03-001-A01-Moving Aircraft with Specialized Vehicles
FIGURE 04-80-11-991-005-B FIGURE 04-80-11-991-005-B-Landing Gear Doors
FIGURE 04-80-11-991-005-B FIGURE 04-80-11-991-005-B-Landing Gear Doors
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE LANDING GEAR IS UPLOCKED BEFORE YOU OPEN
THE GEAR DOORS MANUALLY. IF THE GEAR IS NOT UPLOCKED, THE
WEIGHT OF THE GEAR CAN BE ON THE DOORS. IF YOU OPEN THE DOORS IN
THIS CONDITION, THERE IS A RISK THAT THE LANDING GEAR WILL EXTEND
BY GRAVITY AND CAUSE INJURY.
Page 1
04-80-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE TRAVEL RANGES OF THE FLIGHT CONTROL
SURFACES AND THE LANDING GEARS AND RELATED DOORS ARE CLEAR.
MOVEMENT OF THE CONTROL SURFACES AND LANDING GEARS/DOORS CAN
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR
EQUIPMENT.
DAMAGE.
Subtask 04-80-11-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that:
- The position of the L/G Control Lever 6GA agrees with the position of the landing
gear,
- The free fall extension system control is in the OFF position.
Subtask 04-80-11-010-001-A01
B. Open the Nose Landing Gear (NLG) Doors
CLEAR. MOVEMENT OF THE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS CAN CAUSE
INJURY AND/OR DAMAGE.
(1) Get access to the ground door-opening handle (Frame 17), see FIGURE 04-80-11-991-005-
B and FIGURE 04-80-11-991-006-A.
(2) Remove the safety pin (2) from the ground door-opening handle (3).
(3) Push and hold the pushbutton (1) on the handle.
(4) Move the handle (3) down until it stops.
(5) Make sure that the NLG door uplock releases and the doors start to open. If necessary,
manually push the doors to the correct position.
(6) Release the pushbutton (1) and install the safety pin (2) in the handle (3).
(7) Install the safety collars on the door actuators, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02.
Page 2
04-80-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 04-80-11-010-002-A01
C. Open the Main Landing Gear (MLG) Doors
(1) Open the applicable access panel (149AB (149CB)), see FIGURE 04-80-11-991-005-B and
FIGURE 04-80-11-991-007-A.
(2) Remove the safety pin (2) from the ground door-opening handle (1).
(3) Push and hold the latch-release (3).
(4) Move the handle (1) down until it stops.
(5) Make sure that the MLG door uplock releases and that the door starts to open. If
necessary, manually push the doors to the correct position.
(6) Release the latch-release (3) and make sure that it locks.
(7) Install the safety pin (2) in the handle (1).
(8) Install the safety collars on the door actuators, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02.
Page 3
04-80-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FORWARD DOORS
(HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED)
FIXED FAIRING DOOR

(MECHANICALLY OPERATED)
REAR DOORS HINGED DOOR

(MECHANICALLY (MECHANICALLY OPERATED)
OPERATED)
MAIN DOOR
NOSE LANDING
GEAR
HINGED DOOR
MAIN LANDING
GEAR
FIXED FAIRING DOOR

F_AR_048011_1_0050201_01_02
Landing Gear Doors

Landing Gear Doors - Lower view
FIGURE-04-80-11-991-005-B01
Page 4
04-80-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DOOR
UPLOCK
B
A
Z711
1 GROUND DOOR
OPENING
2 HANDLE
3
A
F_AR_048011_1_0060101_01_00
Landing Gear Doors

Nose Landing Gear
FIGURE-04-80-11-991-006-A01
Page 5
04-80-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A
FR45
149AB
149CB FR49
Z140
C B
DOOR
UPLOCK
2 C
F_AR_048011_1_0070101_01_00
Landing Gear Doors

Main Landing Gear
FIGURE-04-80-11-991-007-A01
Page 6
04-80-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
04-80-13 CARGO DOORS
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01
MANUAL OPERATION OF THE CARGO DOORS
1. General
WARNING : WHEN YOU OPEN/CLOSE THE CARGO COMPARTMENT DOOR, MAKE SURE
THAT THERE ARE NO OBJECTS OR PERSONS IN THE TRAVEL RANGE OF THE
DOOR. THE TRAVEL RANGE FOR THE CARGO COMPARTMENT DOOR MUST
BE CLEAR OF PERSONS, ACCESS PLATFORMS, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT. IF
YOU DO NOT DO THIS, INJURY AND DAMAGE CAN OCCUR.
WARNING : OBEY THE HYDRAULIC SAFETY PROCEDURES. WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC

SYSTEMS CAN BE DANGEROUS.
CAUTION : DO NOT OPEN THE DOOR IF THE WIND SPEED IS MORE THAN 40 KNOTS.
WIND AT MORE THAN 40 KNOTS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE DOOR AND
TO THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS PUT INTO THE NOSE-
INTO-WIND POSITION, THE MAXIMUM WIND SPEED CAN BE 50 KNOTS.
CAUTION : CLOSE THE DOOR BEFORE THE WIND SPEED INCREASES TO 60 KNOTS. IF
THE WIND SPEED IS MORE THAN 60 KNOTS, DAMAGE TO THE DOOR AND
TO THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE CAN OCCUR.
This chapter gives data on how you manually operate the cargo doors during a recovery procedure.
This task gives you the procedure to open the cargo doors if there is:
- An electrical system failure,
or
- A hydraulic pump failure.
NOTE : Two persons are necessary for these procedures.

2. Inspections
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
98F52308751000 MDCD-MANUAL OPERATION ROD
98A52008509000 SLING-UNIVERSAL, DOORS
98F52308227002 STRUT - SUPPORT, CARGO DOOR
Page 1
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
98F52308279000 BAR - R/I ACTUATOR
98A52307628000 LOCK - SAFETY, CARGO DOOR ACTUATORS
98F523087389000 STRUT - SUPPORT, MAIN DECK CARGO DOOR
TABLE 1
DESC 09-10-12-002-A01 DESC 09-10-12-002-A01-Hydraulic System
AMM 52-38-00-010-802
AMM 52-30-00-010-802
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-001-C FIGURE 04-80-13-991-001-C-Forward Cargo Door
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-002-C FIGURE 04-80-13-991-002-C-Aft Cargo Door
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-003-A FIGURE 04-80-13-991-003-A-Bulk Cargo Door
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-001-C FIGURE 04-80-13-991-001-C-Forward Cargo Door
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-009-A FIGURE 04-80-13-991-009-A-Main-Deck Cargo-Door
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-004-B FIGURE 04-80-13-991-004-B-Forward and Aft Cargo Doors
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 04-80-13-010-004-A01
A. Opening of the Main-Deck Cargo-Door (MDCD) in Manual Mode
WARNING : DO NOT OPEN THE CARGO-COMPARTMENT DOORS WHILE THE RED

WARNING LIGHT FLASHES. IF THE RED WARNING LIGHT FLASHES,
REMAINING PRESSURE CAN CAUSE THE DOOR TO OPEN SUDDENLY AND
CAN KILL OR CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS OR CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT.
(1) Prepare the hand pump as follows:
(a) Open the access door 197CB to get access to the Green ground service panel, see
DESC 09-10-12-002-A01.
(b) Remove the hand pump lever from the Green ground service panel.
Page 2
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(c) Open the access door 196BB to get access to the hand pump of the Yellow ground
service panel, see FIGURE 04-80-13-991-001-C.
(d) Install the hand pump lever on the hand pump of the Yellow ground service panel, see
AMM 52-38-00-010-802.
(2) Remove the 98F52308751000 MDCD-MANUAL OPERATION ROD from the onboard tool
kit (Flight Kit 2) of the bulk cargo compartment.
(3) Open the access cover (221NQ) of the LH sidewall panel (221WW) between FR18 and
FR19 to get access to the selector valve group, see AMM 52-38-00-010-802.
(4) Put the adjustable access platform in position below the MDCD.
(5) Remove the forward access panel 835BL from the MDCD to get access to the door
mechanism.
NOTE : The circuit breakers (1MJ) of panel (5002VE) must be open to simulate a
malfunction of the serviceable electrical door control system. This prevents the
operation of the Yellow electrical pump during the manual mode, see AMM
52-38-00-010-802.
(6) Unlock the MDCD manually as follows:
(a) Install the 98F52308751000 MDCD-MANUAL OPERATION ROD into the shaft lever
of the locking shaft and pull it down until the UNLOCKED indication comes into view
on the indicator window.
(b) Make sure that the all locking indicator flags of the MDCD are in view.
(7) Unlatch and open the MDCD manually as follows:
(a) On the MDCD control valve 805MJ, press and hold the PUSHBUTTON ”I” to
unlatch the MDCD.
(b) Operate the hand pump at the Yellow ground service panel until the MDCD is fully
open.
(c) At the same time, press and hold the PUSHBUTTON ”A” of the MDCD control
valve 803MJ. This makes sure that the MDCD can move in the open direction.
(d) When the MDCD starts to open, release the PUSHBUTTON ”I” of the MDCD
control valve 805MJ.
(e) Release the PUSHBUTTON ”A” of the MDCD control valve 803MJ when the MDCD
is in the fully open position.
(f) Stop the operation on the hand pump of the Yellow ground service panel and remove
the hand pump lever.
(8) Install the MDCD support struts to safety the manually opened MDCD, see SUBTASK
04-80-13-481-001-B01.
Page 3
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 04-80-13-010-001-A01
B. Opening of the Forward/Aft Cargo Doors with the Hydraulic Hand Pump

AIRCRAFT.
(1) Open the access doors 197CB and 196BB.
(2) Put the adjustable access platform in position at the forward or aft cargo compartment
door, see FIGURE 04-80-13-991-001-C or FIGURE 04-80-13-991-002-C.
(3) Open the subsequent access doors as required:
- 122CR for the forward cargo door,
- 152NR for the aft cargo door.
(4) Put the access platform in position at the avionics compartment door 811.
(5) Open the avionics compartment door 811 and set the light switch to the ON position.
(6) Open the avionics compartment door 132AZ and set the light switch CARGO COMPT
LIGHT to the ON position.
(7) Open the access panel 132UC, see AMM 52-30-00-010-802.
NOTE : The circuit breaker 1MJ must be open to simulate a malfunction of the electrical
door control system or of the Yellow electrical pump.
(8) Push the handle flap and pull the locking handle to the UNLOCKED position.
(9) Make sure that all indicator flags are out.
(10) Press the pushbutton on the top of the latching handle and pull it to the UNLATCHED
position.
(11) Put the door operation lever (on the door operation panel) in the OPEN position and hold
it there during the operation of the hand pump.
NOTE : The door operation lever must go back automatically to the STOP position when
you release it. If not, put it manually to the STOP position.
(12) Remove the hand pump lever from the ground service panel of the Green hydraulic system.
See DESC 09-10-12-002-A01 for the location of the service panel of the Green hydraulic
system.
(13) Make sure that the applicable cargo door can open freely.
Page 4
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(14) Install the hand pump lever on the hand pump (part of the Yellow ground service panel)
and operate it until the cargo door is fully opened.
NOTE : When the cargo door is fully open, you can feel a large increase in force on the
hand pump lever.
(15) Put the hand pump lever back to its storage position and close the access door 197CB.
(16) Install the applicable safety equipment, see SUBTASK 04-80-13-481-001-B01.
Subtask 04-80-13-010-002-A01
C. Opening of the Bulk Cargo Door
(1) Put the adjustable access platform in position below the bulk cargo door, see FIGURE
04-80-13-991-003-A.
(2) Push the button of the external door handle to release it from its recess.
(3) Move the external door handle to the OPEN position.
(4) Push the bulk cargo door inboard until its barrel locks are free from the related lock spigots
of the fuselage.
NOTE : It is permitted that the door seal touches lightly the sensor housing when the
bulk cargo door moves up.
(5) Put the door handle in the LOCKED position and push it into its recess.
(6) Open the bulk cargo door until the catch of the latch assembly engages with the latch
arrester of the crossbeam.
Subtask 04-80-13-010-003-B01
D. Opening of the Cargo Doors with the Crane

AIRCRAFT.
(1) Opening of the MDCD with the crane:
(a) Put the adjustable access platform in position at the MDCD, see FIGURE
04-80-13-991-009-A.
(b) Remove the access cover from the MDCD to get access to the door mechanism.
(c) Put a crane with a min. capacity of 210 kg (463 lb) in position at the cargo door.
Page 5
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(d) Attach the ring of the three-leg sling (1) to the crane and put two of the three hooks
on the ring.
NOTE : The MDCD hoisting sling of the cargo doors is part of the 98A52008509000
SLING-UNIVERSAL, DOORS. The hoisting sling includes the three-leg
sling, the turnbuckle, the rope and the ring bolt.
(e) Put the ring of the turnbuckle (2) on the remaining hook of the three-leg sling (1).
(f) Remove the plastic cap (8) from the lower hoisting point (3).
(g) Install the ring bolt (5) with the rubber washer (4) in the lower hoisting point (3).
Tighten the ring bolt (5) only with your hand.
(h) Attach the rope (6) to the ring of the ring bolt (5).
(i) Attach the end of the rope (6) on the hook of the turnbuckle (2).
(j) Carefully operate the crane until the leg of the hoisting sling is under load.
(k) Unlock the MDCD manually as follows:
1 Install the manual operation rod into the locking shaft and pull it down until the
UNLOCKED indication comes in view.
2 Make sure that the all locking indicator flaps of the MDCD are in view.
(l) Unlatch and open the MDCD manually as follows:
1 Install the manual operation rod into the latching shaft. Pull it down until the
UNLOCKED indication comes in view.
2 At the same time, push and hold the pushbutton A of the MDC control valve.
This makes sure that the latching shaft turn easily.
(m) Carefully operate the crane to fully open the MDCD in its 65˚ open position.
(n) Push the handle flap and pull the locking handle to the UNLOCKED position.
(o) Install the MDCD support struts to safety the manually opened of the MDCD, see
SUBTASK 04-80-13-481-001-B01.
(2) Opening of the forward/aft cargo doors with the crane:
(a) Put the adjustable access platform in position at the forward or aft cargo door, see
FIGURE 04-80-13-991-004-B.
(b) Put a crane with a min. capacity of 210 kg (463 lb) in position at the cargo door.
(c) Attach the ring of the three-leg sling (8) to the crane and put two of the three hooks
on the ring.
NOTE : The hoisting sling of the cargo doors is part of the 98A52008509000
SLING-UNIVERSAL, DOORS. The hoisting sling includes the three-leg
sling, the turnbuckle, the rope and the ring bolt.
Page 6
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(d) Put the ring of the turnbuckle (7) on the remaining hook of the three-leg sling (8).
(e) Remove the plastic cap (2) from the lower hoisting point (1).
(f) Install the ring bolt (5) with the rubber washer (4) in the lower hoisting point (1).
Tighten the ring bolt (5) only with your hand.
(g) Attach the rope (6) to the ring of the ring bolt (5).
(h) Attach the end of the rope (6) on the hook of the turnbuckle (7).
(i) Carefully operate the crane until the leg of the hoisting sling is under load.
(j) Push the handle flap and pull the locking handle to the UNLOCKED position.
(k) Make sure that all indicator flags are out.
(l) Press the pushbutton on the top of the latching handle and pull it to the
UNLATCHED position.
(m) If the door actuator is installed, continue as follows:
- open the 122CR for the forward cargo door,
- open the 152NR for the aft cargo door,
- turn the door operation lever (on the door operation panel) to the OPEN position
and hold it there during the auxiliary operation.
NOTE : The door operation lever must go back automatically to the STOP position
when you release it. If not, put it manually to the STOP position.
(n) Operate the crane to lift the cargo door to the fully open position.
NOTE : Make sure that the travel range of the cargo door is free.
(o) Install the safety lock to hold the cargo door in the fully open position, see SUBTASK
04-80-13-481-001-B01.
Subtask 04-80-13-481-001-B01
E. Installation of the Safety Support Equipment
(1) Installation of the Support Struts on MDCD:
(a) Put the 98F523087389000 STRUT - SUPPORT, MAIN DECK CARGO DOOR (15)
in position between the MDCD structure and the fixture points of the fuselage door
frame, see FIGURE 04-80-13-991-009-A.
(b) Install the pip-pin (14) into related the fixture point to attach the rod end (13) to the
fuselage door frame.
(c) Turn the turnbuckle (12) until the rod end (11) aligns with the fixture point of the
MDCD.
(d) Install the pip-pin (10) into related the fixture point to attach the rod end (11) on the
MDCD.
Page 7
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) Installation of the Safety Support Equipment on the Forward/Aft Cargo Doors:
(a) Installation of the 98A52307628000 LOCK - SAFETY, CARGO DOOR ACTUATORS
on the Door Actuator of the Forward/Aft Cargo Doors:
1 Remove the knurled screws and open the 98A52307628000 LOCK - SAFETY,
CARGO DOOR ACTUATORS.
2 Put the 98A52307628000 LOCK - SAFETY, CARGO DOOR ACTUATORS on
the piston of the door actuator and close the 98A52307628000 LOCK -
SAFETY, CARGO DOOR ACTUATORS.
3 Install the knurled screws and tighten them.
(b) Installation of the 98F52308227002 STRUT - SUPPORT, CARGO DOOR or the
98F52308279000 BAR - R/I ACTUATOR to the Forward/Aft Cargo Doors:
1 Put the lower end of the 98F52308227002 STRUT - SUPPORT, CARGO DOOR
at the fuselage frame and install the pip-pin in the attachment hole, see FIGURE
04-80-13-991-010-B and FIGURE 04-80-13-991-011-B.
2 Loosen the jam nuts to adjust the length of the 98F52308227002 STRUT -
SUPPORT, CARGO DOOR.
3 Put the upper ends of the 98F52308227002 STRUT - SUPPORT, CARGO
DOOR on the support fitting at the lateral edge members of the cargo door.
4 Turn the spindle until the holes in the upper ends of the 98F52308227002
STRUT - SUPPORT, CARGO DOOR and the holes in the support fittings are
aligned.
5 Install the pip-pins in the support fittings to attach the upper ends of the
98F52308227002 STRUT - SUPPORT, CARGO DOORto the lateral edge
members.
6 Tighten the jam nuts to keep the length of the 98F52308227002 STRUT -
SUPPORT, CARGO DOORconstant.
Page 8
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

Z835
A
LOCKING INDICATOR
MDCD−MANUAL
OPERATION ROD
INDICATION
WINDOW
835BL
LOCKING SHAFT
F_AR_048013_1_0060101_01_02
Main-Deck Cargo-Door
Hydraulic System for Manual Operation
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-006-A01
Page 9
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
B
A
221NQ
A
FR18
FR19
PUSHBUTTON I
805MJ
PUSHBUTTON II
PUSHBUTTON B
PUSHBUTTON A
FR18
803MJ
B
MDCD CONTROL VALVES
FR19
F_AR_048013_1_0070101_01_01
Door Mechanism for Manual Operation
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-007-A01
Page 10
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

Z821
ACCESS PANEL 132UC
B
FR47 FR46 D
GROUND SERVICE PANEL
OF YELLOW HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
C
HANDPUMP
FR20A
ELECTRO MANUAL
SELECTOR VALVE FR25A
A
ACCESS DOOR 196BB
INDICATOR LIGHT RED WARNING LIGHT
ACCESS DOOR 122CR

CATCH
PUSHBUTTON
LATCHING
HANDLE
DOOR OPERATION LEVER

C
D
F_AR_048013_1_0010301_01_00
Forward Cargo Door

Manual Operation
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-001-C01
Page 11
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
D
Z822
B
C
FR47 FR46
GROUND SERVICE PANEL
OF YELLOW HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FR59A
HANDPUMP
FR65
A
ELECTRO MANUAL
SELECTOR VALVE
ACCESS DOOR 196BB
INDICATOR LIGHT RED WARNING LIGHT
ACCESS DOOR 152NR

CATCH
PUSHBUTTON
LATCHING
HANDLE
DOOR OPERATION LEVER

C
D
F_AR_048013_1_0020301_01_00
Aft Cargo Door

Manual Operation
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-002-C01
Page 12
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
LATCH ARRESTER
FR68
Z823
A
CROSS BEAM
FR67
CATCH OF LATCH ASSEMBLY
DOOR SEAL BARREL

LOCK
B
SENSOR HOUSING BUTTON
LOCK SPIGOT
A
EXTERNAL DOOR HANDLE
B
F_AR_048013_1_0030101_01_00
Bulk Cargo Door

Manual Operation
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-003-A01
Page 13
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
1
Z835
B
FR29
FR20
6
3
A
5
F_AR_048013_1_0080101_01_00
Installation of the Crane
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-008-A01
Page 14
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A
B
Z821
Z822
ACCESS DOOR
122CR
8
LOCKING HANDLE
D
LATCHING HANDLE
C FR20A
FR22A
FR25A A
ACCESS DOOR
152NR
LOCKING HANDLE
D
LATCHING HANDLE 1
6
C FR59A 1
FR62A
2
FR65 B 3 4
5
C
D
F_AR_048013_1_0040201_01_00
Forward and Aft Cargo Doors

Installation of the Crane
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-004-B01
Page 15
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
Z835 MDCD DOOR
10
A
A
11
FR29
FR20
12
15
13
14
FUSELAGE DOOR FRAME
F_AR_048013_1_0090101_01_00
Installation of the Support Struts
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-009-A01
Page 16
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

Z821
Z822
A
B
C
FR22
FR23
ACTUATOR ATTACHMENT
FITTING OF CARGO C
COMPARTIMENT DOOR FR62 A
FR63
PISTON OF CARGO
DOOR ACTUATOR
B
KNURLED SCREW
LOCK−SAFETY, CARGO DOOR ACTUATOR
C KNURLED SCREW
F_AR_048013_1_0050201_01_01

Installation of the Safety Lock
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-005-B01
Page 17
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A
B
Z821
C
Z822
FR20A
C
UPPER END OF
STRUT − SUPPORT
CARGO DOOR
FR25A A
PIP−PIN
C
FR59A
FR65 B
JAM NUT
SPINDLE
JAM NUT
LOWER END OF
STRUT − SUPPORT
CARGO DOOR
PIP−PIN
C
F_AR_048013_1_0100201_01_00

Installation of the Support Struts
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-010-B01
Page 18
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A
B
Z821
C
Z822
C FR20A
C A
FR25A
C FR59A
PIP−PIN
FR65 B
JAM NUT
JAM NUT
LOWER END OF
STRUT − SUPPORT
CARGO DOOR
SPINDLE
PIP−PIN
UPPER END OF
STRUT − SUPPORT
CARGO DOOR
C
F_AR_048013_1_0110202_01_00

Installation of the Support Bars
FIGURE-04-80-13-991-011-B01
Page 19
04-80-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01
Manual Operation of the Landing Gears
1. General
AND/OR DAMAGE.
DAMAGE.
There are two Free-Fall conditions:
- With the aircraft electrical circuits serviceable,
- With the aircraft electrical circuits unserviceable.
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
See TASK 04-80-11-869-801-A01 for Manual Operation of the Landing Gear Doors.
98DNSA20208080 RIGGING PIN
98F32104042000 RIGGING-PIN, CLG UPLOCK
97F32001001000 CONTROL UNIT-LEG FREE FALL ACTUATOR
Page 1
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
98F32104022000 DRIVE-SPLINED
TABLE 1
TASK 04-80-11-869-801-A01 TASK 04-80-11-869-801-A01-Manual Operation of Landing Gear
Doors
Landing Gears
TASK 02-30-01-200-801-A01 TASK 02-30-01-200-801-A01-Landing Gear Survey
06-00-00 06-00-00-LEVELING AND LIFTING
02-30-01 02-30-01-LANDING GEAR
AMM 29-00-00-864-804
AMM 28-00-00-864-802
AMM 28-00-00-864-803
AMM 24-41-00-861-801
AMM 31-60-00-860-861
AMM 32-16-00-010-801
AMM 32-30-00-481-051
AMM 53-00-00-000-801
AMM 32-33-19-000-801
AMM 32-33-18-000-801
AMM 32-33-24-000-801
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-001-A FIGURE 04-80-20-991-001-A-Control Panels
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-001-A FIGURE 04-80-20-991-001-A-Control Panels
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-002-A FIGURE 04-80-20-991-002-A-ECAM Wheel Page
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-007-A FIGURE 04-80-20-991-007-A-Nose Landing Gear
FIGURE 04-80-20-991-008-A FIGURE 04-80-20-991-008-A-Main Landing Gear
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 04-80-20-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that the aircraft is stable.
Page 2
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) Make sure that the PIN GROUNDLOCK(s) are correctly installed on the landing gears that
are correctly extended and downlocked, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02.
(3) In the cockpit, see FIGURE 04-80-20-991-001-A:
(a) On the panel 117VU:
- Make sure that the PARK BRK switch is set to ON.
(b) On the panel 312VU:
- Make sure that the Landing-Gear Control Lever is in the DOWN position,
- Put a warning notice in position to tell persons not to operate the landing gear,
- Make sure that the LDG GEAR GRVTY EXTN switches are in the OFF position.
(4) Make sure that the hydraulic systems are depressurized, see AMM 29-00-00-864-804, AMM
28-00-00-864-802 and AMM 28-00-00-864-803.
(5) Put safety barriers around the landing gear(s) that are not correctly extended.
(6) Lift the aircraft on jacks to the correct height before you lower the Landing Gear, see
06-00-00.
(7) Remove all damaged gear doors. If the doors are very damaged, you can break them to
remove them.
Subtask 04-80-20-867-002-A01
B. Operation of the Free Fall Extension System with Aircraft Electrical Circuits Serviceable
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE SAFETY DEVICES AND THE WARNING NOTICES
ARE IN POSITION BEFORE YOU START A TASK ON OR NEAR THE FLIGHT
CONTROLS, THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES, THE LANDING GEARS
AND RELATED DOORS AND COMPONENTS THAT MOVE. MOVEMENT OF
COMPONENTS CAN KILL OR CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE.
(1) Energize the aircraft electrical circuits, see AMM 24-41-00-861-801.
(2) Do the Electronic Instrument System (EIS) start procedure (for the ECAM only), see AMM
31-60-00-860-861.
(3) On the panel 742VU:
- Make sure that the circuit breakers L/G Free Fall System 1, L/G Free Fall System 2
and Downlock Indicator are closed.
Page 3
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(4) On the panel 312VU:

- Set the LDG GEAR GRVTY EXTN switches to the DOWN position, see FIGURE
04-80-20-991-001-A. The landing gear doors will open and all the landing gears extend
into the downlocked position.
(5) Make sure that:
- The applicable landing gear(s) is/are in the extended and downlocked position on the
System Display (SD) Wheel Page and on the Independent Downlock Indication
Light(s), see FIGURE 04-80-20-991-001-A. See FIGURE 04-80-20-991-002-A for the
symbolic indications used on the SD Wheel Page,
- The landing gear(s) is/are extended and downlocked.
(6) Install the PIN GROUNDLOCK(s) on the extended gear(s), see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-
A02.
Subtask 04-80-20-867-004-A01
C. Operation of the Free Fall Extension System with Aircraft Electrical Circuits Unserviceable
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE SAFETY DEVICES AND THE WARNING NOTICES
ARE IN POSITION BEFORE YOU START A TASK ON OR NEAR THE FLIGHT
CONTROLS, THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES, THE LANDING GEARS
AND RELATED DOORS AND COMPONENTS THAT MOVE. MOVEMENT OF
COMPONENTS CAN KILL OR CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE.
(1) Use an External Power Source to Operate the Free Fall System:
(a) Connect an External Power Source through the applicable 97F32001001000
CONTROL UNIT-LEG FREE FALL ACTUATOR to the applicable free fall actuator,
see FIGURE 04-80-20-991-010-A.
NOTE : Do the following procedure to get access to the NLG Free Fall Actuator
- Put an access platform in position at the access door 811.
- Open the access door 811.
NOTE : Access to the MLG Free Fall Actuator is gained by removing the applicable
floor panels, see AMM 53-00-00-000-801.
(b) The applicable landing gear doors will open and the gear(s) will extend.
Page 4
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(c) Install the PIN GROUNDLOCK(s) on the extended gear(s), see TASK
02-30-01-481-802-A02.
NOTE : If the pin groundlock(s) cannot be installed, do not lower the aircraft onto
its gears. Do an inspection of the landing gear in accordance with TASK
02-30-01-200-801-A01. Repair or replace any damaged components before
the aircraft is lowered.
(d) Fit the Safety Devices, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02 on all of the landing gear
doors to prevent movement of the doors while the aircraft is being moved.
(2) Manual Operation of the Free Fall System:
(a) Remove the free fall actuator from the free fall mechanism, see FIGURE
04-80-20-991-007-A and FIGURE 04-80-20-991-008-A. Use the following AMM
procedures for removal of the electrical actuators:
- For removal of the NLG Free-Fall Actuator, see AMM 32-33-19-000-801.
- For removal of the MLG Free-Fall Actuator, see AMM 32-33-18-000-801.
(b) Install a splined drive 98F32104022000 DRIVE-SPLINED into the drive shaft of the
free fall mechanism, see FIGURE 04-80-20-991-010-A.
(c) Remove the 97F32001001000 CONTROL UNIT-LEG FREE FALL ACTUATOR.
(d) Rotate the drive shaft with a standard wrench and the applicable landing gear and
door uplocks will open and the L/G doors will open and the gear will extend.
(e) Remove the splined drive 98F32104022000 DRIVE-SPLINED from the drive shaft of
the free fall mechanism.
(f) Install the actuator on the free fall mechanism.
(g) Install the PIN GROUNDLOCK(s) on the extended gear(s), see TASK
02-30-01-481-802-A02.
NOTE : If the ground lock pin(s) cannot be installed, do not lower the aircraft onto
its gears. Do an inspection of the landing gear in accordance with TASK
02-30-01-200-801-A01. Repair or replace any damaged components before
the aircraft is lowered.
(h) Fit the Safety Devices, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02 on all of the landing gear
doors to prevent movement of the doors while the aircraft is being moved.
Page 5
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
LH MLG NLG RH MLG

INDICATION INDICATION INDICATION
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
LDG GEAR BRK FAN
UNLK
HOT
A UNLK UNLK
ON
A/SKID &
N/W STRG
AUTO/BRK
LO MED MAX
B DECEL DECEL DECEL
ON
ON ON ON OFF
TERR ON ND
UP
ON
PSI X1000
OFF 117VU ACCU PRESS
PARK BRK 3
0
1 1
4
3
DOWN BRAKES
ON LDG GEAR
GRVTY EXTN
PULL & TURN RESET

OFF
DOWN
BRT
117VU TYPICAL FRONT FACE DIM ACTIVE ATC : LFBO CTL
PRINT
MSG− PGE−
MSG+ PGE+
312VU TYPICAL FRONT FACE
LDG GEAR
GRVTY EXTN
L/G GRAVITY
RESET
EXTENSION SWITCH
OFF
SYS 1
DOWN
FREE FALL SELECTOR SWITCHES L/G GRAVITY

EXTENSION SWITCH
SYS 2
F_AR_048020_1_0010101_01_00
Control Panels
Landing Gear Indication and Free Fall Switches
FIGURE-04-80-20-991-001-A01
Page 6
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DISPLAY CONDITION
L/G DOOR
CLOSED
L/G DOOR
IN TRANSIT
L/G DOOR
FULLY OPEN
L/G DOOR FAULT
GEAR LOCKED
DOWN
GEAR IN TRANSIT
GEAR LOCKED UP
L/G GEAR FAULT
DISPLAY CONDITION
ONE OR MORE OF THE L/G

L/G CTL POSITION DOES NOT AGREE WITH
THE L/G CONTROL LEVER POSITION
(30 SECONDS AFTER SELECTION)
UP UPLOCK ENGAGED BUT THE L/G IS

LOCK LOCKED IN THE DOWN POSITION
F_AR_048020_1_0020101_01_00
ECAM Wheel Page

ECAM Wheel Page - Symbols
FIGURE-04-80-20-991-002-A01
Page 7
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
AIRCRAFT
CENTERLINE
A
FR17
FR16
FR11
Z120 FREE FALL
ACTUATOR
AIRCRAFT
CENTERLINE
NLG UPLOCK
NLG DOOR UPLOCK
F_AR_048020_1_0070101_01_00
Nose Landing Gear

Free Fall Mechanism
FIGURE-04-80-20-991-007-A01
Page 8
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A B
B
FR51
Z140 FR49
A
FREE FALL
ACTUATOR
MLG UPLOCK
MLG DOOR UPLOCK
B
RH SHOWN
LH SYMMETRICAL
F_AR_048020_1_0080101_01_00
Main Landing Gear

Free Fall Mechanism
FIGURE-04-80-20-991-008-A01
Page 9
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FREE FALL
CONTROL UNIT ELECTRICAL
(P/N 97F32001001000) ACTUATOR
EXTERNAL
ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY
RATCHET
(FOR MANUAL OPERATION)
FREE FALL
MECHANISM
SPLINED DRIVE
(P/N 98F32104022000)
F_AR_048020_1_0100101_01_00
Landing Gear
Ratchet for Manual Operation of the Free Fall Mechanism
FIGURE-04-80-20-991-010-A01
Page 10
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
MOTORS
FREE FALL ACTUATOR
0o
0o
OUTPUT SHAFT
F_AR_048020_1_0060101_01_00
Free Fall Actuator

FIGURE-04-80-20-991-006-A01
Page 11
04-80-20 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
WEIGHT REDUCTION
05-00 WEIGHT REDUCTION
05-00-00 WEIGHT REDUCTION
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-00-00-001-A01
General
1. You must control aircraft weight.
WARNING : PUT SAFETY DEVICES ON THE CARGO DOOR OPENING MECHANISM TO

PREVENT UNWANTED CLOSURE OF THE DOOR.
WARNING : YOU MUST CONTROL ALL MOVEMENT OF THE PAYLOAD DURING REMOVAL
TO PREVENT TAIL TIPPING.
WARNING : YOU MUST CONTROL MOVEMENT AND SPEED OF CONTAINERS AND

PALLETS TO PREVENT RAPID MOVEMENT OF PAYLOAD BECAUSE OF
AIRCRAFT ATTITUDE.
WARNING : YOU MUST MONITOR CHANGE TO CG AND AIRCRAFT ATTITUDE DURING

REMOVAL OF PAYLOAD.
Aircraft weight change will affect CG, aircraft stability and expected loads. It is commonly accepted
that NRW should be the minimum possible, which implies removal of maximum weight.
Make sure that actions taken to reduce weight have an efficient effect.
Make sure that you get the expected results.
You can get maximum weight reduction if you remove weight from:
- Fuel tanks
- Cargo compartments.
NOTE : For disposition and locations of containers and pallets in the cargo compartments, see
09-10-14.
Sometimes, it is not necessary to remove the cargo payload or fuel. This depends on main factors
such as:
- CG control
- Weight and amount of the cargo payload on board
- Need to excavate and build roadways for access
- Need to stabilize the ground so that cargo loaders and fuel trucks can go near the aircraft
- Expected removal: defueling time versus the time requirements to move the aircraft
- Capacity of the available lifting means
- Expected leveling/lifting loads
- Structural limitations on allowable leveling/lifting loads
Page 1
05-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- On-site storage capability of removed fuel.

Fuel and cargo payload can also remain on the aircraft to be used as ballast.
NOTE : Always be prepared for sudden attitude changes of the aircraft as the payload or fuel, etc.
is removed. The changes can affect both the longitudinal and lateral axes of the aircraft.
For Fuel Weight Reduction see 05-10-00.
For Cargo Weight Reduction see 05-50-00.
Page 2
05-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-10 DEFUELING
05-10-00 DEFUELING
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-10-00-001-A01
General - Defueling
1. Defueling
Defueling is one of the most important tasks to be carried out during an aircraft recovery operation.
The importance relates not only to weight reduction, but also to control of the Center of Gravity
(CG). The total mass of fuel on board the aircraft can be many tons. When the aircraft is in an
abnormal attitude a significant shift in CG can take place as the aircraft is returned to a normal
attitude. The procedures chosen to defuel a disabled aircraft should be made only after a thorough
investigation has been carried out to determine:
- The aircraft attitude
- The extent of damage to the structure and the functional status of the fuel and electrical
systems. The ability to energize the aircraft electrical power system through an external ground
power source (or the aircraft batteries) will reduce the total time required for the defuel process.
The lack of electrical power due to an inoperative electrical system, is the most common problem
associated with the defuel process.
The defuel system uses the same valves and fuel lines as the refuel system and components of the
engine feed and transfer systems. The aircraft can be defueled through one or more of the four hose
adapter couplings at the wing leading edges.
The quantity of fuel removed will vary considerably dependant on the aircraft attitude and the
method used to defuel.
Sufficient storage for the removed fuel must be available. This is a very important issue specially
when large amounts of fuel are involved. If the aircraft was involved in an incident where fuel
contamination is suspected, it is necessary to quarantine the removed fuel. Only when the applicable
authorities have made sure that this fuel is safe to use can it be used according to company and state
regulations.
Remove as much fuel as is possible prior to lifting the aircraft.
Large quantities of fuel can be trapped in the tanks due to abnormal aircraft attitudes. It is possible
that this fuel cannot be removed until the aircraft is level.
When one main landing gear has collapsed (or is deeply bogged in mud) the transfer of fuel from the
low wing to the opposite wing will reduce the weight of the low wing. This weight reduction will shift
the CG of the opposite wing outboard from the main landing gear. This transfer process is only
available when the fuel system is intact and power can be supplied to the fuel pumps and valves.
The defuel process may have to be carried out in several steps, as the aircraft is levelled and
stabilized several times.
Page 1
05-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Although the removal of the fuel is important, not all recovery operations will require its removal.
Where relatively small quantities of fuel remain, it is not necessary to remove it. This decision can
only be made once the survey has been completed. Decisions can also be made to reduce weight only
to the point where maximum lifting and jacking loads will not be exceeded. This is not a
recommended procedure and should be evaluated thoroughly.
2. General Preparation
WARNING : DO NOT SPILL FUEL ON THE ENGINES OR THE BRAKES. IF YOU SPILL FUEL
ON ENGINES OR BRAKES THAT ARE HOT, IT CAN CAUSES FIRE.
Before you start the defuel, you must make sure that:
A. You obey all the safety precautions applicable to refuelling/defuelling.
B. The safety area is clearly identified and the tankers are in correct position, see FIGURE
05-10-00-991-004-A.
C. The aircraft is correctly grounded, see 09-10-13.
D. A ground cable connects the tanker to the MLG ground connection.
E. There are no open flames or smoking in the safety area.
F. Only personnel qualified to do the defuel operation are in the safety area.
G. All the equipment and material not necessary for the defuel procedure are moved out of the
safety area.
H. The correct safety and fire fighting equipment is in position with the qualified personnel to
operate it.
J. The escape lanes for the fuel tankers are clear of obstruction.
K. The fuel tankers have sufficient capacity for the quantity to be defueled.
L. Only the electrical equipment necessary for the defuel procedure is used.
M. You do not operate the aircraft main engines or the APU during the defuel procedure.
N. The electrical equipment you use will not create a spark.
P. Caps are installed on all damaged fuel pipes.
Q. All damaged electrical wiring and fuel pumps are isolated.
R. You only use pumps that are serviceable.
S. Do not do the defuel procedure in bad weather conditions. Lightning is dangerous.
T. Do not operate radio, radar equipment or mobile phone during the defuel procedure.
U. Immediately remove all fuel spillage in accordance with local procedures.
Page 2
05-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
V. You have stopped all fuel leaks.

W. Trained personnel are available to contain all fuel spills.
X. If necessary put a GPU in position as far as practicable from the A/C. The GPU must have 3
phases, with 115 Volts AC, 400 Hz and 20 KVA.
Page 3
05-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
NOTE: THIS AREA MUST BE KEPT NOTE: THIS AREA MUST BE KEPT
CLEAR TO LET THE CLEAR TO LET THE
TANKER MOVE AWAY IN TANKER MOVE AWAY IN
AN EMERGENCY 15 AN EMERGENCY
(49)
15 15
(49) (49)
TA
KER NK
AN ER
T
7 7
(23) (23)
15 15
(49) (49)
15 15
SAFETY AREA
(49) 15 (49)
(49)
NOTE: ALL SAFETY ZONE
CLEARANCES ARE
SUBJECT TO CHANGE
NOTE: DIMENSIONS IN METERS ACCORDING TO LOCAL
(FEET IN BRACKETS) OR AIRPORT
REGULATIONS
F_AR_051000_1_0040101_01_00
Defuelling
Safety Area
FIGURE-05-10-00-991-004-A01
Page 4
05-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-20 FUEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
05-20-00 FUEL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-20-00-001-A01
Fuel System Basic Description
1. Basic Description
The fuel system:
- controls and supplies fuel in the correct quantities to the fuel tanks during refuel operations,
- supplies fuel to the engines via the engine feed tanks during flight,
- supplies fuel to the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU),
- moves fuel from the Trim tank (during flight) to control the Center of Gravity (CG) of the
aircraft,
- gives indications in the cockpit of system operation,
- gives indications in the cockpit of a malfunction in the system that could cause an unusual
condition,
- controls defuel and fuel ground transfers.
See DESC 09-10-12-004-A01 for the ground service connections (refuel/defuel coupling and
refuel/defuel control panel).
Page 1
05-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-20-00-002-A01
Tanks
1. The aircraft has the following fuel tanks:
Tank Capacity
liters US Gallons
Outer Tank LH 3 650 964
Outer Tank RH 3 650 964
Inner Tank LH 42 000 11 095
Inner Tank RH 42 000 11 095
Center Tank 41 560 10 979
Trim Tank 6 230 1 646
Total fuel capacity 139 090 36 744
Tank Capacities
TABLE 1
NOTE : Depending on A/C configuration, if the Center Tank is installed.

2. Each tank has one or more water drain valves. These are used to:
- drain the water, which could possibly come out of the fuel in the tank
- drain the fuel that remains after a defuel procedure has been completed (for maintenance).
3. All of the fuel tanks are fueled/defueled through a standard twin 2.5 inch fuel coupling, located in
each wing leading edge.
4. Each outer wing tank is vented through their vent surge tanks. The trim tank, in the horizontal
stabilizer, has a vent surge tank in the right hand side only.
5. The main transfer system controls the flow of fuel from the center and the outer tanks to the inner
tanks.
6. The system uses the fuel transfer-pump to move the fuel.
7. The FCMS (Fuel Control and Monitoring System) automatically controls the system, but if necessary,
the system can be manually controlled in the cockpit. The trim transfer system controls the CG of
the aircraft.
8. In flight, fuel is transferred to the inner tanks (Collector Cell) to make sure that the fuel supply to
the engines is constant. There are tree fuel pumps in each collector cell, two main pumps and one
standby pump. The main pumps supply fuel to their related engine. They can also supply fuel to the
other engines if the related crossfeed valves is opened.
Page 2
05-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CENTER
01 TANK
INNER INNER
TANK (FWD) TANK (FWD)
INNER INNER
TANK (AFT) TANK (AFT)
OUTER OUTER
TANK TANK
COLLECTOR COLLECTOR
CELL CELL
VENT SURGE VENT SURGE

TANK TANK
VENT SURGE
TANK
TRIM
TANK
NOTE:
01 DEPENDING ON A/C CONFIGURATION
F_AR_052000_1_0130101_01_00
Fuel System
Fuel Tank General Arrangement
FIGURE-05-20-00-991-013-A01
Page 3
05-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CENTER TANK
TRANSFER
PUMP
TRANSFER PUMP
APU FWD
PUMP
CROSSFEED AFT
APU VALVE TRANSFER
ISOLATION VALVES
VALVE
M M M M M M MM M M M
XFR−PUMP
PRESSURE
SWITCH CENTER TANK
INLET VALVE
LH INNER RH INNER
TANK INLET TANK INLET
VALVE TRIM−PIPE AUXILIARY VALVE
AIR ISOLATION FWD TRANSFER
SEPARATOR VALVE VALVE XFR−PUMP
REFUEL PRESSURE
M GALLERY SWITCH
LOW PRESSURE
M SWITCH CENTER TANK
APU LP INLET RESTRICTOR
VALVE APU−PUMP VALVE
PRESSURE
APU AFT SWITCH
PUMP TRIM
TRANSFER
TRIM PUMP
TANK
AIR RELEASE
VALVE
M
TRIM−TANK TO M
INLET VALVE APU TRIM−TANK
ISOLATION VALVE
NOTE: DEPENDING ON A/C CONFIGURATION
F_AR_052000_1_0010101_01_00
Fuel System Schematic

Centre and Trim Tank
FIGURE-05-20-00-991-001-A01
Page 4
05-20-00 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
ENGINE CENTER COLLECTOR

LINE CELL
LP VALVE
AIR RELEASE INNER TANK
VALVE FORWARD
REFUEL/DEFUEL
COUPLING M
M
(OPTIONAL ON LH WING)

INTERTANK S
TRANSFER VALVE
SURGE PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
Outer and Inner Tanks

Fuel System Schematic
@A330-200F
FIGURE-05-20-00-991-002-A01
M
INNER TANK MM MAIN FUEL
AFT PUMPS
ISOLATION
VALVE
STANDBY FUEL
05-20-00
PUMP
OUTER TANK
M
OUTER TANK
OVERWING INLET VALVE
REFUEL
ADAPTER
F_AR_052000_1_0020101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 5
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-20-00-004-A01
Fuel Quantity Indicating System
1. The Fuel Quantity Indicating (FQI) system measures the total quantity of fuel in the fuel tanks. It
gives indications for these areas:
- The LH and RH outer tanks,
- The LH and RH inner tanks, this includes the fuel in the collector cells,
- The center tank, if installed,
- The trim tank,
- Fuel on board (FOB).
1. The Magnetic Level Indicator (MLI) provides a secondary method to measure the fuel quantity, see
TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01.
Page 6
05-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A B
FUEL
1 KG 2
1490 F.USED 1460
2950
2840 1140 1140 2840

32000 32000 32000
5 °C 5 5 °C
FOB: 10698KG 4800 5 °C
WING X FEED
ENG 1 OPEN ENG 2

ON
CTR TANK
L XFR R
F L1 L2 A R2 R1 F
FAULT FAULT FAULT
U FAULT FAULT OFF MAN
U
T OFF OUTR TK FAULT FAULT U
E OFF OFF
O XFR
OFF OFF E
T TANK
L LSTBY MODE FEED
FAULT
A
U RSTBY L
ISOL T
FAULT A
FAULT U ON O FAULT
AUTO
FWD T
OFF OFF
O OPEN
B
F_AR_052000_1_0140101_01_00
Fuel System
Control and Indications - Typical View
FIGURE-05-20-00-991-014-A01
Page 7
05-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
HIGH LEVEL OVERFLOW

L OUTER TK L INNER TK CTR TK TRIM TK R INNER TK R OUTER TK L TT R
HI LEVEL TRANSF. VALVE

INC TEST
1b kg OPEN
L INR. CENTER R INR. x 1000 PRESELECTED LOAD
CKPT
END DEC CLOSED
L OUTER TRIM R OUTER ACTUAL
PWR APU EMERG.
MODE SELECT REFUEL/DEFUEL VALVES
L OUTER TK L INNER TK CTR TK TRIM TK R INNER TK R OUTER TK SUPPLY
REFUEL OPEN NORM SHUT
OFF NORM DOWN
SHUT
DEFUEL
BAT

F_AR_052000_1_0150101_01_00
Refuel/Defuel Control Panel

Typical View
FIGURE-05-20-00-991-015-A01
Page 8
05-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-30 MOVING FUEL FOR CG CONTROL
05-30-00 MOVING FUEL FOR CG CONTROL
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-30-00-650-801-A01
Ground Fuel Transfer Procedures
1. General
WARNING : DO NOT TRY TO GET ACCESS TO THE FUEL VALVE ACTUATORS IN A

LANDING GEAR BAY IF THE RELATED GEAR IS RETRACTED AND THE GEAR
DOORS ARE CLOSED. IN THIS CONDITION, THE WEIGHT OF THE LANDING
GEAR CAN BE ON THE GEAR DOORS. IF YOU OPEN THESE GEAR DOORS,
THERE IS A RISK THAT THE LANDING GEAR WILL EXTEND BY GRAVITY.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS STABLE AND SAFE BEFORE YOU TRY
TO GET ACCESS TO THE FUEL SYSTEM VALVES OR OTHER COMPONENTS.
WARNING : THIS PROCEDURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY TO HELP YOU PREPARE THE
RECOVERY OPERATION. TO DO THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST REFER TO THE
OPERATORS CUSTOMIZED DOCUMENTATION.
CAUTION : BEFORE YOU TRANSFER FUEL, MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT
SPACE IN THE APPLICABLE TANKS FOR THE FUEL YOU WILL TRANSFER.
CAUTION : WITHOUT A SERVICEABLE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, YOU MUST MONITOR THE

QUANTITY OF FUEL IN THE TANKS AND MAKE SURE TO STOP THE
TRANSFER TO A TANK WHEN THE FUEL IN THE TANK IS NEAR THE HIGH
LEVEL QUANTITY.
THERE IS NO HIGH LEVEL PROTECTION FOR THE TANKS IF THE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IS NOT SERVICEABLE.
If the aircraft is in a wing high position, it can be necessary to transfer fuel from the low wing to the
high wing. This helps to move the aircraft lateral CG to the correct position.
Page 1
05-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Before you do a fuel transfer, you must find the fuel quantity in each fuel tank.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
See DESC 05-10-00-001-A01 for general preparation before you start the transfer procedure.
See DESC 05-20-00-004-A01 for control panels and fuel quantity indicating system.
See AMM 28-25-00-869-801 for the customized procedure.
DESC 05-10-00-001-A01 DESC 05-10-00-001-A01-General - Defueling
DESC 05-20-00-004-A01 DESC 05-20-00-004-A01-Fuel Quantity Indicating System
AMM 28-25-00-869-801
AMM 12-11-28-650-801
AMM 12-11-28-650-802
AMM 24-41-00-861-801
AMM 31-60-00-860-801
AMM 27-40-00-866-801
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 05-30-00-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Obey the fuel safety procedures when you work on the fuel system, see AMM
12-11-28-650-801 and AMM 12-11-28-650-802.
(2) Put safety barrier in position and a warning notice to tell persons not to operate the flight
controls.
(3) Energize the aircraft electrical circuits, see AMM 24-41-00-861-801, and start the
Electronic Instrument System (EIS), see AMM 31-60-00-860-801.
(4) Push the FUEL P/BSW and make sure that the Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring
(ECAM) System Display shows the FUEL page.
(5) If you want to do a ground fuel transfer from the trim tank with the APU in operation, set
the THS to 0 degrees, see AMM 27-40-00-866-801.
(6) Open the access door 198DB.
Page 2
05-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(7) If it is necessary to lower the inner tank fuel level to 3 500 kg (7 716 lb) or less, do the
procedure that follows.
NOTE : When the fuel quantity in the inner tank decreases to 3 500 kg (7 716 lb), the
two intertank transfer valves open automatically. The fuel in the outer tanks then
flows into the inner tanks.
(8) Get access to the avionics compartment. Then open, safety and tag circuit breakers FUEL
MAIN XFR L and R.
(9) On the refuel/defuel panel 990VU:
(a) Lift the guard, then push and hold the HI LVL TEST switch. Make sure that:
- the hi-level lights and the OVERFLOW lights go to the opposite condition,
- the CKPT and END lights come on,
- the fuel quantity, PRESELECTED and ACTUAL displays show all 8’s.
(b) Release the HI LVL TEST switch. Make sure that:
- the lights go back to their initial condition,
- the fuel quantity, PRESELECTED and ACTUAL displays go back to their initial
condition.
(c) Make sure that the REFUEL-DEFUEL-VALVES switch(es) (of the tank(s) you want
to move fuel from) are in the NORM and guarded position.
(d) Set the REFUEL/DEFUEL-VALVES switch(es) (of the tank(s) you want to move fuel
into) to the OPEN position.
(e) Set the TRANSF VALVE switch to the OPEN position.
(f) Set the MODE SELECT switch to the REFUEL position.
Subtask 05-30-00-650-002-A01
B. Fuel Transfer
(1) To move some fuel from the LH (RH) inner tank:
(a) On the cockpit overhead panel 245VU:
1 Push the X FEED P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the ON and OPEN lights come on,
- the FUEL page shows the crossfeed valve symbol is in-line (valve open).
2 Push the L (R) INR TANK STBY P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the OFF lights go off,
- the FUEL page shows the standby-pump symbol is in-line (pump in
operation).
(b) Continuously monitor the ground fuel-transfer.
Page 3
05-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(c) When the fuel contents are at the necessary level, release the L (R) INR TANK
P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the OFF lights come on,
- the FUEL page shows the standby-pump symbol cross-line (pump not in
operation).
(d) Release the X FEED P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the ON and OPEN lights go off,
- the FUEL page shows the crossfeed valve symbol cross-line (valve closed).
(2) To move all the fuel from the LH (RH) inner tank:
CAUTION : DO NOT LET THE FEED PUMPS OPERATE FOR MORE THAN
FIFTEEN MINUTES WITH THE FAULT LIGHT ON. THIS PREVENTS
DAMAGE TO THE FEED PUMPS.
(a) On the cockpit overhead panel 245VU:
1 Push the X FEED P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the ON and OPEN lights come on,
- the FUEL page shows the crossfeed valve symbol is in-line (valve open).
2 Push the L (R) INR TANK STBY P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the FUEL page shows the standby-pump symbol is in-line (pump in
operation).
(b) Operate the standby fuel pump until the L (R) INR TANK FAULT light come on.
(c) Release the L (R) INR TANK P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the OFF light comes on and the FAULT light goes off,
- the FUEL page shows the standby-pump symbol cross-line (pump not in
operation).
(d) Release the X FEED P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the ON and OPEN lights go off,
- the FUEL page shows the crossfeed valve symbol cross-line (valve closed).
(3) To move some fuel from the center tank, if installed:
(a) Push the L and R CTR TK P/BSWs. Make sure that:
- the FUEL page shows the L (R) CTR TK pump symbols are in-line (pumps in
operation).
(b) Continuously monitor the ground fuel-transfer.
(c) When the fuel contents are at the necessary level, release the L (R) CTR TK
P/BSWs. Make sure that:
Page 4
05-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- the Fuel page shows the L (R) CTR TK pump symbols cross-line (pumps not in
operation).
(4) To move all the fuel from the center tank, if installed:
(a) Push the L and R CTR TK P/BSWs. Make sure that:
- the FUEL page shows the L (R) CTR TK pump symbols are in-line (pumps in
operation).
(b) Operate the pumps until the L and R CTR TANK FAULT lights come on.
(c) Release the L (R) CTR TK P/BSWs. Make sure that:
- the FAULT light goes off,
- the FUEL page shows the L (R) CTR TK pump symbols cross-line (pumps not in
operation).
(5) To move some fuel from the trim tank (Forward Transfer):
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT SPACE IN THE CENTER

TANK FOR THE FUEL FROM THE TRIM TANK. IF NECESSARY,
DEFUEL THE CENTER TANK TO MAKE THE SPACE.
(a) Push the T TANK MODE P/BSW. Make sure that the FWD light comes on.
(b) The FUEL page shows:
- the trim-tank isolation valve symbol is in-line (valve open),
- the forward-transfer triangular symbol (fuel-transfer in operation).
(c) Monitor the fuel contents, and make sure that the trim tank figure decreases.
NOTE : During the forward transfer, the fuel from the trim tank goes into the
center tank.
(d) When the fuel contents have decreased to the necessary level, release the T TANK
MODE P/BSW. Make sure that:
1 the FWD light goes off,
2 the FUEL page shows:
- the trim-tank isolation valve symbol cross-line (valve closed),
- the forward-transfer triangular symbol is not in view (fuel-transfer is not in
operation).
(e) Monitor the fuel contents on the FUEL page. Make sure that the trim tank
indications become stable.
Page 5
05-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(f) To Move All of the Fuel from the Trim Tank (Forward Transfer)
1 Push the T TANK MODE P/BSW. Make sure that:
a the FWD light comes on,
b the FUEL page shows:
2 Monitor the fuel contents and make sure that the trim tank figure decreases.
3 Continue the forward transfer until the trim-tank fuel quantity indication is zero
and the center-tank fuel quantity indication is stable.
4 Release the T TANK MODE P/BSW. Make sure that:
a the FWD light goes off,
b the FUEL page shows:
- the forward-transfer triangular symbol is not in view (fuel-transfer is
not in operation).
(6) To move all the fuel from the trim tank (Forward Transfer):
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT SPACE IN THE CENTER

TANK FOR THE FUEL FROM THE TRIM TANK. IF NECESSARY,
DEFUEL THE CENTER TANK TO MAKE THE SPACE.
(a) On the cockpit overhead panel 245VU, push the T TK XFR P/BSW. Make sure that:
1 the FWD light comes on,
(b) Monitor the fuel contents.
(c) Release the T TK XFR P/BSW. Make sure that:
operation).
(d) Monitor the fuel contents on the FUEL page. Make sure that the trim tank
indications become stable.
(7) To move fuel from the trim tank to the LH (RH) inner tank:
(a) On the MCDU Valves Test Page:
- make sure that all valves are closed,
Page 6
05-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- open the LH (RH) inner-tank inlet valve (”FUEL INR TK INLET VLV 1 (2)” on
page 2),
- open the trim-pipe isolation valve (”FUEL TRIM LINE ISOL VLV” on page 4).
(b) Open the circuit breakers FUEL AUX FWD XFR and FUEL TRIMPIPE ISOL.
This is to make sure that the trim-pipe isolation valve stays open and the auxiliary
forward-transfer valve stays closed.
(c) Push the T TANK MODE P/BSW. Make sure that:
1 the FWD light comes on,
NOTE : Ignore the indications of transfer to the center tank (if installed).
(d) Continue the forward transfer until the trim-tank fuel contents are at the necessary
level and the LH (RH) inner-tank fuel quantity is stable.
(e) Release the T TANK MODE P/BSW. Make sure that:
operation).
(f) Close the circuit breakers FUEL AUX FWD XFR and FUEL TRIMPIPE ISOL.
(g) On the MCDU Valves Test Page, make sure that all valves are closed.
(h) On the panel 261VU, open the reset button for FCMC1.
(i) On the panel 262VU, open the reset button for FCMC2 and wait for a minimum of 5
seconds.
(j) On the panel 261VU, close the reset button for FCMC1.
(k) On the panel 262VU, close the reset button for FCMC2 and wait for a minimum of
50 seconds.
Page 7
05-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-40 DEFUEL SCENARIOS
05-40-00 DEFUEL SCENARIOS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-40-00-001-A01
Defuel Scenarios
1. You can use one of the procedures that follow to defuel the aircraft:
A. Normal pressure defuel (with aircraft fuel pumps), with all systems serviceable, see TASK
05-40-01-650-801-A01.
B. Suction defuel, with no electrical power available, see TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01.
C. Pressure defuel, using an External Wiring Harness (EWH) to supply power to the aircraft fuel
pumps, see TASK 05-40-03-650-802-A01.
D. Drain remaining fuel, see TASK 05-40-04-650-802-A01.
Page 1
05-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-40-01 DEFUEL SCENARIO 1 NORMAL PRESSURE DEFUEL WITH ALL AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
SERVICEABLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-40-01-650-801-A01
Normal Pressure Defuel With All Aircraft Systems Serviceable
1. General
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT CENTER OF GRAVITY STAYS CORRECT
WHEN YOU DEFUEL THE AIRCRAFT. YOU MUST MONITOR THE AIRCRAFT CG
AT ALL TIMES.
WARNING : BEFORE YOU DO THIS PROCEDURE, MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IS DE-ENERGIZED AND ISOLATED.
CAUTION : KEEP THE BALANCE OF THE AIRCRAFT CORRECT WHEN YOU DEFUEL IT.
YOU MUST DEFUEL THE TRIM TANK BEFORE YOU DEFUEL THE WING
TANKS. WHEN IT IS POSSIBLE, DEFUEL THE TANKS EQUALLY.
You can use this procedure when the aircraft fuel pumps and the electrical systems are serviceable.
But only use this procedure when there is no structural damage and all systems are serviceable.
You cannot do the pressure defuel procedure if a surge tank level sensor is wet. This is shown when
the indicator(s) light OVERFLOW on the refuel/defuel panel 990VU is(are) on. When a surge tank
level sensor is wet you must do the suction defuel procedure, see TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
See DESC 05-10-00-001-A01 for general preparation before you start the defuel procedure.
See DESC 05-20-00-004-A01 and DESC 09-10-12-004-A01 for the fuel system control panels and
ground service connections.
Page 1
05-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01 TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01-Suction Defuel Procedures When No
Electrical Power Is Available
DESC 05-20-00-004-A01 DESC 05-20-00-004-A01-Fuel Quantity Indicating System
DESC 09-10-12-004-A01 DESC 09-10-12-004-A01-Fuel System
AMM 28-25-00-650-801
AMM 24-41-00-861-801
AMM 27-40-00-866-801
AMM 28-51-00-740-803
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 05-40-01-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that the aircraft and the tanker are correctly grounded and bonded.
(2) Put access platforms and safety barriers in position.
(3) Open the access door 198DB to the refuel/defuel panel 990VU.
(4) Remove the applicable refuel coupling cap.
(5) Make sure that the hose-coupling of the fuel tanker/pump is clean.
(6) Make sure that there is no damage on the refuel/defuel coupling. In case of any damage,
contact AIRBUS.
(7) Connect the hose-coupling of the fuel tanker/pump to the A/C refuel/defuel coupling.
NOTE : You can use 1, 2, 3 or 4 defuel hoses to do a pressure defuel. But when only one
refuel/defuel adaptor (on a refuel/defuel coupling) is used, it must be the one
identified with ”USE THIS ADAPTOR TO DEFUEL”.
(8) Energize the A/C electrical circuits, see AMM 24-41-00-861-801.
(9) In the cookpit:
(a) Start the ECAM system.
(b) On the ECAM Control Panel, push the FUEL P/BSW and make sure that ECAM
System Display Unit shows the FUEL page.
Page 2
05-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(c) Read and make a record of the fuel quantities.

(10) If you want to fully defuel the trim tank, set the Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer to 0
degrees, see AMM 27-40-00-866-801.
(11) On the Refuel/Defuel Control Panel 990VU:
(a) Make sure that the REFUEL-DEFUEL-VALVES switches are in the NORM and
guarded position.
(b) Set the MODE SELECT switch to DEFUEL position.
(c) Set the TRANSF VALVE switch to OPEN position.
Subtask 05-40-01-650-003-A01
B. Pressure Defuel Procedure
WARNING : THIS PROCEDURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY TO HELP YOU PREPARE

THE RECOVERY OPERATION. TO DO THE PROCEDURE, YOU MUST
REFER TO THE OPERATORS CUSTOMIZED DOCUMENTATION.
(1) Defuel of the Center Tank, if installed:
(a) Defuel of the center tank to a lower quantity:
1 On the Fuel Control Panel 245VU, push the L and R CTR TANK P/BSWs.
Make sure that:
- on the ECAM the FUEL page shows the L and R CTR TANK fuel pump
symbols are in-line (pumps in operation).
2 Monitor the fuel contents on the FUEL page.
3 When the fuel contents have decreased to the necessary level, release the L and
R CTR TANK P/BSWs. Make sure that:
- the FUEL page shows the L and R CTR TANK fuel pump symbols are
cross-line (pumps not in operation).
4 Monitor the fuel contents indications on the FUEL page. Make sure that the
indications become stable. Read and make a record of the fuel quantities.
(b) Defuel of the center tank until empty:
FIFTEEN MINUTES WITH THE FAULT LIGHT ON. THIS
PREVENTS DAMAGE TO THE FEED PUMPS.
1 On the Fuel Control Panel 245VU, push the L and R CTR TANK P/BSWs.
Make sure that:
Page 3
05-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- the FUEL page shows the L and R CTR TANK fuel-pump symbols are in-
line (pumps in operation).
2 Operate the L and R CTR TANK pumps until a pump FAULT light comes on.
3 Release the related CTR TANK P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the OFF light comes on,
- the FAULT light goes off,
- the FUEL page shows the related CTR TANK fuel pump symbol is cross-line
(pump not in operation).
4 Do this operation for the other pump.
(2) Defuel of the Trim Tank:
NOTE : The trim tank and the center tank, if installed, can be defueled at the same time.
(a) Defuel of the trim tank to a lower quantity:
1 On the Fuel Control Panel 245VU, push the T TANK MODE P/BSW. Make
sure that:
a The FWD light comes on.
b The FUEL page shows:
2 Monitor the fuel contents.
3 When the fuel contents have decreased to the necessary level, release the T
TANK MODE P/BSW. Make sure that:
a The FWD light goes off.
- the trim-tank isolation valve symbol is cross-line (valve closed),
- the forward-transfer triangular symbol (fuel-transfer is not in
operation).
4 Monitor the fuel contents on the FUEL page. Make sure that the trim tank
(b) Defuel of the trim tank and the trim pipe until empty:
1 On the Fuel Control Panel 245VU, push the T TANK MODE P/BSW. Make
sure that:
a The FWD light comes on.
2 Monitor the fuel contents.
Page 4
05-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
3 Continue the defuel until the defuel stops.

4 If it is necessary to defuel the wing tanks, put the T TANK FEED switch to the
OPEN position for five minutes.
5 Make sure that the trim-tank fuel quantity indication is zero and the related
tank fuel quantity indication is stable.
6 Release the T TANK MODE P/BSW and, if necessary, put the T TANK FEED
switch to the AUTO position. Make sure that:
a The FWD light goes off.
- the trim-tank isolation valve symbol is cross-line (valve closed),
- the forward-transfer triangular symbol is not in view (fuel-transfer not
in operation).
(3) Defuel of the Wing Tanks:
(a) Defuel of the wing tanks to a lower quantity:
NOTE : You can defuel the wing tanks and the center tank, if installed, at the same
time if the trim tank is empty. The Fuel Control and Monitoring System
(FCMS) prevents movement of fuel from the wing tanks until the trim tank
is empty.
1 On the Fuel Control Panel 245VU, push the L STBY and the R STBY switches
to start the pumps. Make sure that:
- the FUEL page shows that the related fuel pump symbol is in-line (pump in
operation).
2 Monitor the fuel contents on the FUEL page.
NOTE : When the fuel quantity in one of the inner tanks decreases to 3 500
kg (7 716 lb) the two intertank transfer valves open. Fuel from the
outer tanks then flows into the inner tanks.
3 When the fuel contents have decreased to the necessary level, release the L
STBY the R STBY P/BSWs. Make sure that:
- the related pump P/BSW OFF light comes on,
- the FUEL page shows the related fuel pump symbol is cross-line (pump not
in operation).
4 Monitor the fuel contents indications on the FUEL page. Make sure that the
Page 5
05-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(b) Defuel of the wing tanks until empty:
FIFTEEN MINUTES WITH THE FAULT LIGHT ON. THIS
PREVENTS DAMAGE TO THE FEED PUMPS.
1 Push the L1, R1, L STBY and the R STBY P/BSWs. Make sure that:
- the OFF light goes off,
- the FUEL page shows the related fuel pump symbol is in-line (pump in
operation).
2 Monitor the fuel quantity in the collector cells and do the steps that follow:
a When the fuel level in the collector cell is approximately 500 kg (1 100 lb),
put the TRANS. VALVE switch to CLOSED.
NOTE : During a defuel, the fuel pump can empty the collector cell faster
than the collector cell can fill. Thus you must let the collector
cell fill again before the defuel can continue.
b When the collector cell is full again, put the TRANS. VALVE switch to
OPEN.
c Do these steps again until the inner tank indication is zero.
3 Operate the pumps until a pump FAULT-light comes on.
4 Release the related TANK P/BSW. Make sure that:
- the related FAULT light goes off,
- the related pump P/BSW OFF light comes on - the FUEL page shows the
related fuel pump symbol is cross-line (pump not in operation).
Page 6
05-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-40-02 DEFUEL SCENARIO 2 SUCTION DEFUEL WHEN NO ELECTRICAL POWER AVAILABLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01
Suction Defuel Procedures When No Electrical Power Is Available
1. General
AT ALL TIMES.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE SUCTION PRESSURE IS NOT MORE THAN THE
MAXIMUM DEFUEL PRESSURE OF - 0.75BAR ( -11PSI).
This procedure can be used when electrical systems are not serviceable. But only use this procedure
when there is no structural damage.
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
See DESC 05-20-00-002-A01 and FIGURE 05-40-02-991-004-A for the location of all the valves.
Page 1
05-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

D97B00-003 MECHANICAL - ACTUATOR
TABLE 1
TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01 TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01-Use of Magnetic Level Indicators (MLI)
DESC 05-20-00-002-A01 DESC 05-20-00-002-A01-Tanks
04-80-11 04-80-11-LANDING GEAR DOORS
AMM 28-25-52-000-802
AMM 28-26-53-000-801
AMM 28-25-27-000-801
AMM 28-25-55-000-801
AMM 28-27-52-000-802
AMM 28-27-53-000-801
AMM 28-29-51-000-801
AMM 28-27-52-000-801
AMM 28-25-57-000-802
AMM 28-25-53-000-801
AMM 28-25-57-000-801
AMM 28-27-55-000-801
AMM 28-25-57-000-803
AMM 28-25-57-000-804
AMM 28-25-59-000-801
AMM 28-26-55-000-801
FIGURE 05-40-02-991-004-A FIGURE 05-40-02-991-004-A-Motor Actuator
FIGURE 05-40-02-991-004-A FIGURE 05-40-02-991-004-A-Motor Actuator
FIGURE 05-40-02-991-001-A FIGURE 05-40-02-991-001-A-Defuel
TABLE 2
Page 2
05-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
5. Procedure
Subtask 05-40-02-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(2) Put the access platforms and the safety barriers in position.
(3) Open the MLG doors, see 04-80-11, and the applicable access panels to have access at the
refuel/defuel valves.
(4) Remove the applicable refuel coupling cap(s).
(5) Make sure that the hose-coupling(s) of the fuel tanker/pump is(are) clean.
(6) Make sure that there is no damage on the refuel/defuel coupling(s). In case of any damage,
contact AIRBUS.
(7) Connect the tanker hose(s) to the refuel/defuel coupling(s).
(8) Use the Magnetic Level Indicators to calculate the quantity of the fuel from the tanks, see
TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01. Record the results.
(9) Record the position of the valves that follow, so that you can return them to their recorded
position after the defuel:
- fuel inlet, trim tank, see AMM 28-25-52-000-802,
- fuel inlet, inner tanks, see AMM 28-26-53-000-801,
- fuel inlet, outer tanks, see AMM 28-25-27-000-801,
- auxiliary-forward fuel transfer, see AMM 28-25-55-000-801,
- trim tank isolation, see AMM 28-27-52-000-802,
- trim-pipe isolation, see AMM 28-27-53-000-801,
- APU isolation, see AMM 28-29-51-000-801.
(10) Remove the electrical actuators from the valves in paragraph .
NOTE : The fuel trim-tank isolation valve is used only if the transfer pipe to the trim-
tank is to be defuelled.
(11) Install the D97B00-003 MECHANICAL - ACTUATOR on each valves in paragraph , see
FIGURE 05-40-02-991-004-A.
(12) Manually set the valves in paragraph to the open position.
Subtask 05-40-02-650-002-A01
B. Suction Defuel When No Electrical Power Is Available
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE SUCTION PRESSURE IS NOT MORE THAN THE
MAXIMUM DEFUEL PRESSURE OF - 0.75BAR ( -11PSI).
(1) Start the suction pumps on the fuel tanker.
Page 3
05-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) Push and hold the Override Buttons on the Refuel/Defuel Isolation Valves, see FIGURE
05-40-02-991-001-A.
NOTE : The Override Buttons must be held in all the time the defuel is in progress.
(3) Use the MLIs to monitor the fuel contents in the tanks, see TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01.
You can also use the gauges in the tanker to monitor the fuel quantity removed.
(4) When each tank becomes empty, set the applicable fuel valve to the closed position.
(5) When the defuel is complete you must:
- release the Override Buttons on the Refuel/Defuel Isolation Valves,
- stop the suction motors on the fuel tanker,
- return all the valves that you manually opened to the original positions,
- install the electrical actuators.
Page 4
05-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
AIRFRAME STRUCTURE
SH
UT
OP
EN
LOCKING
PLATE
POSITION OF LOCKING PLATE

TO TURN VALVE
F_AR_054002_1_0040101_01_00
Motor Actuator
Operation of Locking Plate
FIGURE-05-40-02-991-004-A01
Page 5
05-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A A 01
OVERRIDE
BUTTON REFUEL/DEFUEL
COUPLING
HINGED PANEL
REFUEL/DEFUEL
COUPLING CAP
REFUEL/DEFUEL
COUPLING
REFUEL/DEFUEL
COUPLING CAP A
NOTE: RH SHOWN
01 DEPENDING ON A/C CONFIGURATION LH SYMMETRICAL
F_AR_054002_1_0010101_01_01
Defuel
Refuel/Defuel Couplings and Override Buttons
FIGURE-05-40-02-991-001-A01
Page 6
05-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-40-03 DEFUEL SCENARIO 3 DEFUEL USING AN EXTERNAL WIRING HARNESS
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-40-03-650-802-A01
Defuel Using an External Wiring Harness
1. General
AT ALL TIMES.
This procedure can be used when electrical systems cannot be energized, but it is possible to supply
power to the pumps directly through a GPU. Use this procedure only when there is no structural
damage.
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
See DESC 05-20-00-002-A01 for a Fuel System Schematic showing the location of all the valves and
pumps.
See 05-40-02 for locking plate of the refuel valves D97B00-003 MECHANICAL - ACTUATOR and for
the override buttons.
Page 1
05-40-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

DESC 05-20-00-002-A01 DESC 05-20-00-002-A01-Tanks
05-40-02 05-40-02-DEFUEL SCENARIO 2 SUCTION DEFUEL WHEN NO
ELECTRICAL POWER AVAILABLE
04-80-11 04-80-11-LANDING GEAR DOORS
02-30-01 02-30-01-LANDING GEAR
AMM 28-25-52-000-802
AMM 28-26-53-000-801
AMM 28-25-27-000-801
AMM 28-25-57-000-802
AMM 28-25-55-000-801
AMM 28-27-53-000-801
AMM 28-27-52-000-801
AMM 28-25-53-000-801
AMM 28-25-57-000-801
AMM 28-27-55-000-801
AMM 28-29-51-000-801
AMM 28-27-54-000-801
AMM 28-25-57-000-803
AMM 28-25-57-000-804
AMM 28-25-59-000-801
AMM 28-26-55-000-801
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 05-40-03-869-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that the aircraft electrical system is de-energized and isolated.
(2) Make sure that there is no GPU connected to the aircraft electrical system.
(4) Put the access platforms and the safety barriers in position.
(5) Remove the applicable refuel coupling cap(s).
(6) Make sure that the hose-coupling(s) of the fuel tanker/pump is(are) clean.
Page 2
05-40-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(7) Make sure that there is no damage on the A/C refuel/defuel coupling(s). In case of any
damage, contact AIRBUS.
(8) Connect the tanker hose(s) to the A/C refuel/defuel coupling(s).
(9) Open the MLG doors, see 04-80-11, and the applicable access panels to have access at the
refuel/defuel valves. See DESC 05-20-00-002-A01 for the location of all valves.
(10) Record the positions of the valves that follow, so that you can return them to their
recorded position after the defuel:
- fuel inlet, trim tank, see AMM 28-25-52-000-802,
- fuel inlet, inner tanks, see AMM 28-26-53-000-801,
- fuel inlet, outer tanks, see AMM 28-25-27-000-801,
- fuel inlet, center tank, if installed, see AMM 28-25-57-000-802,
- fuel, auxiliary forward transfer, see AMM 28-25-55-000-801,
- fuel, trim pipe isolation, center section, see AMM 28-27-53-000-801.
(11) Remove the electrical actuators from these valves from paragraph .
(12) Manually set the valves from paragraph to the closed position.
(13) If necessary, set these valves to OPEN:
- fuel, crossfeed,
- fuel, trim tank isolation.
NOTE : The fuel crossfeed valve will allow you to defuel the complete aircraft from one
wing. That is from either the LH wing or the RH wing refuel/defuel couplings.
When you open the fuel trim pipe isolation valve, you can remove the fuel from
the transfer pipe.
Subtask 05-40-03-650-001-A01
B. Defuel Procedures Using an External Wiring Harness
(1) Disconnect the electrical actuators from the LH and RH STBY fuel pumps.
(2) Connect the External Wiring Harness (EWH) to LH and RH STBY fuel pumps.
NOTE : You can control the pumps from the switches on the EWH control panel.
(3) Push and hold in the override button on the refuel/defuel isolation valves.
NOTE : The override buttons must be held in all the time the defuel is in progress.
(4) To defuel the trim tank:
(a) Manually set these valves to OPEN:
- fuel, trim tank isolation,
- fuel, auxiliary FWD transfer.
(b) On the control panel of the EWH, set the pump switches to ON.
(c) Push and hold in the override buttons on the refuel/defuel isolation valves
Page 3
05-40-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(d) Monitor the fuel quantity received at the tanker until the trim tank is empty.
NOTE : There are no manual MLIs in the trim tank.

To monitor the fuel in the trim tank, you must record the fuel quantity that
is received at the tanker.
(5) To defuel the outer tanks, then the inner tanks:
NOTE : The inner tank high level protection does not function without power. You must
use the MLIs to monitor the fuel levels.
(a) Manually open the outer tank inlet valves.
(b) On the control panel of the EWH, set the pump switches to ON.
(c) Push and hold in the override buttons on the refuel/defuel isolation valves.
(d) Monitor the fuel quantities in the outer tanks with the MLIs when the flow to the
tanker has become stable.
(e) To complete the defuel the wings tanks, you must next remove the fuel from the
inner tanks.
(f) Manually open the inner tank inlet valves.
(g) On the control panel of the EWH, set the pump switches to ON.
(h) Push and hold in the override buttons on the refuel/defuel isolation valves.
(i) Monitor the fuel quantities in all the tanks until they are empty.
NOTE : The aircraft MLIs can be used to give an indication of the fuel contents in
the wing tanks.
(6) When the defuel is complete:
(a) Release the refuel/defuel isolation valves.
(b) Set all the fuel valves to their correct recorded position.
(c) Remove the EWH from the LH and RH STBY fuel pumps.
(d) Install the electrical actuators on these valves.
(e) Reconnect the electrical actuators to the left and right hand transfer pumps.
Page 4
05-40-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
SWITCH
10 AMPS
OFF
A R R 16AWG COPPER
P1
115VAC B Y Y 16AWG COPPER EN3646A61203 01
C B B 16AWG COPPER
ON
OFF
A R R 16AWG COPPER
P2
115VAC B Y Y 16AWG COPPER EN3646A61203 01
C B B 16AWG COPPER
ON
PANEL
WIRING DIAGRAM EXTERNAL WIRING HARNESS

EN3646A61203FN: CONNECTOR WITH PINS
01
EN3646A61203BN: CONNECTOR WITHOUT PINS
ft)
20
(8.
m
2.5
P1
30 m (98.43 ft) MINIMUM
115VAC
2.5 P2
PANEL m
(8.
20
ft)
EXTERNAL WIRING HARNESS
F_AR_054003_1_0010101_01_01
Defuel Procedures Using an External Wiring Harness

External Wiring Harness
FIGURE-05-40-03-991-001-A01
Page 5
05-40-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-40-04 DEFUEL SCENARIO 4 DRAIN REMAINING FUEL
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-40-04-650-802-A01
Drain Remaining Fuel
1. General
This procedure can be used:
- To drain the fuel that remains in the fuel tanks,
- To defuel the aircraft when no other procedure can be done.
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
See DESC 09-10-12-004-A01 for the fuel system ground connections.
To do this procedure, you can use:
- 97A28002117002 PURGING TOOL for all tanks except the trim tank,
or
- 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN for all tanks.
97A28002117002 PURGING TOOL
Page 1
05-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN
TABLE 1
DESC 09-10-12-004-A01 DESC 09-10-12-004-A01-Fuel System
AMM 28-25-00-650-803
FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A-Drain Remaining Fuel
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 05-40-04-481-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that the aircraft electrical system is de-energized and isolated.
(3) Put access platforms and safety barriers in position.
Subtask 05-40-04-650-002-A01
B. Drain Fuel Procedure

NOTE : For the trim tank procedure, see SUBTASK 05-40-04-650-004-A01.

(1) For gravity draining fuel procedure:
(a) Attach the hose to the 97A28002117002 PURGING TOOL, see FIGURE
05-40-04-991-002-A.
(b) Put the end of the hose into the container.
(c) On the 97A28002117002 PURGING TOOL, fully retract the nut (4), the screw (3)
and the plunger (1).
(d) Put the hexagonal end of the bush (2) into the bottom of the water drain valve, see
FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A.
Page 2
05-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(e) Turn the bush through 30 degrees clockwise.

(f) Turn the nut (4) until it touches and seals against the aircraft skin.
(g) Hold the bush (2) and turn the screw (3) clockwise to its stop. This causes the
plunger (1) to open the drain valve and the fuel to flow.
(h) Continuously monitor the fuel flow into the container. Make sure that there is
sufficient space in the container for all of the drained fuel. Replace the container as
necessary.
(i) Continue the draining procedure until no fuel flows.
(j) When no fuel flows, turn the screw (3) counter-clockwise to its stop.
(k) Turn nut (4) until it does not touch the aircraft skin.
(l) Turn the hexagonal end of the bush (2) 30 degrees and remove the 97A28002117002
PURGING TOOL and the container(s).
(m) Repeat the steps in paragraphs to for each tank to be drained.
(2) For suction draining fuel procedure:
NOTE : The illustration shows a typical suction pump with an air-drill power source. The
suction pump used must be a type approved for use on a typical fuel system and
the applicable safety precautions must be taken.
(a) Attach the hose to the 97A28002117002 PURGING TOOL, see FIGURE
05-40-04-991-002-A.
(b) Put the end of the hose into the container.
(c) On the 97A28002117002 PURGING TOOL, fully retract the nut (4), the screw (3)
and the plunger (1).
(d) Put the hexagonal end of the bush (2) into the bottom of the water drain valve, see
FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A.
(e) Turn the bush through 30 degrees clockwise.
(f) Turn the nut (4) until it touches and seals against the aircraft skin.
(g) Connect the end of the drain hose to the inlet of the suction pump and a second hose
to the outlet of the suction pump. Put the end of the second hose into the container.
(h) Hold the bush (2) and turn the screw (3) clockwise to its stop. This causes the
plunger (1) to open the drain valve and the fuel to flow.
(i) Start the suction pump.
(j) Continuously monitor the fuel flow into the container. Make sure that there is
necessary.
(k) Continue the suction draining procedure until no fuel flows.
Page 3
05-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(l) When no fuel flows, turn the screw (3) counter-clockwise to its stop.
(m) Turn nut (4) until it does not touch the aircraft skin.
(n) Turn the hexagonal end of the bush (2) 30 degrees and remove the 97A28002117002
PURGING TOOL and the container(s).
Subtask 05-40-04-650-004-A01
C. Drain Fuel Procedure of the Trim Tank

(1) For gravity draining fuel procedure:
(a) Attach the hose to the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN, see
FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A.
(b) Put the other end of the hose into the container.
(c) Install the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN on the applicable
water drain valve, see FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A.
(d) Hold the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN in position and let the
fuel flow.
(e) Continuously monitor the fuel flow into the container. Make sure that there is
necessary.
(f) Continue the draining procedure until no fuel flows.
(g) When no fuel flows, remove the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER
DRAIN and the container(s).
(h) Repeat the steps to for each trim tank water drain valve as applicable.
(2) For suction draining fuel procedure:
(a) Attach the hose to the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN, see
FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A.
(b) Put the other end of the hose into the container.
(c) Install the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN on the applicable
water drain valve, see FIGURE 05-40-04-991-002-A.
(d) Connect the end of the drain hose to the inlet of the suction pump and a second hose
to the outlet of the suction pump. Put the end of the second hose into the container.
(e) Hold the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN in position and let the
fuel flow.
(f) Start the suction pump.
Page 4
05-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(g) Continuously monitor the fuel flow into the container. Make sure that there is
necessary.
(h) Continue the suction draining procedure until no fuel flows.
(i) When no fuel flows, remove the 98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER
DRAIN and the container(s).
Page 5
05-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STA732 / RIB2
STA1469/ RIB3
A STA2205/ RIB4
CENTER
TANK
01
A STA15298 / RIB23
STA21905 / RIB33
A
A
INNER TANK A
OUTER TANK
STA129 / RIB3 STA129 / RIB3
STA766 / RIB18
B
B TRIM TANK
NOTE:
01 DEPENDING ON A/C CONFIGURATION
F_AR_054004_1_0020101_01_00

Water Drain Valves - Locations (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-05-40-04-991-002-A01
Page 6
05-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WATER DRAIN
VALVE
FUEL TANK
BOTTOM−SKIN
1
P/N 97A28002117002
4
TYPICAL PLASTIC
3
SUCTION HOSE
PUMP WATER DRAIN
VALVE
FUEL TANK
OUTLET BOTTOM−SKIN
P/N 98A28104000000
TYPICAL
A FUNNEL
SUCTION
PUMP
PLASTIC
HOSE
B
OUTLET
F_AR_054004_1_0020102_01_00

Purging Tool Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-05-40-04-991-002-A01
Page 7
05-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-50 CARGO COMPARTMENTS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-50-00-005-A01
General
1. General
This chapter gives data related to the removal of the cargo from the aircraft. The removal of the
cargo is an important task carried out during an aircraft recovery operation. Cargo removal will
remove a large amount of weight from the aircraft and can also control the Center of Gravity (CG).
The procedure you select to remove the cargo during the aircraft recovery operation should only be
made after a survey has been carried out to find:
- The aircraft stability and attitude.
- The extent of damage to the aircraft structure and components.
- The condition of the aircraft electrical systems.
- The condition of the cargo loading system.
- If an external ground power source is available.
- If the equipment necessary to remove the cargo is available.
The removal of the cargo is important but not all recovery operations will require its removal. When
a small amount of cargo is loaded it is possible that it is not necessary to remove it. This decision can
only be made once the survey has been completed. Decisions can also be made to remove the cargo
only to the point where the maximum lifting and jacking loads will not be exceeded or the aircraft
recovery operation can be completed.
Page 1
05-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-50-01 CARGO REMOVAL
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-50-01-005-A01
Manual Cargo Unloading Preparation and Safety Precautions
1. General
This chapter provides guidelines for the manual unloading of the main deck cargo compartment when
the aircraft is in a disabled situation and the Cargo Loading System cannot be used.
Each task gives detail for ULD in side-by-side and single row configuration.
For manual unloading with the aircraft in a nose down attitude, see TASK 05-50-01-000-801-A01.
For manual unloading with the aircraft in a nose up attitude, see TASK 05-50-01-000-802-A01.
For manual unloading with the aircraft RH wing down, see TASK 05-50-01-000-803-A01.
For manual unloading with the aircraft LH wing down, see TASK 05-50-01-000-804-A01.
2. Equipment
To do this procedure you must use the equipment that follow:
- a cargo loader applicable to your aircraft,
- a winch, a cable and roller guides that can support the weight of the ULDs to be unloaded.
The maximum gross weight of a ULD is 4321 kg (9526.17 lb) in side by side configuration and
5670 kg (12500.21 lb) in single row configuration.
3. Safety Precautions
A. Make sure that all personnel is at a safe distance during the removal of the cargo.
B. Make sure that you do not cause accidental movement of an ULD and continuously monitor the
speed and movement of the ULD.
C. Do not unlock the ULD until you move it.
D. Make sure that no persons are in the cargo compartment when you move an ULD with the
winch.
WARNING : YOU MUST CAREFULLY MANAGE AND PREPARE THE MOVEMENT OF

CONTAINERS AND PALLETS WHEN YOU MOVE THE PAYLOAD. MOVEMENT
OF THE PAYLOAD WILL CHANGE THE AIRCRAFT CG AND CAN HAVE AN
EFFECT ON THE AIRCRAFT ATTITUDE AND STABILITY.
E. You must continuously monitor the center of gravity position and stability of the aircraft.
4. Preparation
Before you do a manual unloading task, you must do the steps that follow and obey the related
safety precautions.
Page 1
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
WARNING : BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPEN THE CARGO DOOR. MAKE SURE THAT
NO PERSONS OR EQUIPMENT ARE IN THE AREA AROUND THE CARGO DOOR.
THERE IS A RISK THAT LOOSE CARGO WILL FALL OUT OF THE AIRCRAFT
WHEN YOU OPEN THE DOOR.
A. Open the main deck cargo door carefully.
For manual operation of the cargo door, see 04-80-13.
WARNING : PUT SAFETY DEVICES ON THE CARGO DOOR OPENING MECHANISM TO

PREVENT UNWANTED CLOSURE OF THE DOOR.
B. Install the safety devices on the cargo door, see 04-80-13.
C. Pull down the loading bridge, see FIGURE 05-50-01-991-027-A.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE LOADER PLATFORM AND THE AIRCRAFT LOADING
BRIDGE ARE CORRECTLY ALIGNED BEFORE YOU DO THE
LOADING/UNLOADING OF AN ULD. THIS PREVENTS DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT LOADING BRIDGE AND/OR THE ULD.
D. Put a cargo loader in position in front of the loading bridge.
E. Put the winch in position out of the aircraft.
5. Roller Guide Installation
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-028-A.
A. Installation of the roller guide in front of the barrier wall.
- Remove the walkway panels to get access to the seat tracks.
- Attach the roller guide on a double stud.
- Install the double stud on the seat track.
- Tighten the nuts or screws until the stud have no play in the seat track.
B. Installation of the roller guide on other positions in the cargo compartment.
- Attach the roller guide on a double stud.
- Install and secure the double stud on the seat track or the seat track adapter.
- Tighten the nuts or screws until the stud have no play in the seat track.
Page 2
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
B
LOADING BRIDGE
SECTION 1
SUPPORT FEET
A
TRANSPORT
ROLLERS
BALL UNIT
SEAT TRACK
B
F_AR_055001_1_0270101_01_00
Main Deck Cargo compartment

Loading Bridge
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-027-A01
Page 3
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
NUT
ROLLER GUIDE
TRACK STUD
WINCH CABLE
SEAT TRACK
F_AR_055001_1_0280101_01_00
Roller Guide
Installation
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-028-A01
Page 4
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-50-01-000-801-A01
Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading - A/C Nose Down
1. General
This procedure provides guidelines to manually unload the main deck cargo compartment when the
aircraft is in a nose down attitude.
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-029-A.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Before you do this procedure, you must follow the preparation guidelines and safety precautions in
DESC 05-50-01-005-A01.
For manual unloading of ULDs in side by side configuration, do SUBTASK 05-50-01-980-001-A01.
For manual unloading of ULDs in single row configuration, do SUBTASK 05-50-01-980-002-A01.
DESC 05-50-01-005-A01 DESC 05-50-01-005-A01-Manual Cargo Unloading Preparation and
Safety Precautions
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-029-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-029-A-Aircraft Attitude
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-032-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-032-A-A/C Nose Down - ULD Single Row
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-030-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-030-A-A/C Nose Down - ULD Side-by-side
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-031-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-031-A-A/C Nose Down - ULD Side-by-side
TABLE 1
5. Procedure

WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT CAUSE ACCIDENTAL MOVEMENT OF AN

ULD DURING THE UNLOAD PROCEDURE. USE SUFFICIENT LOADING
PERSONNEL TO DO THE PROCEDURE SAFELY. DO NOT UNLOCK AN ULD
UNTIL IMMEDIATELY BEFORE YOU UNLOAD IT. ACCIDENTAL MOVEMENT OF
AN ULD CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.
Page 5
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 05-50-01-980-001-A01
A. Manual Unloading of ULDs in Side-by-Side Configuration
NOTE : In this configuration, the unloading sequence is as follow:

- Unload the row on the left side of the compartment first,
- Unload the row on the right side of the compartment,
- Unload the aft single row position.
(1) Unloading of the row on the LH side of the compartment.
(a) Do the preparation steps and obey the safety precautions in DESC 05-50-01-005-A01.
(b) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-030-A, step 1.
1 Attach the winch cable to the first ULD.
2 Lock down the anti roll out on the loading bridge.
3 Unlock the latches on the door side of the ULD.
4 Pull the ULD with the winch out of the cargo compartment and move it onto
the loader.
(c) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-030-A, step 2.
1 Remove the walkway panel in front of the barrier wall.
2 Install the roller guide (see DESC 05-50-01-005-A01) on the seat track:
- next to the barrier wall,
- next to the ULD.
3 Lock the latches in front of the door.
4 Lift the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
5 Attach the winch cable along the ULD to the floor grid.
6 Pull the winch cable to release the latches.
(d) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-030-A step 3.1 and 3.2.
1 Unlock the latches at the FWD side of the ULD.
2 Unwind the winch cable to move the ULD on the door area.
3 Lock the latches at the aft side of the ULD.
(e) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-030-A step 4.
1 Remove the winch cable from the roller guides.
2 Attach the winch cable on the ULD side.
Page 6
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
3 Unlock the latches in front of the cargo door.

4 Lock down the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
the loader.
NOTE : The aft latches will guide the ULD.

(f) Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until the complete row of ULD is unloaded.
(2) Unloading of the row on the RH side of the compartment.
(a) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-031-A step 1.
2 Attach the winch cable to the ULD.
3 Unlock the latches at AD position on the ULD side.
5 Lift the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
the loader.
(b) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-031-A step 2.
- next to the ULD.
3 Lock the latches at the AD position.
5 Attach the cable along the ULD to the floor grid.
6 Pull the winch cable to unlock the latches.
(c) Step 3
2 Unwind the winch cable to move the ULD on the door area.
(d) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-031-A step 4.
1 Lift the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
2 Remove the winch cable from the roller guides.
Page 7
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
3 Attach the winch cable on the ULD.

4 Unlock the latches in front of the AD position.
5 Lower the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
the loader.
(e) Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until the complete row of ULD is unloaded.
(3) Unloading of the aft single row position.
See SUBTASK 05-50-01-980-002-A01.
Subtask 05-50-01-980-002-A01
B. Manual Unloading of ULDs in Single Row Configuration
(1) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-032-A step 1.
(a) Do the preparation steps and obey safety precautions in DESC 05-50-01-005-A01.
(b) Attach the winch cable to the first ULD.
(c) Lock the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
(d) Lock down the anti roll out of the loading bridge.
(e) Unlock the latches on the door side of the ULD.
(f) Pull the ULD with the winch out of the cargo compartment and move it onto the
loader.
(2) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-032-A step 2.
(a) Remove the walkway panel in front of the barrier wall.
(b) Install the roller guide (see DESC 05-50-01-005-A01) on the seat track:
- next to the ULD.
(c) Attach the winch cable along the ULD to the floor grid.
(d) Pull the winch cable to release the latches.
(3) Step 3
(a) Lock the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
(b) Unlock the latches in front of the ULD.
(c) Unwind the winch cable to move the ULD on the door area.
(4) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-032-A step 4.
Page 8
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(a) Remove the winch cable from the roller guides.

(b) Attach the cable to the ULD.
(c) Pull the ULD with the winch out of the cargo compartment and move it onto the
loader.
(5) Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until the complete row of ULD is unloaded.
Page 9
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_055001_1_0290101_01_00
Aircraft Attitude
Aircraft Nose Down
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-029-A01
Page 10
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STEP 1
WINCH
WALKWAYS PANELS
2
STEP 2
WINCH
ROLLER GUIDES
F_AR_055001_1_0300101_01_00
A/C Nose Down - ULD Side-by-side

LH Row - Steps 1 and 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-030-A01
Page 11
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

LATCHES IN AD POSITION TO GUIDE THE ULD
WALKWAYS PANELS
2
STEP 3.1
WINCH ROLLER GUIDES
LATCHES TO GUIDE THE ULD

STEP 3.2
WINCH
STEP 4
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0300102_01_01

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-030-A01
Page 12
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STEP 1
WINCH
ROLLER GUIDES
STEP 2
WINCH ROLLER GUIDES
F_AR_055001_1_0310101_01_01

RH Row - Steps 1 and 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-031-A01
Page 13
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
ROLLER GUIDES
STEP 3.1
WINCH
STEP 3.2
WINCH
STEP 4
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0310102_01_01

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-031-A01
Page 14
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WINCH STEP 1
ROLLER GUIDES
WALKWAYS PANELS
STEP 2
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0320101_01_01
A/C Nose Down - ULD Single Row

Steps 1 and 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-032-A01
Page 15
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

ROLLER GUIDES
WINCH STEP 3.1
WINCH STEP 3.2
STEP 4
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0320102_01_01
A/C Nose Down - ULD Single Row

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-032-A01
Page 16
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-50-01-000-802-A01
Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading - A/C Nose Up
1. General
aircraft is in a nose up attitude.
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-033-A.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Before you do this procedure, you must follow the preparation guidelines and safety precaution in
DESC 05-50-01-005-A01.
Safety Precautions
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-043-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-043-A-A/C Nose Up - ULD Single Row
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-041-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-041-A-A/C Nose Up - ULD Side-by-side
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-042-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-042-A-A/C Nose Up - ULD Side-by-side
TABLE 1
5. Procedure


EQUIPMENT.
Page 17
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 05-50-01-980-003-A01

- Unload the row on the left side of the compartment first,
- Unload the row on the right side of the compartment,
(b) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-041-A Step 1.
the loader.
(c) Step 2
- next to the ULD.
5 Remove the FWD end stops and guides.
8 Pull the ULD with the winch and move it on the door area.
(d) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-041-A step 3.
1 Lock the latches on the aft of the ULD.
2 Unwind the winch cable until the ULD is in contact with the aft latches.
(e) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-041-A step 4.
1 Remove the cable from the roller guide.
Page 18
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
2 Attach the cable on the side of the ULD.

5 Pull the ULD with the winch out of the cargo compartment and move it on the
loader.

6 Lock down the latches on the aft side of the first ULD position.
(f) Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until the complete row of ULD is unloaded.
(a) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-042-A step 1.
2 Lift the latches on the aft side of the first ULD position of the LH row.
3 Unlock the latches at AD position on the ULD side.
loader.

(b) Step 2
1 Remove the walkway panels in front of the barrier wall.
2 Install the roller guide on the seat track next to the barrier wall.
3 Lock the latches in front of the AD position.
7 Pull the ULD with the winch in the door area until you can lift the first latch
line.
(c) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-042-A step 3.
1 Lock the latches on the aft of the ULD.
2 Unwind the winch cable until the ULD is in contact with the aft latches.
Page 19
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(d) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-042-A step 4.
1 Remove the cable from the roller guide.
2 Attach the cable on the side of the ULD.
4 Unlock the latches on AD position.
loader.

6 Lock the latches on AD position.
8 Unlock the latches on the aft end of the first ULD position.
(e) Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until the complete row of ULD is unloaded.
(3) Unloading of the aft single row position.
See SUBTASK 05-50-01-980-004-A01.
Subtask 05-50-01-980-004-A01
(1) Step1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-043-A step 1.
(b) Attach the winch cable to the ULD.
(c) Lock down the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(d) Between the ULD and the LH wall of the compartment, lift the latches which are in
line with the aft side of the ULD. These latches will guide the ULD during its
movement toward the cargo door.
(e) Unlock the latches on the door side of the ULD.
(f) Pull the ULD with the winch out of the cargo compartment and move it onto the
loader.
(2) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-043-A step 2.1. and 2.2
(a) Lift the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
(b) Lift the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(c) Remove the walkway panel in front of the barrier wall.
Page 20
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(d) Install the roller guide (see DESC 05-50-01-005-A01) on the seat track:
- on the seat track next to the barrier wall,
- on the seat track next to the ULD.
(e) Attach the winch cable to the ULD.
(f) Install the cable on the roller guide.
(g) Unlock the latches at the FWD of the ULD.
(h) Pull the ULD with the winch in the door area until you can lift the first latch line.
(3) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-043-A step 3.
(a) Lock the latches on the aft of the ULD.
(b) Unwind the winch cable until the ULD is in contact with the aft latches.
(4) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-043-A step 4.
(a) Remove the cable from the roller guide.
(b) Attach the cable to the ULD side.
(c) Lock down the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(d) Unlock the latches on the door side of the ULD.
(e) Pull the ULD with the winch out of the cargo compartment and move it onto the
loader.
(5) Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until the complete row of ULD is unloaded.
Page 21
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_055001_1_0330101_01_00
Aircraft Attitude
Aircraft Nose Up
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-033-A01
Page 22
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STEP 1
WINCH
WALKWAY PANELS
ROLLER GUIDE
STEP 2.1
WINCH

STEP 2.2
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0410101_01_00
A/C Nose Up - ULD Side-by-side

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-041-A01
Page 23
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
ROLLER GUIDE
STEP 3
WINCH
STEP 4
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0410102_01_01

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-041-A01
Page 24
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STEP 1
WINCH
ROLLER GUIDE
4
WALKWAY PANELS
STEP 2.1
WINCH
STEP 2.2
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0420101_01_01

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-042-A01
Page 25
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STEP 3
WINCH
STEP 4
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0420102_01_01

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-042-A01
Page 26
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WINCH STEP 1
WALKWAY PANELS
2
ROLLER GUIDE
WINCH STEP 2.1
WINCH STEP 2.2
F_AR_055001_1_0430101_01_01
A/C Nose Up - ULD Single Row

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-043-A01
Page 27
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WINCH STEP 3
WINCH STEP 4
F_AR_055001_1_0430102_01_01
A/C Nose Up - ULD Single Row

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-043-A01
Page 28
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-50-01-000-803-A01
Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading -RH Wing Down
1. General
aircraft is in RH wing down attitude.
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-034-A
2. Inspections
Not Applicable
DESC 05-50-01-005-A01.
Safety Precautions
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-037-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-037-A-A/C RH Wing Down - ULD Single Row
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-035-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-035-A-A/C RH Wing Down - ULD Side-by-side
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-036-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-036-A-A/C RH Wing Down - ULD Side-by-side
TABLE 1
5. Procedure


EQUIPMENT.
Page 29
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 05-50-01-980-005-A01

- Unload the row on the left side of the compartment first.
- Unload the row on the right side of the compartment.
(b) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-035-A, Step 1
loader.
6 Lock the latches in front of the door to guide the ULD.
(c) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-035-A, Step 2
5 Pull the ULD with winch into the door area.
6 Attach the winch cable to the ULD side.
(d) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-035-A, Step 3
2 Unlock latches on the door side of the ULD.
3 Pull ULD with winch out of the cargo compartment onto the loader.
(e) Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the complete row of ULDs is unloaded.
(a) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-036-A, Step 1
Page 30
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

3 Unlock latches in front of the door.
4 Unlock latches on AD position.
5 Lock the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
loader.
(b) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-036-A, Step 2
3 Attach the winch cable to the next ULD.
4 Lock latches at AD position in the door to guide the ULD.
6 Pull the ULD with the winch into the door area.
(c) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-036-A, Step 3
1 Remove the winch cable from the roller guide.
2 Attach the winch cable to the ULD side.
3 Unlock the latches at AD position.
loader.
(d) Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the complete row of ULDs is unloaded.
Subtask 05-50-01-980-006-A01
(1) Step 1.
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-037-A, Step 1
(a) Attach the winch cable to the ULD.
(b) Lock the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
(c) Lock down the anti roll out on the loading bridge.
(d) Unlock latches on the door side of the ULD.
Page 31
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(e) Pull ULD with winch out of the cargo compartment and move it on the loader.
(f) Lift the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(g) Relock the latches in front of the door.
(2) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-037-A, Step 2
(b) Install the roller guide on the seat track next to the barrier wall.
(c) Attach the winch cable to the next ULD.
(d) Lock the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
(e) Unlock the latches at the FWD side of the ULD.
(f) Pull the ULD with winch into the door area.
(3) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-037-A, Step 3
(a) Attach the winch cable on the ULD side.
(b) Lock down the anti roll out on the loading bridge.
(4) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-037-A, Step 4
(a) Unlock latches on the door side of the ULD.
(b) Pull ULD with winch out of the cargo compartment and move it on the loader.
(c) Lift the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(d) Lock the latches in front of the door.
(5) Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until the complete row of ULDs is unloaded.
Page 32
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_055001_1_0340101_01_01
Aircraft Attitude
Aircraft RH Wing Down
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-034-A01
Page 33
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STEP 1
WINCH
WALKWAY
PANEL
ROLLER GUIDE

WINCH STEP 2
STEP 3
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0350101_01_03
A/C RH Wing Down - ULD Side-by-side

LH Row - Steps 1 thru 3
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-035-A01
Page 34
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

STEP 1
WINCH
WALKWAY
PANEL
4
ROLLER GUIDE
STEP 2
WINCH LATCHES AT AD POSITION
STEP 3
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0360101_01_02
A/C RH Wing Down - ULD Side-by-side

RH Row - Steps 1 thru 3
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-036-A01
Page 35
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_055001_1_0370101_01_03
STEP 4
STEP 2
WALKWAY
PANEL
WINCH
WINCH
ROLLER GUIDE
STEP 3
STEP 1
2
1
WINCH
WINCH
A/C RH Wing Down - ULD Single Row

Steps 1 thru 4
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-037-A01
Page 36
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 05-50-01-000-804-A01
Main Deck Cargo Compartment Unloading - LH Wing Down
1. General
aircraft is in LH wing down attitude.
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-038-A
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
DESC 05-50-01-005-A01.
Safety Precautions
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A-A/C LH Wing Down - ULD Single Row
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A-A/C LH Wing Down - ULD Side-by-side
FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A-A/C LH Wing Down - ULD Side-by-side
TABLE 1
5. Procedure

WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT CAUSE ACCIDENTAL MOVEMENT OF A ULD
DURING THE UNLOAD PROCEDURE. USE SUFFICIENT LOADING PERSONNEL
TO DO THE PROCEDURE SAFELY. DO NOT UNLOCK A ULD UNTIL
IMMEDIATELY BEFORE YOU UNLOAD IT. ACCIDENTAL MOVEMENT OF A ULD
CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
Page 37
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 05-50-01-980-007-A01

- Unload the row on the left side of the compartment first.
- Unload the row on the right side of the compartment.
(a) Do the preparation steps and obey the safety precautions in DESC 05-50-01-005-A01
.
(b) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A, Step 1
4 Pull rope to relieve latches.
5 Unlock latches on the door side of the ULD.
(c) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A, Step 2
2 Unwind the winch cable to move the ULD out of the cargo compartment onto
the loader.
(d) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A, Step 3
2 Lock the latches on AD to guide the ULD.
3 Attach the cable to the ULD.
5 Pull the ULD with the winch in the door area.
(e) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A, Step 4
2 Pull cable to relieve latches.
3 Unlock the latches in front of the door.
Page 38
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

(f) Step 5
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-039-A, Step 5
the loader.
(g) Repeat steps 3 thru 5 until the complete row of ULDs is unloaded.
(a) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A, Step 1
1 Remove the walkway panel.
3 Install the winch cable along the ULD to the floor grid.
4 Pull rope to relieve latches on AD position.
(b) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A Step 2
the loader.
(c) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A, Step 3
2 Lock the latches in the door area to guide the ULD.
3 Lock the latches on AD to guide the ULD.
4 Attach the cable to the ULD.
6 Pull the ULD with the winch in the door area.
(d) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A, Step 4
2 Pull rope to relieve latches.
3 Unlock latches at AD at the ULD side.
Page 39
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(e) Step 5
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-040-A, Step 5
the loader.
(f) Repeat steps 3 thru 5 until the complete row of ULDs is unloaded.
Subtask 05-50-01-980-009-A01
(1) Step 1
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A, Step 1
(b) Install the roller guide on the seat track next to the barrier wall.
(c) Attach the winch cable along the ULD to the floor grid.
(d) Pull rope to release latches.
(e) Unlock latches on the door side of the ULD.
(2) Step 2
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A, Step 2
(a) Lower the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(b) Unwind the winch cable to move the ULD out of the cargo compartment onto the
loader.
(c) Lift the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(3) Step 3
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A, Step 3
(a) Lock the latches from the ULD row in the door area to guide the next ULDs..
(b) Attach the cable to the ULD.
(c) Unlock the latches at the FWD side of the ULD.
(4) Step 4
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A, Step 4
(a) Pull the ULD with the winch in the door area..
(5) Step 5
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A, Step 5
(a) Attach the winch cable along the ULD to the floor grid.
(b) Pull rope to release latches.
(c) Unlock latches on the door side of the ULD.
Page 40
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(6) Step 6
See FIGURE 05-50-01-991-044-A, Step 6
(a) Lower the anti roll outs on the loading bridge.
(b) Unwind the winch cable to move the ULD out of the cargo compartment onto the
loader.
(7) Repeat steps 3 thru 6 until the complete row of ULD is unloaded.
Page 41
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_055001_1_0380101_01_01
Aircraft Attitude
Aircraft LH Wing Down
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-038-A01
Page 42
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
ROLLER GUIDE
1
WALKWAY PANEL STEP 1
WINCH
STEP 2
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0390101_01_00
A/C LH Wing Down - ULD Side-by-side

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-039-A01
Page 43
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
LATCHES IN AD POSITION TO GUIDE THE ULD

STEP 3
WINCH
STEP 4
WINCH
STEP 5
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0390103_01_03

LH Row - Step 3 thru 5 (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-039-A01
Page 44
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WALKWAY PANEL
ROLLER GUIDE
STEP 1
WINCH
STEP 2
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0400101_01_01

FIGURE-05-50-01-991-040-A01
Page 45
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
STEP 3
WINCH
STEP 4
WINCH
STEP 5
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0400102_01_01

RH Row - Step 3 thru 5 (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-040-A01
Page 46
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WALKWAY PANEL
ROLLER GUIDE
STEP 1
WINCH
STEP 2
WINCH
STEP 3
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0440101_01_01
A/C LH Wing Down - ULD Single Row

Step 1 thru 3 (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-044-A01
Page 47
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WALKWAY PANEL
STEP 4
WINCH
STEP 5
WINCH
STEP 6
WINCH
F_AR_055001_1_0440102_01_02
A/C LH Wing Down - ULD Single Row

Step 4 thru 6 (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-05-50-01-991-044-A01
Page 48
05-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
05-60 REMOVAL OF LARGE COMPONENTS
05-60-00 REMOVAL OF LARGE COMPONENTS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 05-60-00-001-A01
General
1. Large aircraft components are not usually removed during a recovery operation.
WARNING : YOU MUST CONTACT AIRBUS BEFORE YOU MANUALLY OPERATE A SYSTEM
OR REMOVE A COMPONENT WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS IN AN ABNORMAL
ATTITUDE OR DISABLED. THE AMM PROCEDURES ARE APPLICABLE ON AN
AIRCRAFT IN A LEVEL CONFIGURATION ONLY.
Removal can be necessary when:
- Damaged components such as flap sections, ailerons, elevators, etc. are not safely attached,
- It is necessary to decrease the weight and/or to control CG,
- The runway or the airport was closed because of the accident. In this case, it is necessary to
remove the vertical stabilizer. This is an unusual event which can occur only if the runway or
airport would be closed for a long time,
- You used escape slides during evacuation. After the evacuation, it is necessary to carefully
disconnect and remove the escape slides,
- Landing gear and/or other components are broken.
Page 1
05-60-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
LEVELING AND LIFTING
06-00 LEVELING AND LIFTING
06-00-00 LEVELING AND LIFTING
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-00-00-001-A01
General
1. Leveling and Lifting Families
There are 5 basic leveling families (see 06-60-00).
2. Aircraft Pitch and Roll Angles
Before you start the recovery, it is possible to find the aircraft pitch and roll angles when no electrical
power is available.
The items of equipment that you can use are:
- An attitude monitor, located in the belly fairing.
- A spirit level, a clinometer or similar device located on the forward cargo-compartment floor
beams or on the cabin floor seat tracks.
It is possible to use the same equipment to find when the aircraft is leveled.
3. Leveling/Lifting of the Aircraft
There are three general methods to level/lift the aircraft. They are given in the chapters that follow:
- Use of Jacks (see 06-30-00),
- Use of Pneumatic Lifting Bags (see 06-40-00),
- Use of Cranes (see 06-50-00),
- Step by step combination: use of one method and then another one.
A. The leveling/lifting items of equipment are:
- Jacks,
- Pneumatic lifting bags,
- Cranes and slings.
It is possible to use one of these items of equipment alone or more than one in any step-by-step
combination.
B. The procedures in the chapters above describe how to level/lift the aircraft to a height at which
the fuselage datum is 6500 mm (255.9 in) above the ground. This is the height necessary:
- To put the aircraft in a hangar or on maintenance jacks,
- To make the extension of the landing gear possible,
- To put the aircraft, or part of it, on a mobile device.
However, to replace a landing gear, the necessary height of the fuselage datum is 7200 mm
(283.46 in) above the ground.
Page 1
06-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
C. The aircraft can be in such an attitude that it is necessary to do the leveling operation before
the lifting operation.
In this case, you must keep the aircraft in a level attitude during the lifting phase.
NOTE : As each aircraft recovery situation is different, you must analyze the conditions and
available equipment before you decide which leveling or lifting procedure you will use.
Page 2
06-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-00-00-002-A01
Leveling/Lifting Obstructions
1. It may be necessary to remove the items that follow to make the leveling /lifting operation easier.
NOTE : The list is not exhaustive. The optional items of equipment can change as they are related
to the customer configuration.
Name Zone IPC AMM
Drain Mast Z130 See IPC 30-71-02 See AMM
30-71-51-000-801
DME 1 & 2 Z130 See IPC 34-51-02 See AMM
34-51-11-000-801
VHF Antenna Z230 See IPC 23-12-02 See AMM
23-12-11-000-801
Marker Antenna Z130 See IPC 34-55-02 See AMM
34-55-18-000-802
ATC 1 & 2 Z130- See IPC 34-52-02 See AMM
Z230 34-52-11-000-801
Outflow Valve Z130 See IPC 21-31-02 See AMM
21-31-51-000-801
FWD Fuselage
TABLE 1
Name Zone IPC AMM

Drain Mast Z150 See IPC 30-71-04 See AMM
30-71-51-000-801
Radio Altimeter Z150 See IPC 34-42-04 See AMM
34-42-11-000-801
VHF Antenna Z150- See IPC 23-12-04 See AMM
Z260 23-12-11-000-801
Outflow Valve Z150 See IPC 21-31-04 See AMM
21-31-51-000-801
Aft Fuselage
TABLE 2
Page 3
06-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
OUTFLOW VALVE
ATC
VHF 1 TOP 1−2
FR21 FR37.2
MARKER
DME 2
ATC DRAIN MAST
BOTTOM 1−2 DME 1
F_AR_060000_1_0010201_01_03
Antennas Location
FWD Fuselage (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-00-00-991-001-B01
Page 4
06-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
OUTFLOW VALVE
VHF 3
FR53.9 FR63
VHF 2
RADIO ALTIMETER 2
DRAIN MAST ANTENNAS
RADIO ALTIMETER 1
ANTENNAS
F_AR_060000_1_0010202_01_02
Antennas Location
Aft Fuselage (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-06-00-00-991-001-B01
Page 5
06-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
06-10 LOAD DETERMINATION
06-10-00 LOAD DETERMINATION
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01
Vertical Loads Determination
1. General
This section gives data about the vertical loads related to aircraft leveling/lifting during the recovery
operation and about the way to calculate them.
aircraft recovery.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
A. General
The theoretical calculations that follow help to find the loads necessary for leveling/lifting. They
also help to:
- Make sure the aircraft is stable,
- Do a selection of applicable methods of leveling/lifting,
- Do a check of the local structural capability of the aircraft to prevent secondary damage,
- Make sure the recovery procedure is applicable to the related weight condition of the
aircraft.
The simplified calculations are related to the assumptions that follow:
- The aircraft structure is considered as rigid. The calculations do not take into account the
flexibility in the aircraft structure,
- The leveling/lifting is done at 3 points (isostatic conditions),
- The calculation take into account only the vertical loads,
- You do the leveling/lifting operations on solid ground conditions and the slings are without
elongation,
- The calculation do not take into account the effects of wind and temperature.
B. Location of the 3 lifting points on the aircraft X and Y reference axes
See FIGURE 06-10-00-991-001-A.
- For jacks: X and Y position of the jacking points,
- For pneumatic lifting bags: X and Y positions of the center of the contact area,
- For slings: X position of the crane/sling lifting plane.
Page 1
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
NOTE : During the leveling/lifting procedure, it can be necessary to use only one lifting point.
The aircraft will then pivot around a fixed point such as a main landing gear. For
example, with the nose landing gear collapsed, there is only one lifting point and the
aircraft will pivot around main landing gears.
03-00-00 03-00-00-WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-001-A FIGURE 06-10-00-991-001-A-Load Determination
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-002-A FIGURE 06-10-00-991-002-A-Load Determination
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 06-10-00-970-001-A01
A. Load Calculation
NOTE : Principle for the calculation of the loads at the recovery leveling/lifting points.
(1) Find the 3 leveling/lifting points and related X and Y values, applicable to the attitude of
the aircraft and the related scenario (see 06-60-00).
(2) Find the values of the NRW, XG and YG (X and Y coordinates of aircraft CG position)
calculated for your aircraft condition (see 03-00-00).
(3) Record these values in the load calculation worksheet (see FIGURE 06-10-00-991-002-A)
and calculate the necessary intermediate values.
(4) Use the results of the load calculation worksheet (see FIGURE 06-10-00-991-002-A) to find
the values of the vertical loads (Fz) at the 3 leveling/lifting points.
Fz1 = NRW × ((YG - Y2)(X2 - X3) - (XG - X2)(Y2 - Y3)) / ((X1 - X2)(Y2 - Y3) - (Y1 -
Y2)(X2 - X3))
Fz1 =
Y3)(X3 - X1))
Fz2 =
Y1)(X1 - X2))
Fz3 =
Page 2
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 06-10-00-869-001-A01
B. Load Distribution Compared to Allowable Loads
(1) For jacks: You must compare the vertical load directly with the allowable load.
(2) For pneumatic lifting bags:
Use the formula that follows to calculate the pressure of the pneumatic lifting bag:
p = Fz / (L × W)
L = length and W = width of the pneumatic lifting bag.
This pressure must be less than or equal to:
- The maximum pressure of the pneumatic lifting bag,
- The maximum allowable pressure that the pneumatic lifting bag can apply to the
aircraft structure.
(3) For slings:
Use the formula that follows to calculate the load on each sling:
f = Fz / N
N = number of slings.
This load must be less than or equal to the aircraft maximum allowable load at the related
frame.
NOTE : If loads at leveling/lifting points are not in the allowable values, it is necessary to
make new calculations for the recovery configuration, with:
- A modified weight and balance,
- A change in the recovery means arrangements,
- The use of other applicable recovery methods,
- Or any combinations of these modifications.
Page 3
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
X3
6382 mm
(251.26 in.)
Y3
Y2 = 0 +X
CL
Y1
X2
X1
−Y
NOTE:
LIFTING POINT
F_AR_061000_1_0010101_01_01
Load Determination
Location of the 3 Lifting Points
FIGURE-06-10-00-991-001-A01
Page 4
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
SEE 03−00−00 NET RECOVERABLE XG YG

WEIGHT
LEVELING/LIFTING POINT 1 X1 Y1
SEE 06−00−00
SEE 06−00−00
SEE 06−00−00
INTERMEDIATE X1−X2 X2−X3 X3−X1

CALCULATIONS
XG−X1 XG−X2 XG−X3
Y1−Y2 Y2−Y3 Y3−Y1
YG−Y1 YG−Y2 YG−Y3
F_AR_061000_1_0020101_01_00
Load Determination
Load Calculation Worksheet
FIGURE-06-10-00-991-002-A01
Page 5
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 06-10-00-970-802-A01
Side loads on Jack Fittings
1. General
This section gives data about the side loads on jack fittings related to the aircraft leveling/lifting
phase during the recovery operation and about the way to calculate them.
When you level the aircraft from an unusual attitude, an arc movement (horizontal translation) of the
jacking point is related to the displacement.
If you use a special recovery jack, the jack head can move along the arc movement. Thus, there are
no related side loads applied on the jacking point.
If you use a jack that cannot move along the arc movement, the jack will apply side loads to the
aircraft structure. If these side loads are more than the allowable loads, they will cause damage to the
aircraft structure. It is necessary to calculate the side loads for each leveling/lifting scenario.
aircraft recovery.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01 TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01-Vertical Loads Determination
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
CAUTION : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE A JACK THAT CANNOT MOVE ALONG THE
ARC MOVEMENT. THE JACK WILL APPLY SIDE LOADS TO THE AIRCRAFT
STRUCTURE. IF THESE LOADS ARE MORE THAN THE ALLOWABLE LOADS,
THEY WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE STRUCTURE.
Subtask 06-10-00-970-002-A01
A. Load Calculation
(1) Find the aircraft recovery configuration and a leveling/lifting method.
Page 6
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) Measure the aircraft pitch (β) and lateral (α) angles with one of the tools or the method
that follow:
- An attitude monitor (clinometer), in the right wing landing gear bay,
- A spirit level, a clinometer or equivalent device that can be used on the forward cargo-
compartment floor beams or on the cabin floor seat tracks,
- The aircraft geometry and characteristic points.
See 06-60-00 to find the applicable recovery scenario and the related typical aircraft
possible angles.
NOTE : The typical angles are given as an example. For all scenarios, you must measure
the aircraft pitch and lateral angles for each recovery operation before you start
any leveling/lifting procedure. The actual angles are related to the weight and
CG configuration of the recovery aircraft.
(3) Calculate the NRW and CG position (see 03-00-00) and calculate the vertical loads (Fz)
(see TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01) at the leveling/lifting point.
(4) Calculate the Fx side load (component on the X axis).
Fx = tan β × Fz
(5) Calculate the Fy side load (component on the Y axis).
Fy = tan α × Fz
(6) Calculate the resultant (R) of Fx and Fy:
R = √(Fx2 + Fy2)
(7) Make sure the resultant R is less than the maximum allowable side load. If the side load is
not less than or equal to the maximum allowable load, you must reduce the applied vertical
load until the resultant side load is less than the allowable side load. To reduce the applied
vertical load, you can reduce the weight of the aircraft.
Page 7
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 06-10-00-970-803-A01
Arc Movement Calculation
1. General
This section gives data about the arc movement of the leveling/lifting point related to the aircraft
leveling/lifting during the recovery operation and about the way to calculate it.
aircraft recovery.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
When you level the aircraft, it will rotate around a fixed pivot point on the ground and this will cause
movement along the X or Y axis. This movement is called Arc Movement.
You must control this movement during all the recovery procedure.
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-003-A FIGURE 06-10-00-991-003-A-Arc Movement Calculation
FIGURE 06-10-00-991-004-B FIGURE 06-10-00-991-004-B-Arc Movement Calculation
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 06-10-00-970-003-A01
A. Arc Movement Calculation at Fuselage Leveling/Lifting Points
(1) Measurement at Aircraft Basic Position
See FIGURE 06-10-00-991-003-A.
You must make the measurements at the points that follow:
- Fixed pivot point: the point around which the aircraft will rotate (X axis).
- Fuselage/ground contact point: the contact point between the fuselage and the
ground. This point must be lifted to a level attitude (X axis).
- Leveling/Lifting point: the point where you apply the loads and where you calculate the
arc movement (X axis).
- Characteristic point: a point on the lower part of fuselage that you will use for angle
calculation (both X and Z axes).
Page 8
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) Arc Movement Calculation

(a) Calculate the angle:
tan β = dz / dx
Where:
dx is the distance from the fuselage ground contact point to the characteristic point
on the lower part of the fuselage.
dz is the height from the ground to the characteristic point.
(b) Calculate the arc movement.
∆X = (L - L’) - √((L - L’)2 + tan2 β × (L’2 - L2))
Where:
∆X is the arc movement.
L is the distance from the fuselage ground contact point to the fixed pivot point (for
example: main landing gear).
L’ is the distance from the fuselage ground contact point to the leveling/lifting point.
Subtask 06-10-00-970-004-A01
B. Arc Movement Calculation at Wing Leveling/Lifting Points
(1) Measurement at Aircraft Basic Position
See FIGURE 06-10-00-991-004-B.
You must make the measurements at the points that follow:
- Fixed pivot point: the point around which the aircraft will rotate (Y axis).
- Wing/ground contact point on the lower wing: the contact point between the wing and
the ground. This point must be lifted to a level attitude (Y axis).
- Leveling/Lifting point: the point were you apply the loads and where you calculate the
arc movement (Y axis).
- Characteristic point: a point on the lower part of the inboard engine nacelle on the
high wing that you use for angle calculation (the two Y and Z axes).
(2) Arc Movement Calculation
(a) Calculate the angle.
tan α = dz / dy
Where:
dy is the distance from the wing ground contact point (lower wing) to the
characteristic point on the lower part of the inboard engine nacelle on the higher
wing.
dz is the height from the ground to the characteristic point.
(b) Calculate the arc movement.
∆Y = (L - L’) - √((L - L’)2 + tan2 α × (L’2 - L2))
Where:
∆Y is the arc movement.
L is the distance from the wing ground contact point to the fixed pivot point (for
example: main landing gear).
Page 9
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
L’ is the distance from the wing ground contact point to the leveling/lifting point.
Page 10
06-10-00 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHARACTERISTIC POINT
ON FUSELAGE FOR
FUSELAGE/GROUND ANGLE CALCULATION
CONTACT POINT
FIXED PIVOT POINT
MAIN LANDING GEAR
LIFTING POINT

@A330-200F
Fuselage Leveling/Lifting Point

FIGURE-06-10-00-991-003-A01
H dz
L’
06-10-00
L
dx
F_AR_061000_1_0030101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 11
**ON A/C A330-200F
FIXED PIVOT POINT

MAIN LANDING GEAR
LIFTING POINT

Wing Leveling/Lifting Point
dz
@A330-200F
FIGURE-06-10-00-991-004-B01
L’
dy
06-10-00
CHARACTERISTIC POINT ON
OPPOSITE WING INBOARD NACELLE INBOARD NACELLE/GROUND
FOR ANGLE CALCULATION CONTACT POINT
F_AR_061000_1_0040201_01_01
Oct 01/11
Page 12
@A330-200F
06-30 USE OF JACKS
06-30-00 USE OF JACKS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-30-00-001-A01
General
1. General Type of Jacks
CAUTION : YOU CAN USE ALL COMBINATIONS OF THE JACKING POINTS (ONE OR
MORE) TO LEVEL/LIFT THE AIRCRAFT. THE JACK LOADS AT EACH JACKING
POINT MUST NOT BE MORE THAN THE ALLOWABLE LOADS (VERTICAL (FZ)
AND HORIZONTAL (FH).
CAUTION : WHEN YOU LEVEL/LIFT THE AIRCRAFT, YOU MUST CONTINUOUSLY

MONITOR AND RECORD THE LOADS AND MAKE SURE THAT THE LOADS
YOU APPLY ARE NOT MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOADS. IF
THE LOADS ARE MORE THAN THE ALLOWABLE LOADS, THIS CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE.
aircraft recovery.
There are three general types of jacks:
A. Special Aircraft Recovery Jacks
This type of jack can move along the arc movement in the specified limits.
The jack manufacturer instructions must be obeyed.
There are two primary types of aircraft recovery jacks: hydraulic and low profile multi-stage
jacks:
- Monopole design:
This is a multi stage single ram attached to a large base plate. The jacking head can move
along the arc movement in the specified limits.
- Tripod design:
This type of jack is almost the same as a hanger or maintenance tripod jack. The difference
is that it is possible to operate and control each multi-stage leg independently. Pressure
gauges are installed on each leg to monitor loads independently. The operator can make
sure the jack head moves in a limited arc. It is possible to operate the jack manually with a
lever or control it from a powered console.
B. Standard Maintenance Tripod Jacks
This type of jack can only do a very limited arc movement. We recommend you do not use a
standard maintenance jack for recovery operations. When you use a standard maintenance jack,
it is necessary to do the lifting operation in small steps and reposition the jack between each
step.
Page 1
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
C. Bottle or Wheel Jacks

They can be used for initial leveling or lifting in constricted areas. They have the same limit as
the standard maintenance tripod jacks.
2. Location of Primary Jacking Points
There are three primary jacking points on the aircraft (See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-006-A):
- One under the left wing, at RIB 10,
- One under the right wing, at RIB 10,
- One on the lower fuselage, behind the nose landing gear doors, at FR10A.
3. Location of Auxiliary Jacking Points
An auxiliary jacking point for a safety stay is located on the lower aft fuselage, at FR87 (See FIGURE
06-30-00-991-006-A).
A jack must be installed in this position only once the aircraft is level. This point must be used to
make the aircraft stable only.
4. Location of FR17 Jacking Point
Jacks can also be used to level/lift the forward fuselage with fittings attached to FR17.
See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-007-A and 04-30-00 for jacking pad fitting FR17 location.
5. Maximum Loads on the Primary Jacking Point
See 06-10-00 to determine the loads related to the aircraft attitude, to select the leveling/lifting
procedure.
Fz is the load applied in the vertical direction.
Fh is the load applied in all horizontal directions.
NOTE : The maximum aircraft jacking weight is 136 000 kg (299 829 lb).
Airbus recommends that you use load cells and lifting devices with side load measuring equipment
that can accurately record and report the jacking point side loads.
Longitudinal or lateral load must not be more than 0.33 safe load at the jacking point.
Jacking Point Fz (daN) Fz (lbf) Fh (daN) Fh (lbf)
RH Wing 65 389 147 000 21 578 48 510
LH Wing 65 389 147 000 21 578 48 510
Nose 11 246 25 282 3 711 8 343
Allowable Loads on Primary Jacking Points
TABLE 1
6. Maximum Loads on the Safety Stay at FR87
CAUTION : YOU MUST NOT USE THE SAFETY STAY TO LEVEL OR LIFT THE AIRCRAFT.
See 06-10-00 to calculate the loads related to the aircraft attitude and to find the applicable
leveling/lifting procedure.
Page 2
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Jacking Point Fz (daN) Fz (lbf) Fh (daN) Fh (lbf)

Safety Stay 4 500 10 116 1 485 3 338
Allowable Loads on the Safety Stay
TABLE 2
7. Maximum Loads on the Jacking Pad Fittings at FR17

See 06-10-00 to calculate the loads related to the aircraft attitude to select the applicable
leveling/lifting procedure.
See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-007-A to determine the maximum aircraft weight and associated CG.
Page 3
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
51.537 m
(169.08 ft)
28.353 m
(93.02 ft)
3.575 m
(11.73 ft)
NOSE SAFETY
JACKING POINT 8.511 m STAY
(27.92 ft)
WING JACKING POINT
F_AR_063000_1_0060101_01_01
Jacking Points
Location
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-006-A01
Page 4
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
2747 mm
108.15 in
A A
4600 mm
181.10 in
2100 mm
82.68 in
A
LH SHOWN
RH SYMMETRICAL
F_AR_063000_1_0070101_01_00
Jack Pad Fittings at FR17

Location (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-007-A01
Page 5
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F daN (lbf)
25 000 (56 202)
C.G. %MAC
20 000 (44 962)

15%
C.G
20%
C.G
25%
15 000 (33 721) C.G
30%
C.G
MAXIMUM WEIGHT FOR LIFTING BY 2 JACK PAD FITTINGS

10 000 (22 481)
5%
C.G 3
C.G 40%
5 000 (11 240)

C.G 45%
AIRCRAFT
WEIGHT
(1000 lb)
1000 kg
(265) (287) (309) (331) (353) (375) (397) (419) (441) (463)
0
120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
F_AR_063000_1_0070102_01_00
Jack Pad Fittings at FR17

Maximum Allowable Loads (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-007-A01
Page 6
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01
Jacking
1. General
This section gives the data related to the aircraft jacking for leveling or lifting.
NOTE : If you use jacks to level or lift the aircraft, you must put them in position on a satisfactory
base. The surface must be flat and the jack must be plumb in place.
2. Inspections
Do an inspection of the area of each jacking point that you will use. Make sure there is no damage
and that each jacking point is serviceable.
For jacking point locations and for the permitted loads, see DESC 06-30-00-001-A01.
For general data on jack adaptors, see FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A.
For installation of NLG Belly Fairing protections, see TBD.
For Specific Jack-Nose Dimensions, see FIGURE 06-30-00-991-010-A.
NOTE : At the forward jacking point, specific jack dimensions are necessary for this aircraft:
- maximum jack tube diameter 320 mm (12.6 in)
- maximum threaded rod diameter 160 mm (6.3 in)
- minimum threaded rod length 250 mm (9.8 in)
98F07203016000 NLG BELLY FAIRING PROTECTION
98F07103500001 ADAPTOR-JACK NOSE
98F07104000002 PAD-JACKING, SET-WING
TABLE 1
DESC 06-30-00-001-A01 DESC 06-30-00-001-A01-General
AMM 53-15-13-000-802
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A-Installation of Jack Adaptors
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-010-A FIGURE 06-30-00-991-010-A-Selection of Jacks
Page 7
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-014-A FIGURE 06-30-00-991-014-A-Selection of Jacks
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
RECOVERY PROCESS.
CAUTION : YOU MUST NOT USE THE SAFETY STAY TO LEVEL OR LIFT THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION : BEFORE YOU LIFT OR YOU LOWER THE AIRCRAFT MAKE SURE THAT
THERE IS NO EQUIPMENT ADJACENT TO IT THAT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE.
MAKE SURE THAT NO OTHER WORK IS BEING DONE.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE JACK YOU USE IS APPLICABLE FOR THIS AIRCRAFT.
IF THE JACK DIMENSIONS ARE NOT IN THE RANGE FOR THIS AIRCRAFT,
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE CAN OCCUR.
NOTE : The information or principles contained in this chapter are given as a guide to assist an
aircraft recovery.
Subtask 06-30-00-581-013-A01
A. Get Access
(1) Put the adjustable access platform (3 m (10 ft)) in position under forward fuselage at
FR10A.
(2) Remove the nose fairing panel 125AL, see AMM 53-15-13-000-802.
(3) Install the 98F07203016000 NLG BELLY FAIRING PROTECTION in position on the
karman structure, see FIGURE 06-30-00-991-014-A.
(4) Put the adjustable access platform (3 m (10 ft)) in position under the wings at RIB10.
(5) Put the adjustable access platform (8 m (26 ft)) in position under rear fuselage (safety
stay).
Page 8
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 06-30-00-581-014-A01
B. Installation of the jack adaptors
(1) At the FWD jacking point:
See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A.
(a) Examine the 98F07103500001 ADAPTOR-JACK NOSE (1) and make sure that there
is no damage.
WARNING : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS,

SEALANTS AND OTHER MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL REGULATIONS.
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE
WORK AREA. DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. DO NOT SMOKE. DO
NOT USE THESE MATERIALS NEAR A FLAME, SPARKS OR SOURCES
OF HEAT. USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES. IF
YOU GET ONE OF THESE MATERIALS ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR
EYES, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH A FLOW OF CLEAN WATER. IF YOU
GET ONE OF THESE MATERIALS IN YOUR MOUTH, GET IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL AID. IN GENERAL, THESE MATERIALS ARE POISONOUS,
FLAMMABLE AND SKIN IRRITANTS.
(b) Apply Material No. 04-004 on the 98F07103500001 ADAPTOR-JACK NOSE.
(c) Install the 98F07103500001 ADAPTOR-JACK NOSE at the FWD jacking point.
(2) At the wing Jacking Points
See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A.
(a) Remove the blanking plugs from the wing jack point at RIB10.
(b) Put the 98F07104000002 PAD-JACKING, SET-WING (2) in position under the wing
and install the bolt (3). Do not tighten it at this step.
(c) Install the bolts (4). Do not tighten it at this step.
(d) Tighten the bolt (3), then tighten the bolts (4).
(3) At the Auxiliary Jacking Point
See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A.
(a) Remove the jack pad fairing (5) at FR87.
Subtask 06-30-00-581-015-A01
C. Removal of the Jack Adaptors
(1) At the FWD jacking point:
See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A.
(a) Remove the 98F07103500001 ADAPTOR-JACK NOSE (1) from the FWD jacking
point.
Page 9
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) At the wing jacking points

See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A.
(a) Remove the 98F07104000002 PAD-JACKING, SET-WING (2) from the wing jacking
point.
(b) Remove the bolts (4), then remove the bolt (3).
(c) Install the blanking plugs on the wing.
(3) At the Auxiliary Jacking Point
See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-011-A.
(a) Install the jack pad fairing (5).
Page 10
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR11
FR10A
THREADED ROD
EXTENSION
H MIN 250 mm
(9.85 in)
Ø MAX 160 mm
(6.3 in)
SPECIFIC JACK DIMENSIONS ARE NECESSARY FOR THIS AIRCRAFT

Ø MAX 320 mm !
(12.6 in) !
!
CAUTION: RISK OF DAMAGE

A
CAUTION:
MAKE SURE THAT THE JACK YOU USE IS APPLICABLE FOR THIS AIRCRAFT.
IF THE JACK DIMENSIONS ARE NOT IN THE RANGE FOR THIS
AIRCRAFT, DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE CAN OCCUR.
F_AR_063000_1_0100101_01_02
Selection of Jacks
Maximum Jack-Nose Dimension
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-010-A01
Page 11
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_063000_1_0140101_01_00
B
C
NLG BELLY FAIRING
PROTECTION
C
B
FR11
FR10A
Selection of Jacks
Installation of the Nose-Fairing Protection
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-014-A01
Page 12
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR10A
B RIB10
FR87
A
1
B RIB10
2 C
01 A
FR87
4
02 B
LH SHOWN 4
RH SYMMETRICAL 5
NOTE:
01 FOR DETAILS, SEE SHEET 2
02 FOR DETAILS, SEE SHEET 3
03 FOR DETAILS, SEE SHEET 4 03 C
F_AR_063000_1_0110101_01_01
Installation of Jack Adaptors

General (Sheet 1 of 4)
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-011-A01
Page 13
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR10A
ADAPTOR−JACK NOSE
98F07103500001
R 19 mm
(0.75 in)
ADAPTOR−LOAD CELL
98A07003906200
LOAD CELL
343A250KN2
ADAPTOR
98A07003907202
JACK
NOTE: INSTALLATION LAYOUT IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY.

FOR INSTALLATION ATTACHMENT ANGLES, SEE ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS.
F_AR_063000_1_0110102_01_00

Forward Jacking Point (Sheet 2 of 4)
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-011-A01
Page 14
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
RIB10
JACKING PAD SET− WING OUTER SKIN

98F07104000002
R 32 mm
(1.26 in)
ADAPTOR
98A07003912200
LOAD CELL
343A1MN3
ADAPTOR
98A07003907201
JACK
F_AR_063000_1_0110103_01_00

Wing Jacking Point (Sheet 3 of 4)
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-011-A01
Page 15
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR87
R 19 mm
(0.75 in)
ADAPTOR
98A07003906200
LOAD CELL
343A63KN2
ADAPTOR
98A07003907200
SAFETY JACK
F_AR_063000_1_0110104_01_01

Auxiliary Jacking Point - Safety Stay (Sheet 4 of 4)
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-011-A01
Page 16
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 06-30-00-581-801-A01
General Preparation and Instructions for Leveling and Lifting the Aircraft with Jacks
1. General
This section gives the data related to the use of jacks to level and lift the aircraft: allowable loads,
general preparation and instructions.
NOTE : If you use jacks to level or lift the aircraft, you must put them in position on a satisfactory
base. The surface must be flat and the jack must be plumb in place.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
A. Aircraft Jacking Stability
When you use jacks to level or lift the aircraft, you must put them in position on a satisfactory
base. The surface must be flat and the jack must be plumb when it is in position. The load
bearing capacity of the soil must support the loads applied at the jack footprint.
You can use plywood sheets with steel plates on top to make the ground more rigid. In some
conditions, it can be necessary to excavate and prepare a base of coarse gravel before you place
the plywood sheets and steel plates.
TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01 TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01-Jacking
TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01 TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01-Vertical Loads Determination
TASK 06-10-00-970-803-A01 TASK 06-10-00-970-803-A01-Arc Movement Calculation
TASK 06-10-00-970-802-A01 TASK 06-10-00-970-802-A01-Side loads on Jack Fittings
Determination
TASK 02-20-02-285-801-A01 TASK 02-20-02-285-801-A01-Initial Site Survey
DESC 06-30-00-001-A01 DESC 06-30-00-001-A01-General
05-50-01 05-50-01-CARGO REMOVAL
05-60-00 05-60-00-REMOVAL OF LARGE COMPONENTS
02-30-01 02-30-01-LANDING GEAR
AMM 07-11-00-581-801
AMM 07-11-00-480-051
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-008-A FIGURE 06-30-00-991-008-A-Aircraft on Jacks
Page 17
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
FIGURE 06-30-00-991-008-A FIGURE 06-30-00-991-008-A-Aircraft on Jacks
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE LOADS APPLIED AT EACH JACKING POINT ARE NOT
MORE THAN THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOADS.

CAUTION : IF THE LOADS APPLIED DURING THE RECOVERY PROCEDURE ARE MORE
THAN THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOADS, YOU MUST CONTACT AIRBUS
FOR SPECIFIC INSPECTIONS.
CAUTION : YOU MUST CORRECTLY TETHER THE AIRCRAFT BEFORE YOU LEVEL OR
LIFT IT.
NOTE : The information or principles contained in this chapter are given as a guide to assist an
aircraft recovery.
Subtask 06-30-00-581-005-A01
A. Jacking Preparation
(1) General
See TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01 for data about the installation of a jack adaptor.
The maximum jacking weight is 136 000 kg (299 829 lb).
When you lift the aircraft with three jacks, the weight of the aircraft must not be more
than the maximum jacking weight. The maximum jacking weight is not applicable for
leveling with one or two jacks but the load on each jack must not be more than the
maximum allowable loads.
When you lift the aircraft with jacks, it is necessary to monitor the loads at the related
jacking points.
Page 18
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
You must also make sure that the wind speed is not more than the maximum allowable
speed. See FIGURE 06-30-00-991-008-A.
(2) Jacking Data
The table below gives jacking data for each jacking point:
- Aircraft level: height necessary to bring the aircraft to a level attitude.
- Arc Movement: longitudinal movement of the jacking point during the jacking
operation.
- Aircraft Jacked, FDL = 6.500 m (21.33 ft): height necessary to extend the landing
gears.
- Aircraft Jacked, FDL = 7.200 m (23.62 ft): height necessary to replace a landing gear.
Leveling Lifting
Aircraft Jacked Aircraft Jacked
Arc Movement
Aircraft level FDL = 6.500 m FDL = 7.200 m
(Depending on attitude)
(21.33 ft) (23.62 ft)
FWD Jacking 3.038 m 4.373 m 5.073 m
Point (9.97 ft) See applicable scenario in (14.35 ft) (16.64 ft)
RH/LH Wing 4.423 m 06-60-00 5.578 m 6.278 m
Jacking Point (14.51 ft) (18.30 ft) (20.60 ft)
5.389 m 6.375 m 7.075 m
Safety Stay -
(17.68 ft) (20.92 ft) (23.21 ft)
Jacking Data
TABLE 2
Subtask 06-30-00-581-002-A01
B. General
NOTE : Before you start to level or lift the aircraft with jacks, you must make sure that the
personnel know the instructions and conditions below and that they obey these
instructions and conditions.
(1) Do not level or lift the aircraft with jack(s) in gusty wind conditions.
(2) Do not lift the aircraft with jacks during steady wind conditions.
(3) Find the maximum allowable wind speed related to your aircraft configuration. See FIGURE
06-30-00-991-008-A.
(4) Correctly tether the aircraft before leveling or lifting with jacks. This is to prevent aircraft
movement that you cannot control during the leveling or lifting operation. See 04-30-00.
(5) Read the manufacturer instructions related to the special jack(s) used.
(6) Only the personnel who knows the operation of jacks and aircraft jacking procedures are in
charge of the jacking operation.
Page 19
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(7) Confirm the NRW and CG position. See 03-50-01.

(8) Calculate the anticipated vertical load on each jacking point to be used to make sure this
load is not more than the maximum allowable load. (See TASK 06-10-00-970-801-A01 and
DESC 06-30-00-001-A01)
If the necessary load on the jacking point is more than the allowable load for that jacking
point, reduce the aircraft weight until the lifting load is less than the allowable load or
make a selection of different leveling or lifting procedure.
(9) Make sure each available jack can support the necessary load (vertical and side), arc
movement and travel range. Also make sure it can be put in the boundaries of the fuselage
or wing jacking points.
To reduce the necessary lifting load, it is recommended to reduce the aircraft weight with
the removal of cargo or payload from the aircraft before a leveling or lifting operation (See
05-50-01 and 05-60-00).
(10) Calculate the expected arc movement at each jacking point during the leveling operation.
(See TASK 06-10-00-970-803-A01)
Calculate the side load if necessary. (See TASK 06-10-00-970-802-A01)
(11) If the jack cannot move along the necessary arc movement, you must calculate the
expected side load on the jacking point and make sure the expected side load is not more
than the allowable load on the jacking point.
(12) Install fittings and/or jack pad adapters at the necessary jacking points. See TASK
06-30-00-581-802-B01.
(13) If necessary, excavate a sufficiently large area to make a stable platform as a base for each
jack. Make sure that the ground/soil can support the load at each jack footprint, and that
will stay stable during the leveling or lifting operation. See TASK 02-20-02-285-801-A01)
Make a platform that is satisfactory for the jack height when in compressed position. Make
sure that the platform is sufficiently large to change the position of the jack during the
leveling operation if necessary. If the jack in the extended position cannot lift the aircraft
sufficiently, it is necessary to make a timber platform that is sufficiently high.
(14) Put wheel chocks in front of and behind the wheels of each extended landing gear in
contact with the ground.
(15) Install the landing gear downlock pins in all extended landing gears. See 02-30-01.
(16) Put each jack in position below the jacking point and extend the jack to engage it in the
fitting.
(17) Before you start the jacking operation, we recommend that you mark the values of the
necessary lifting load to be applied on the jack on each load cell indicator (use a strip of
colored adhesive tape for example).
Also, we recommend that you mark the maximum allowable load of each jacking point to
prevent overload. This gives the recovery personnel better visibility from the ground.
Page 20
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(18) Each jack operator must have a good visibility to the person in charge of the lifting
operation.
Coordination between all jack operators is very important. Two-way voice activated
headsets are very good for this type of operation.
(19) You must use and monitor plumb bobs and levels during a leveling or lifting operation.
(20) Monitor the CG during the full leveling procedure and be prepared to control with ballast if
necessary. See 03-50-01.
(21) If you use tethers, they must be adjusted and the loads must be monitored when you level
or lift the aircraft.
(22) Install aft tipping protection if necessary.
(23) When you use a jack at the safety stay position to make the aircraft stable, you must
monitor the jack and correctly adjust the loads.
(24) Make sure the loads at each jack are not more than the allowable loads and that you
record all the loads applied. See DESC 06-30-00-001-A01.
(25) Level the aircraft:
(a) With a special recovery jack:
If you use a special recovery jack that can move along the arc movement, make sure
the jack can do the necessary arc movement to level the aircraft. Include side loads
caused by the jack.
If the jack can do the total necessary arc movement, gradually level the aircraft in
small steps and change the position of the jack between each step.
(b) With a standard jack:
If the jack cannot sufficiently move along the arc movement or if you use a standard
jack, gradually level the aircraft in small steps and change the position of the jack
between each step.
NOTE : If possible, you should use a special recovery jack. Step by step leveling is
not the recommended method to level the aircraft.
- Start jacking until you get the maximum jack extension or maximum arc
movement.
- Lock the jack at this position and make sure the aircraft is in a stable
configuration.
- At the same time, make shoring under the closest load bearing frame or frames
and make sure the loads are not more the maximum allowable loads.
- Compress the jack, make the necessary stable-base platform and change the
position of the jack. Do the procedure again until the aircraft is level.
(26) It is possible to use axle jacks with shoring and timber bases at the primary jacking points
to lift the aircraft to the height where recovery jacks can be fitted. This is not a
recommended procedure because of the limited arc movement capacity of the jack.
Page 21
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(27) When the fuselage and wings are level, and if it is necessary to lift the aircraft, use the 3
primary jacking points to lift the aircraft to the necessary height. (See AMM
07-11-00-581-801)
Do not lift the aircraft until all the aircraft (wings and fuselage) is in a level attitude.
(SeeAMM 07-11-00-480-051 for the necessary lifting heights)
(28) When the aircraft is at the necessary height:
(a) Make shoring to support the fuselage and/or wings, or leave the jacks in place as a
safety measure during work on the landing gears.
(b) Extend the landing gear(s) and install the downlock pin(s).
(c) Or repair or replace the landing gear(s).
(d) Or, if it is not possible to make the landing gear(s) serviceable, place the forward
fuselage and/or the wing(s) on a mobile device. See 07-60-00.
Page 22
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CG
PERMISSIBLE WIND SPEED (Km/h)
30
20 B
40 50
45 60 70
170 40 80 AIRCRAF
35 T CG (%
LOAD ON WING JACKING POINTS (kg x 1000)
30 RC)
25
160 20
15
170
NRW (kg x 1000)

150
160
140
150
130
C
140
120
A
130 NRW
110
120
100
110
90
100
80
90
TIP UP
SECURITY 80
MARGIN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LOAD ON FORWARD FUSELAGE JACKING POINT (kg x 1000)
EXAMPLE : ASSUME AIRCRAFT WITH NRW OF 135000 kg A AND CENTER OF GRAVITY AT 26.5% RC B .
THE REACTION AT THE WING JACKING POINTS IS 127000 kg (63500 kg PER SIDE) C AND THE
REACTION AT THE FORWARD FUSELAGE JACKING POINT IS 8000 kg D . IF THE AIRCRAFT
MUST BE LIFTED OUTSIDE THE WIND SPEED MUST NOT BE IN EXCESS OF 60 Km/h..
F_AR_063000_1_0080101_01_00
Aircraft on Jacks
Stability and Maximum Wind Speed
FIGURE-06-30-00-991-008-A01
Page 23
06-30-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
06-40 USE OF PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
06-40-00 USE OF PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-40-00-002-A01
General
1. This section gives data about the use of pneumatic lifting bags for leveling and lifting : location of
bearing areas, allowable loads, general preparation and instructions.
Pneumatic lifting bags have different sizes and lifting capacities. In general, multiple-element
pneumatic lifting bags with internal drop threads are the most usual. Single-element pneumatic lifting
bags (balloon bags) are not recommended.
You must know and obey the operating instructions given by the manufacturer of the pneumatic
lifting bags.
Page 1
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-40-00-001-A01
Pneumatic Lifting Bags on Fuselage
1. Fuselage Bearing Areas
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS APPLY LOADS IN THE
BEARING AREA ONLY. IF THE LIFTING BAGS APPLY LOADS OUT OF THE
LIMITS OF THE BEARING AREA, SECONDARY DAMAGE CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION : DO NOT PUT THE LIFTING BAGS UNDER PROTRUDING STRUCTURES (FLAP
TRACKS,PYLON FAIRINGS, ETC.), SHARP EDGES OR ANGLES BECAUSE THEY
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE LIFTING BAGS.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE LOADS ON THE AIRFRAME ARE LESS THAN THE
ALLOWABLE LOADS WHEN YOU USE SUPPORTS. THE SUPPORTS APPLY
LOADS THAT DO NOT OCCUR IN NORMAL OPERATION.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS DO NOT APPLY LOADS
ON THE BELLY FAIRING STRUCTURE. IF NECESSARY, REMOVE THE BELLY
FAIRINGS AND THE BELLY FAIRING STRUCTURE TO GET ACCESS TO THE
ALLOWABLE BEARING AREA.
This part gives data about the installation of pneumatic lifting bags under the fuselage
A. Location
Pneumatic lifting bags can be installed under the fuselage between FR21 and FR37 and between
FR55 and FR59 with a minimum width of 1.5 m (60 in) and a minimal contact area of two
frame bays and 16 stringer bays, see FIGURE 06-40-00-991-002-A.
Before you install the pneumatic lifting bags, you must check that there is no damage on the
bearing area.
NOTE : Some items (drains, antennas, etc.) can prevent pneumatic lifting bag installation or
cause damage to them. Thus, you must remove these items before you install the
lifting bags. See DESC 06-00-00-002-A01 for the list of leveling/lifting obstructions.
B. Allowable Loads
Maximum Allowable Pressure
Bearing Area
PSI hPa Bar
FR21 to FR37 4.93 340 0.34
FR55 A to FR59 4.49 310 0.31
TABLE 1
Page 2
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
NOTE : If the aircraft cabin pressure boundaries are not damaged, pressurization of the cabin
can increase the maximum allowable pressure of lifting bags. It is possible to add the
cabin pressure applied to the maximum allowable pressure of lifting bags.
See 06-10-00 for load calculation and pneumatic lifting bag pressure calculation related to the
aircraft attitude and the leveling/lifting procedure selection.
2. Pneumatic Lifting Bag Travel Data
Pneumatic lifting bag movement is related to the attitude of the aircraft. See 06-00-00 for data
related to the applicable scenario.
Page 3
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
VERTICAL
DATUM
W
MAX +/−6°
MAX FUSELAGE INCLINATION
TYPICAL WIDTH = 2.0 m (80 in)

1.5 m (60 in) W 2.0 m (80 in)
MIN CONTACT AREA = TYPICAL LENGTH = 4.0 m (160 in)
2 FR. BAYS AND L 1.5 m (60 in)
W 16 STGR. BAYS
L FWD L AFT
FR21 FR37 FR55 FR59
MAX PRESSURE 4.93 PSI (340 hpa/0.34 bar) MAX PRESSURE 4.49 PSI (310 hpa/0.31 bar)
BEARING AREA ON FUSELAGE LOWER SURFACE
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS APPLY LOADS IN THE BEARING AREA ONLY.
IF THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS APPLY LOADS OUT OF THE LIMITS OF THE BEARING AREA,
SECONDARY DAMAGE CAN OCCUR.
F_AR_064000_1_0020101_01_03
Pneumatic Lifting Bags

Fuselage Bearing Areas
FIGURE-06-40-00-991-002-A01
Page 4
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-40-00-003-A01
Pneumatic Lifting Bags on Wings
1. Bearing Areas on Wing Lower Surface
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS APPLY LOADS IN THE
BEARING AREA ONLY. IF THE LIFTING BAGS APPLY LOADS OUT OF THE
LIMITS OF THE BEARING AREA, SECONDARY DAMAGE CAN OCCUR.
This part gives data about the installation of pneumatic lifting bags under the wings.
A. Location
Pneumatic lifting bags can be installed under the wing lower surfaces between Rib 1 and Rib 27,
Front Spar to Rear Spar, see FIGURE 06-40-00-991-001-A.
B. Restricted Areas
The limits of the allowable bearing areas for the pneumatic lifting bags are shown in FIGURE
06-40-00-991-003-A.
C. Allowable Loads
Bearing Area
PSI hPa Bar
Rib 1 to Rib 27 7.0 480 0.48
TABLE 1
Page 5
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
RH SHOWN (LH SYMMETRICAL)
RIB27
RIB19
RIB22
RIB17
RIB14
ENGINE PYLON
CENTERLINE
RIB10
RIB7 RIB4
RIB1
REAR SPAR FRONT SPAR
BEARING AREA ON WING LOWER SURFACE (7.0 PSI)
F_AR_064000_1_0010101_01_04

Bearing Area on Wing Lower Surface
FIGURE-06-40-00-991-001-A01
Page 6
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
BEARING AREA ON WING LOWER SURFACE
RH SHOWN (LH SYMMETRICAL)
RIB27
RIB19
RIB22
RIB17
RIB14
JACKING POINT
RESTRICTED AREA
WING JACKING POINT

RIB10
RIB7 RIB4
RIB1
REAR SPAR FRONT SPAR

NOTE: THE JACK FOOTPRINT IS MEASURED FROM THE CENTERLINE OF THE JACK TO THE CENTERLINE OF
THE TRIPOD FOOT. THE FOOTPRINT IS RELATED TO THE TYPE OF JACK. IT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW
THE FOOTPRINT OF THE JACK YOU WILL USE BEFORE YOU PUT THE LIFTING BAG(S) IN POSITION.
F_AR_064000_1_0030101_01_03

Wing Restricted Area
FIGURE-06-40-00-991-003-A01
Page 7
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 06-40-00-581-801-A01
General Preparation and Instructions for Leveling and Lifting the Aircraft with Pneumatic Lifting Bags
1. General
This section gives the data about the use of pneumatic lifting bags for leveling and lifting: allowable
loads, general preparation and instructions.
NOTE : If you use pneumatic lifting bags to level or lift the aircraft they must be put in position on
a stable base. The surface must be flat.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Pneumatic lifting bag movement is related to the attitude of the aircraft. See 06-60-00 for data about
the applicable scenario.
DESC 06-00-00-002-A01 DESC 06-00-00-002-A01-Leveling/Lifting Obstructions
06-10-00 06-10-00-LOAD DETERMINATION
04-50-00 04-50-00-SOIL STABILITY
03-20-01 03-20-01-FUEL LOAD AND CG CONTROL
06-30-00 06-30-00-USE OF JACKS
AMM 07-11-00-581-801
TABLE 1
Page 8
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
5. Procedure
WARNING : OBEY THESE PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU DO LEVELING/LIFTING OF THE

AIRCRAFT. MAKE SURE THAT THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT IS APPLICABLE FOR
THE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERSONS WHO OPERATE
THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT ARE CORRECTLY TRAINED AND HAVE A GOOD
KNOWLEDGE OF THE SYSTEM. MAKE SURE THAT THE NECESSARY SAFETY
AREA IS KNOWN AND THAT PERSONS DO NOT GO IN THIS AREA DURING
THE LEVELING/LIFTING OPERATIONS. LEVELING/LIFTING OF THE AIRCRAFT
CAN BE DANGEROUS IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE PRECAUTIONS.
CAUTION : THE STIFFNESS AND LATERAL STABILITY OF PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAG CAN
CHANGE DURING THE INFLATION PROCESS OF THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING
BAG STACK. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAG
MANUFACTURER TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE DATA ON THE USE OF ITS
LIFTING BAGS.
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE RECOVERY MANAGER TO MAKE SURE
THAT USE OF THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAG WILL NOT LEAD TO AIRCRAFT
MOVEMENT DUE TO THE INFLUENCE OF WIND AND/OR CHANGE OF CG
POSITION DURING AIRCRAFT LIFTING/LEVELING.

LIFT IT.
Page 9
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS DO NOT APPLY LOADS
ON THE BELLY FAIRING STRUCTURE. IF NECESSARY, REMOVE THE BELLY
FAIRINGS AND THE BELLY FAIRING STRUCTURE TO GET ACCESS TO THE
ALLOWABLE BEARING AREA.
aircraft recovery.
NOTE : It is the responsibility of the recovery manager to make the decision about the applicable
method and related equipment/personnel for the leveling/lifting of the aircraft.
Subtask 06-40-00-581-001-A01
A. General fuselage lifting
NOTE : Before you start to level or lift the aircraft with pneumatic lifting bags, you must
make sure that the personnel know the instructions and conditions below and that
they obey these instructions and conditions.
(1) Do not lift the aircraft with pneumatic lifting bags in gusty wind conditions.
(2) Do not lift the aircraft with pneumatic lifting bags during steady wind conditions.
(3) Find the maximum allowable wind speed related to your aircraft configuration. See TBD.
(4) Correctly tether the aircraft before leveling or lifting with pneumatic lifting bags. This is to
prevent aircraft movement that you cannot control during the leveling or lifting operation.
See 04-30-00.
(5) Read the manufacturer instructions applicable to the pneumatic lifting bags that you use.
(6) Only the personnel that knows the operation of pneumatic lifting bags and aircraft jacking
procedures should be in charge of the pneumatic lifting bags operation.
(7) Confirm the aircraft NRW and CG. See 03-00-00.
(8) Calculate the anticipated vertical load on each lifting bag position to be used to make sure
the necessary load is not more than the maximum allowable load on the skin. See 06-10-00.
If the necessary load on the bearing area of the pneumatic lifting bag is more than the
allowable load for that leveling/lifting point, reduce the aircraft weight until the lifting load
is less than the allowable load or make a selection of another leveling or lifting procedure.
(9) Calculate the total lift of each pneumatic lifting bag used. Make sure each available lifting
bag can support the necessary loads (vertical and side), arc movement and travel range,
and can fit in the limits of the fuselage or wing contact zone.
To reduce the necessary lifting load, we recommend that you reduce the aircraft weight
with the removal of cargo or payload from the aircraft before a leveling/lifting operation,
see 06-10-00.
Page 10
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(10) Calculate the expected arc movement during the leveling/lifting operation, at the center of
the bearing area of each pneumatic lifting bag . Also calculate the side load if necessary,
see 06-10-00.
(11) Before you use pneumatic lifting bags, do an inspection of the structure to make sure there
is no damage in the leveling/lifting area. If there is damage, the pneumatic lifting bags
must be installed at least one non-damaged rib/fuselage frame away from the damaged
area. Remove all sharp edges from the contact area. Use a heavy tarpaulin between the
aircraft skin and the pneumatic lifting bag to prevent damage to the top of the bag.
(12) Put the pneumatic lifting bags in the allowable bearing areas, and make sure no sharp
edges or peaks (damaged skin , protruding structure, antennas ...) are in the area where
the bags will be installed.
(13) Remove some unwanted items from the aircraft before you install the pneumatic lifting
bags, see DESC 06-00-00-002-A01.
(14) If necessary, excavate a sufficiently large area to make a stable base for the pneumatic
lifting bags. Make sure that the ground/soil can support the load at each lifting bag
footprint, and will stay stable during the leveling/lifting operation, see 04-50-00. Make a
satisfactory base for the height of the compressed pneumatic lifting bags. Make sure that
the base is sufficiently large to change the position of the pneumatic lifting bags during the
leveling/lifting operation if necessary. If the inflated pneumatic lifting is not sufficiently
high to lift the aircraft, it will be necessary to make a sufficiently high platform. It is
possible to make this platform with timber or to use an inflatable type platform.
(15) Adjust the pneumatic lifting bag base to let the bags follow the shape of the lower
fuselage/wing surface. It can be necessary to use jacks to move the wooden
base/pneumatic lifting bag supports when the aircraft moves.
(16) Put wheel chocks in front and behind the wheels of each landing gear that is extended and
in contact with the ground.
(17) Install landing gear downlock pins in all landing gears that are extended.
(18) Each operator at the pneumatic-lifting bag control console must have a good visibility of
the person in charge of the leveling/lifting operation. Coordination between all the console
operators is very important. Two-way voice headsets are very good for this type of
operation.
(19) No personnel must be in or below the aircraft during the leveling/lifting process.
(20) Movement of fuel in the wing tanks because of aircraft leveling/lifting can cause a change
in the aircraft CG position. It is thus recommended that all fuel is removed from the
aircraft before leveling/lifting, see 03-20-01. This will also reduce the necessary lifting
loads.
(21) Monitor the CG during all the aircraft leveling/lifting process and be prepared to control
with ballast if necessary, see 06-10-00.
Page 11
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(22) Monitor and record the applied loads (pressure in the pneumatic lifting bags) at all times
during the leveling/lifting process.
(23) You must carefully monitor the arc movement of the pneumatic lifting bags. Use a plumb
bob to monitor pneumatic lifting bag movement at each position.
(24) Install aft tipping protection if necessary.
(25) Before you inflate the pneumatic lifting bags, make sure that you know all the warnings
and safety precautions. Make sure that all equipment (such as shoring material or jacks) is
prepared and available to use.
(26) Obey the manufacturer’s instructions: inflate the lifting bags slowly and adjust the tethers
when the aircraft starts to move.
(27) When the fuselage and wing are level, and if the aircraft needs to be lifted, it is
recommended to use the 3 jacking points to lift the aircraft to the necessary height, see
AMM 07-11-00-581-801. It is mandatory that the aircraft is in a level attitude (wing and
fuselage) before you lift it.
(28) When the aircraft is at the necessary height
(a) Build shoring to support the fuselage and/or wings, or install jacks (see 06-30-00) as
a safety measure during any work on the landing gears.
(b) Extend the landing gear(s) and install downlock pin(s),
(c) Or repair or replace the landing gear(s),
(d) Or, if it is not possible to make the landing gear(s) serviceable, place the forward
fuselage and/or the wing(s) on a mobile device, see 07-60-00.
(29) After the recovery process, do an inspection of the skin in the contact areas of the
pneumatic bag for scratches, nicks and gouges caused by sand or stones trapped between
the contact surfaces.
Page 12
06-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
06-50 USE OF CRANES
06-50-00 USE OF CRANES
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-50-00-001-A01
Fuselage Crane Lifting
1. General
CAUTION : DO NOT INSTALL THE SLINGS UNDER PROTRUDING STRUCTURES (FLAP

TRACKS, PYLON FAIRINGS, DRAINS, ANTENNAS, ETC.), SHARP EDGES OR
ANGLES BECAUSE THEY CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SLINGS.
CAUTION : USE ONLY RECOVERY SLINGS AND SPREADER BEAMS SPECIFIED BY AIRBUS.
NON-APPROVED LIFTING DEVICES CAN CAUSE SECONDARY DAMAGE TO
THE AIRCRAFT.
This section describes the use of slings and cranes for leveling and lifting: sling contact areas, crane
lifting points and allowable loads.
2. Location
Slings can be installed under the fuselage, between FR26 and FR37 and between FR56 and FR59. See
FIGURE 06-50-00-991-014-H.
Before you install the slings, you must check that there is no structural damage within the bearing
area. If you find damage, contact Airbus.
Structurally damaged frames cannot support lifting loads.
NOTE : Some items (drains, antennas, etc.) can prevent sling installation or cause damage to them.
Thus, you must remove these items before you install the slings. See DESC 06-00-00-002-
A01 for the list of leveling/lifting obstructions.
3. Allowable Loads
The maximum total lifting load at the forward fuselage is 50 000 daN (112 404 lbf).
The maximum total lifting load at the aft fuselage is 20 000 daN (44 962 lbf).
It is not allowed to apply the maximum allowable load per frame at more than 10 frames at the
forward fuselage and 4 frames at the aft fuselage.
In case of using more than 4 slings or if the total lifting load is more than 20 000 daN (44 962 lbf), it
is mandatory to install a sling at FR37 for the forward fuselage and FR56 for the aft fuselage.
See FIGURE 06-50-00-991-014-H for the formula to calculate the lifting force.
The maximum lifting force is related to the number of slings used and the length of the spreader bar.
See FIGURE 06-50-00-991-016-H for the lifting scenarios.
Page 1
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
A. Multiple sling with 2 cranes:

- FR26 to FR37: maximum lifting force of 5 000 daN (11 240 lbf) per sling and 50 000 daN
(112 404 lbf) for the total load on forward fuselage.
(44 962 lbf) for the total load on aft fuselage.
B. Multiple sling and spreader bar with 1 crane:
(112 404 lbf) for the total load on forward fuselage.
(44 962 lbf) for the total load on aft fuselage.
4. Sling Installation
For leveling/lifting of airframes with fuselage recovery slings, specific tooling is necessary:
- Slings
- Multiple sling adaptors
- Spreader bar.
A. Slings
The slings can consist of one or more straps.
The slings are in direct contact with the aircraft fuselage skin. Therefore, they must be made
from soft nylon in order to prevent scratches and gouges.
The minimum width of the straps must be 200 mm (8 in), there is no limit for the maximum
width.
The slings must be installed at the exact location of the frame, and centered on the frame rivet
line that you can identify on the aircraft fuselage. See FIGURE 06-50-00-991-014-H.
For scenarios 1B and 2B (see FIGURE 06-50-00-991-016-H) the minimum necessary length of
slings is constant at 16 500 mm (650 in).
For other scenarios the minimum required sling length will be in relation to the available
spreader bar length.
It is recommended not to use slings with straps longer than necessary.
The two ends of the straps must have suitable loops for attachment to the crane hook or the
multiple sling adaptor.
The straps must be in good condition without broken fibers, cuts, nicks or gouges.
See FIGURE 06-50-00-991-015-A for the necessary steps for selection and installation of slings
on the fuselage.
B. Multiple Sling Adaptor
The multiple sling adaptor must be adapted to scenarios 1A, 2A, 1B and 2B if more than one
sling is required for lifting (see FIGURE 06-50-00-991-019-H).
The multiple sling adaptor makes a link between the fuselage slings. The function of the
adaptor is to make sure that the loads are equally applied to each sling and to keep the same
distance between the slings as the frame pitch (533 mm / 21 in). It is possible to use the
multiple sling adaptor with a different but symmetrical number of slings, from 2 slings to 10
slings at the forward and aft fuselage, (depending on Aircraft Model).
Page 2
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
The total lifting force applied to each sling must not be more than 5 000 daN (11 240 lbf), or
equivalent to 2 500 daN (5 620 lbf) at each side of the slings. The maximum total allowable
lifting loads at the forward and the aft fuselage, must not be exceeded when you use multiple
slings, see TBD.
To obtain the constant load distribution described above, the multiple sling adaptor must obey
specific design requirements (See FIGURE 06-50-00-991-019-H).
Multiple sling adaptor design data:
- Static values of the multiple sling adaptor: minimum necessary bending stiffness at center
line = 6 750 cm3 (1 620 in3),
- Wire tension in pulley assembly: a maximum vertical force of 5 000 daN (11 240 lbf) can be
applied to each frame station, equivalent to 2 500 daN (5 620 lbf) maximum at each end of
the fuselage slings. This load is divided by two due to the pulley design. Therefore, the wire
tension limit load in the pulley assembly is 1 250 daN (2 810 lbf). Ground service equipment
for hoisting must have a minimum safety factor of 5.0. Therefore, the wire and pulley
assembly must be sufficiently strong to support a total load of 6 250 daN (14 051 lbf).
C. Spreader Bar
When only one crane is available, you can use a transverse spreader bar to make a link between
each side of the aircraft. The allowable load at each frame station depends on the fuselage sling
angle. The maximum load of 5 000 daN (11 240 lbf) per frame station is only permitted with a
sling angle of 180 degrees. To obtain this angle, it is necessary either to use 2 cranes or,
alternatively, to use a transversal spreader bar with a length equal to the fuselage diameter (5
640 mm / 222 in). For any other lifting angle than 180˚, contact Airbus.
NOTE : Multiple-sling systems supplied by vendors usually come with the transverse spreader
bar.
Page 3
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
ALLOWABLE SLING CONTACT AREA

MIN L FWD MAX MIN L AFT MAX
Z
FUSELAGE SLINGS FUSELAGE SLINGS
(MAX. 10 SLINGS) (MAX. 4 SLINGS)
FR26 FR56 FR59

FR37
0 X
X1
F1 FG F2
XCG
X2
F2 = XCG − X1 x FG < 20000 daN

X2 − X1
F1 = FG − F2 < 50000 daN
FRAME
CLIP
FUSELAGE SLING
CENTERED AT
> 200 mm RIVET LINE
( > 8 in)
DETAILED SLING LOCATION
F_AR_065000_1_0140802_01_00
Fuselage Sling Lifting

Allowable Contact Area
FIGURE-06-50-00-991-014-H01
Page 4
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CALCULATE AIRCRAFT CG AND REQUIRED

LIFTING FORCE (SEE ARM 03):
MAXIMUM LIFTING FORCE:

− FWD FUSELAGE: < 50000 daN
− AFT FUSELAGE: < 20000 daN
DETERMINE NUMBER OF REQUIRED

SLINGS:
SLING ANGLE = 180°
DIVIDE REQUIRED LIFTING FORCE BY:
− FWD/AFT FUSELAGE: < 5000 daN
DETERMINE REQUIRED LIFTING

CLEARANCE OF HANGAR AND/OR CRANE:
( SEE TASK 06−50−00−581−801)
DETERMINE AVAILABLE TOOLS:

− AVAILABLE SLING LENGTH
− AVAILABLE SPREADER BAR LENGTH
ALL TOOLS MUST MEET AIRBUS
SPECIFICATIONS
CHOOSE LIFTING SCENARIO:
180° LIFTING ANGLE TO BE PREFERRED.

FOR ALL OTHER LIFTING ANGLES:
CONTACT AIRBUS
LOCATE SLINGS IN ALLOWABLE AREAS:
− OBEY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS BEFORE

LIFTING
F_AR_065000_1_0150101_01_02
Fuselage Sling Installation

Flowchart
FIGURE-06-50-00-991-015-A01
Page 5
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
SCENARIO 1A:
2 CRANES WITH MULTIPLE SLING ADAPTOR.
MAX LIFTING FORCE:
5000 daN x NUMBER OF SLINGS.
(MAX 10 SLINGS).
SCENARIO 2A:
1 CRANE WITH MULTIPLE SLING ADAPTOR AND
SPREADER BAR.
MAX LIFTING FORCE:
(MAX 10 SLINGS).
F_AR_065000_1_0160803_01_00
Lifting With Sling Scenarios

FWD Fuselage Area (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-50-00-991-016-H01
Page 6
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
SCENARIO 1B:
2 CRANES WITH MULTIPLE SLING ADAPTOR.
MAX LIFTING FORCE:
(MAX 4 SLINGS).
SCENARIO 2B:
1 CRANE WITH MULTIPLE SLING ADAPTOR
AND SPREADER BAR.
MAX LIFTING FORCE:
(MAX 4 SLINGS).
F_AR_065000_1_0160804_01_00
Lifting With Sling Scenarios

Aft Fuselage Area (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-06-50-00-991-016-H01
Page 7
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
Z DATA RECORDING UNIT

(LIFTING FORCE)
5300 mm
(217 in)
2670 mm
(105 in)
533 mm
(21 in)
U−PROFILE DIN 1026 U1. 10 mm

(5.5 in x 2.36 in)
(11.81 in)
300 mm
30 mm
533.4 mm (1.16 in)
(21 in)
F_AR_065000_1_0220101_01_00
Multiple Sling Adaptor

Design
FIGURE-06-50-00-991-022-A01
Page 8
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_065000_1_0190801_01_00
Multiple Sling Adaptor

Installation
FIGURE-06-50-00-991-019-H01
Page 9
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 06-50-00-581-801-A01
General Preparation and Instructions for Leveling and Lifting the Aircraft with Cranes
1. General
This section gives the data related to the use of crane for leveling and lifting.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Crane/sling travel range is related to the attitude of the aircraft. See 06-60-00 for information related
to the applicable scenario.
TASK 03-50-01-558-803-A01 TASK 03-50-01-558-803-A01-Ballast Added Effect
Landing Gears
DESC 06-00-00-002-A01 DESC 06-00-00-002-A01-Leveling/Lifting Obstructions
DESC 06-50-00-001-A01 DESC 06-50-00-001-A01-Fuselage Crane Lifting
05-50-00 05-50-00-CARGO COMPARTMENTS
05-60-00 05-60-00-REMOVAL OF LARGE COMPONENTS
06-10-00 06-10-00-LOAD DETERMINATION
05-10-00 05-10-00-DEFUELING
06-30-00 06-30-00-USE OF JACKS
06-40-00 06-40-00-USE OF PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
07-20-00 07-20-00-PREPARING A ROADWAY
07-40-00 07-40-00-TOWING AND DEBOGGING
TABLE 1
Page 10
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
5. Procedure
WARNING : OBEY THESE PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU DO LEVELING/LIFTING OF THE

AIRCRAFT. MAKE SURE THAT THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT IS APPLICABLE FOR
THE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERSONS WHO OPERATE
THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT ARE CORRECTLY TRAINED AND HAVE A GOOD
KNOWLEDGE OF THE SYSTEM. MAKE SURE THAT THE NECESSARY SAFETY
AREA IS KNOWN AND THAT PERSONS DO NOT GO IN THIS AREA DURING
THE LEVELING/LIFTING OPERATIONS. LEVELING/LIFTING OF THE AIRCRAFT
CAN BE DANGEROUS IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE PRECAUTIONS.

THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE CRANE YOU USE CAN LIFT THE ESTIMATED LOAD
PLUS THE WEIGHT OF THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT BEFORE YOU START TO
LIFT THE AIRCRAFT.
LIFT IT.
aircraft recovery.
NOTE : It is the responsability of the recovery manager to make the decision about the applicable
method and related equipment/personnel for the leveling/lifting of the aircraft.
Page 11
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 06-50-00-581-001-A01
A. General
NOTE : Before you start a leveling or lifting procedure with slings/cranes, make sure that the
following instructions are obeyed.
(1) Do not level or lift the aircraft with cranes during gusty wind conditions.
(2) The common maximum permissible wind speed for mobile cranes is 50 km/h (27 kt) with
steady wind. Airbus recommends not to lift the aircraft if the wind speed is higher. It is also
recommended not to use cranes during thunderstorms to prevent lightning strike.
(3) Before you start the leveling or lifting operation with cranes, you must correctly tether the
aircraft. This is to prevent uncontrolled movement of the aircraft during this operation
specially in case of high wind condition (See 04-30-00).
(4) Only personnel familiar with the operating procedures of the slings, spreader beams and
cranes should be in charge of the lifting operation.
(5) Calculate the NRW and CG position (See 03-50-01).
(6) Calculate the anticipated vertical load on the fuselage and make sure that the necessary
load is not more than the maximum allowable load.
If the necessary load is more than the allowable load, you must either decrease the aircraft
weight until the lifting load is less than the allowable load or use another leveling or lifting
procedure.
(7) Calculate the total lifting capacity of the slings and cranes that you use are able to hold.
Make sure that each available sling or crane can hold the necessary load, and can fit within
the boundaries of the fuselage contact zone.
The crane lifting strength must be higher than the lifting loads and the jib length must be
sufficient to allow aircraft movement (lateral and vertical).
To decrease the necessary lifting load, it is recommended to decrease the aircraft weight by
removal of cargo or payload from the aircraft before start of the leveling or the lifting
operation (See 05-50-00 and/or 05-60-00).
(8) Use the minimum necessary sling lengths and spreader bar width to find the minimum
assembly height.
The height of the crane or the hangar roof can be a limit to the height of the assembly.
(9) Calculate the possible arc movement during the leveling operation, at each lifting point.
Also calculate the side load if necessary (see 06-10-00).
(10) The frame station and lifting points that will be used for lifting must not be damaged. In
case of damage, contact Airbus.
(11) Make sure that there are no sharp edges or peaks (skin damages, protruding structure,
antenna ...) in the zones where the fuselage recovery slings will be installed.
See DESC 06-00-00-002-A01 for the list of leveling/lifting obstructions.
Page 12
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(12) If necessary, put wheel chocks in front of and behind the wheels of the main landing gear
that is extended and in contact with the ground.
(13) Install the landing gear downlock pins in all landing gears that are extended.
(14) All the persons who work on the leveling/lifting operation should be connected with mobile
communication devices. Two-way voice activated headsets are ideal for this type of
operation.
(15) No personnel must be in or below the aircraft during the leveling process. The personnel
who is not directly involved in the lifting operation must be at least 20 m (65 ft) far from
the aircraft and cranes.
(16) Movement of fuel in the wing tanks caused by aircraft leveling can change the aircraft CG
position. Therefore, it is recommended to remove all fuel from the aircraft before leveling.
(See 05-10-00). This will also decrease the required lifting loads.
(17) Monitor the CG throughout the aircraft leveling process and be prepared to control with
ballast if required (See TASK 03-50-01-558-803-A01).
(18) Monitor the position of the slings carefully at all times during the leveling/lifting process.
For the fuselage lifting, it is necessary to install each sling at a frame station and all slings
must be in the areas listed in DESC 06-50-00-001-A01.
(19) You must monitor and record applied loads at all times during the leveling and lifting
process. If at one step of the process the maximum load (related to the lifting scenario) is
more than the allowable load, contact Airbus for definition of structure inspection tasks.
Airbus recommends that you use load cells and monitoring equipment to record the applied
loads.
(20) Level or lift the aircraft slowly in accordance with the instructions given by the
manufacturer of the lifting/leveling equipment and cranes.
Adjust the tethers as the fuselage starts to move.
(21) When the fuselage and the wing(s) are leveled and if it is necessary to lift the aircraft, it is
recommended to use the 3 main jacking points to lift the aircraft to the necessary height,
see 06-30-00. The aircraft should not be lifted until the entire aircraft (wing(s) and
fuselage) is in a level attitude.
(22) When the aircraft is leveled and at the necessary height:
(a) Assemble a shoring device to support the fuselage and/or wings, or install jacks as a
safety precaution if you work on the landing gear. Use shoring cradles on a prepared
area. If specific tools are not available on site, you can use wood cribbing with rubber
protections under the fuselage. In that case, the bearing area is the same as for
pneumatic lifting bags installation, see 06-40-00.
(b) If possible on site, when the aircraft is on shoring cradles, extend the landing gear and
install the downlock pins or repair or replace the landing gear, see TASK
02-30-01-481-802-A02.
Then prepare a roadway (see 07-20-00) and tow the aircraft (see 07-40-00).
Page 13
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(c) Or place the forward fuselage and/or the wing(s) on a mobile trailers if it not possible
to make the landing gear serviceable.
(23) After the recovery operation, you must do an inspection of the skin surface and the wing(s)
for any sign of damage which may have been caused during the leveling/lifting.
Page 14
06-50-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
06-60 LEVELING AND LIFTING SCENARIOS
06-60-00 LEVELING AND LIFTING SCENARIOS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-60-00-001-A01
Introduction
1. General
There are 6 recovery scenarios:
Scenarios Aircraft Attitude Engines Distortion References
1 NLG Unserviceable On A/C 200 mm on NLG See 06-60-01
Bay
2.1 One MLG On A/C 200 mm on Nacelle See 06-60-02
Unserviceable
2.2 One MLG LH Missing No Wing Bending See 06-60-02
Unserviceable
3.1 NLG and One MLG On A/C 200 mm on Nacelle See 06-60-03
Unserviceable and 200 mm on
NLG Bay
3.2 NLG and One MLG LH Missing No Wing Bending See 06-60-03
Unserviceable
4 All L/G On A/C 200 mm on Rear See 06-60-04
Unserviceable Fuselage and 200
mm on Nacelles
Recovery Scenarios
TABLE 1
Each recovery scenario is based on the assumptions that follow:

- The ground is horizontal and leveled,
- The soil is rigid,
- The A/C is rigid (no global bending of wing and fuselage),
- The aircraft has a local distortion of the fuselage and the nacelles of a maximum of 200 mm
(7.87 in).
These assumptions are related to a critical operational CG because of the aircraft attitude. It is
possible that the illustrations do not show the actual condition of the aircraft, but they give
acceptable and important data.
2. Recovery Procedure
CAUTION : YOU MUST DO THE LATERAL LEVELING BEFORE YOU DO THE

LONGITUDINAL LEVELING.
Page 1
06-60-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
There are three general methods for leveling/lifting of the aircraft:

- Jacks, see 06-30-00,
- Pneumatic lifting bags, see 06-40-00,
- Cranes, see 06-50-00.
You must follow the safety precautions related to each recovery method.
In some cases, it can be necessary to level/lift the aircraft with use of a step-by-step combination of
these three methods.
During the lateral or longitudinal leveling, the trajectories of the leveling/lifting points (the jacking
point or the contact point of the pneumatic lifting bags) start from the first ground contact point
from which the leveling is initiated and make a curve. This curve shows the displacement of the
leveling/lifting point during the full leveling operation. The arc movement is calculated as follow, see
06-00-00:
- Jacking: from the lowest position of the jacking point to its highest position with the aircraft at a
leveled attitude,
- Airbags: from the lowest position of the middle point of the pneumatic lifting bags areas to the
its highest position with the aircraft at a leveled attitude.
By arc movement, one must understand the total longitudinal and/or transverse movement of the
lifting point, see FIGURE 06-60-00-991-001-A.
Make sure that the lifting device can follow the maximum travel range in all directions. It is
important to know that the mentioned values are the result of a theoretical study and thus are
average values and not accurate ones. It is necessary to make sure that the device you use will be
able to hold the loads on the transverse displacements. For this reason, it is recommended to use a
lifting device set to which you can apply a minimum of 150% of the necessary load.
With jacks, there is a risk of bending or rupture of the jack.
With pneumatic lifting bags, there is a risk of shear fracture of the bag.
During the leveling operation, the maximum applicable loads applied on the jacking points or on the
contact area of the pneumatic lifting bags must not be more than the maximum allowable loads.
At all steps, it is necessary to accurately monitor the loads. The leveling should be linear and soft and
it is necessary to control it continuously.
The description of each scenario has:
- An illustration which shows the A/C attitude with the pitch and roll angles and the coordinates
of the contact points,
- An illustration which shows the clearances for the different methods to level/lift the aircraft. The
200 mm (7.87 in.) clearance and the related frame position are theoretically calculated to show
the standard clearance which allow to install a deflated standard pneumatic lifting bag,
- An illustration which shows the arc movements related to the method used to lift the aircraft.
On these illustrations, for the longitudinal movement, the negative sign is related to a forward
displacement. For the lateral movement, the negative sign is related to an inboard displacement.
Page 2
06-60-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TYPICAL
DEFORMATION VERTICAL
Z DIRECTION
PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAG
LONGITUDINAL LATERAL
X DIRECTION Y DIRECTION
VERTICAL
Z DIRECTION
JACK ACTUATOR
JACK
LONGITUDINAL LATERAL
X DIRECTION Y DIRECTION
F_AR_066000_1_0010101_01_00
All Scenarios
Typical Transverse Movements
FIGURE-06-60-00-991-001-A01
Page 3
06-60-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
06-60-01 SCENARIO 1 NLG UNSERVICEABLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-60-01-001-A01
Scenario 1: NLG Unserviceable
1. Aircraft Attitude
See FIGURE 06-60-01-991-006-A.
2. Leveling/Lifting Clearances
See FIGURE 06-60-01-991-007-A.
3. Arc Movements
See FIGURE 06-60-01-991-008-A.
Page 1
06-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_066001_1_0060101_01_01
200 mm DEFORMATION ON NLG BAY
Scenario 1
NLG Unserviceable (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-60-01-991-006-A01
Page 2
06-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
−5.5°
FDL
5 3 2 1 4
THEORETICAL POINT OF
X mm (in) Y mm (in)
CONTACT COORDINATES
1 LH MLG WHEEL 35 234 (1 387) −5 342 (−210)
2 NLG BAY 12 772 (503) 0
3 RH MLG WHEEL 35 234 (1 387) 5 342 (210)
OTHER THEORETICAL POINT OF
CONTACT COORDINATES FOR X mm (in) Y mm (in)
INFORMATION
4 LH ENGINE 24 961(983) −9 264 (−365)
5 RH ENGINE 24 961(983) 9 264 (365)
PITCH ANGLE ROLL ANGLE

−5.5° ESTIMATED TO 0°
F_AR_066001_1_0060102_01_02
Scenario 1
Aircraft Attitude Data (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-06-60-01-991-006-A01
Page 3
06-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR26
FR35
FR38
A B C
THEORETICAL CLEARANCE
LIFTING POINTS Z mm (in)
A FR26 508 (20)
B PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS FR35 881 (35)
C FR38 1 027 (40)
F_AR_066001_1_0070101_01_01
Scenario 1
Leveling/Lifting Clearances
FIGURE-06-60-01-991-007-A01
Page 4
06-60-01 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
LIFTING POINT PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
Scenario 1
Arc Movements
@A330-200F
FIGURE-06-60-01-991-008-A01
THEORETICAL DISPLACEMENT mm (in)

LOCATION
X Y Z
FR35 134 (5) 0 1 329 (52)
LIFTING WITH PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
06-60-01
F_AR_066001_1_0080101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 5
@A330-200F
06-60-02 SCENARIO 2 ONE MLG UNSERVICEABLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-60-02-001-A01
Scenario 2.1: One MLG Unserviceable
See FIGURE 06-60-02-991-015-A.
See FIGURE 06-60-02-991-016-A.
3. Arc Movements
See FIGURE 06-60-02-991-017-A.
Page 1
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_066002_1_0150101_01_01
200 mm DEFORMATION ON NACELLE
Scenario 2.1
One MLG Unserviceable (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-015-A01
Page 2
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FDL
1°
HHL
−4.4°
3 2 1
X mm (in) Y mm (in)
CONTACT COORDINATES
1 LH ENGINE 25 704 (1 012) −9 374 (−369)
2 NLG WHEEL 13 053 (514) 0
3 RH MLG WHEEL 35 234 (1 387) 5 342 (210)

1° −4.4°
F_AR_066002_1_0150102_01_02
Scenario 2.1
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-015-A01
Page 3
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WING A B
JACKING
POINT
A JACK WING JACKING POINT 3 342 (132)
B PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS RIB15 3 384 (133)
F_AR_066002_1_0160101_01_01
Scenario 2.1
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-016-A01
Page 4
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
A WING JACKING POINT

LOCATION
X Y Z
WING
JACKING 4 (0) 84 (3) 1 102 (43)
POINT
A
LIFTING BY WING JACKING POINT
Scenario 2.1
Arc movements
LIFTING POINT
@A330-200F
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-017-A01

LOCATION
06-60-02
X Y Z
RIB15 5 (0) 105 (4) 1 374 (54)
LIFTING WITH PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS B
F_AR_066002_1_0170101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 5
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-60-02-002-A01
Scenario 2.2: One MLG Unserviceable and Engine Missing
See FIGURE 06-60-02-991-009-A.
See FIGURE 06-60-02-991-010-A.
3. Arc Movements
See FIGURE 06-60-02-991-011-A.
Page 6
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_066002_1_0090101_01_01
NO BENDING OF THE WING
Scenario 2.2
One MLG Unserviceable and Engine Missing (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-009-A01
Page 7
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FDL
2.5°
HHL
−10.2°
3 2 1
X mm (in) Y mm (in)
CONTACT COORDINATES
1 LH WING TIP 42 986 (1 692) −28 849 (−1 136)
2 NLG WHEEL 13 053 (514) 0
3 RH MLG WHEEL 35 234 (1 387) 5 342 (210)

2.5° −10.2°
F_AR_066002_1_0090102_01_02
Scenario 2.2
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-009-A01
Page 8
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WING A B
JACKING
POINT
F_AR_066002_1_0100101_01_01
Scenario 2.2
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-010-A01
Page 9
06-60-02 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
A
LOCATION WING JACKING POINT
X Y Z
WING
JACKING −55 (−2) 460 (18) 2 552 (100)
POINT A
Scenario 2.2
Arc Movements
@A330-200F
FIGURE-06-60-02-991-011-A01
LIFTING POINT
B

LOCATION
06-60-02
X Y Z
RIB15 −68 (−3) 570 (22) 3 166 (125)
B
F_AR_066002_1_0110101_01_01
Oct 01/11
Page 10
@A330-200F
06-60-03 SCENARIO 3 NLG AND ONE MLG UNSERVICEABLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-60-03-001-A01
Scenario 3.1: NLG and One MLG Unserviceable
Scenario 3.1 has two steps:
- for Step 1, see FIGURE 06-60-03-991-008-A,
- for Step 2, see 06-60-01 Scenario 1.2.
3. Arc Movements
Page 1
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_066003_1_0080101_01_01
200 mm DEFORMATION ON NACELLE AND NLG BAY
Scenario 3.1
NLG and One MLG Unserviceable (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-008-A01
Page 2
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FDL
−5.3°
HHL
−0.7°
3 2 1
X mm (in) Y mm (in)
CONTACT COORDINATES
1 LH ENGINE 24 987 (984) −9 279 (−365)
2 NLG BAY 12 190 (480) −28 (−1)
3 RH MLG WHEEL 35 234 (1 387) 5 342 (210)

−5.3° −0.7°
F_AR_066003_1_0080102_01_01
Scenario 3.1
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-008-A01
Page 3
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WING
JACKING
POINT
A B
F_AR_066003_1_0090101_01_01
Scenario 3.1
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-009-A01
Page 4
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
WING JACKING POINT
A
LOCATION
X Y Z
WING
JACKING 17 (1) 2 (0) 171 (7) A
POINT
Scenario 3.1
Arc Movements
@A330-200F
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-010-A01
LIFTING POINT
06-60-03
B
LOCATION
X Y Z
RIB15 21 (1) 2 (0) 213 (8)
B
F_AR_066003_1_0100101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 5
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-60-03-002-B01
SCENARIO 3.2 : NLG and One MLG Unserviceable and Engine Missing
3. Arc Movements
Page 6
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_066003_1_0230101_01_01
NO BENDING OF THE WING
Scenario 3.2
NLG and One MLG Unserviceable and Engine Missing (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-023-A01
Page 7
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FDL
−2.7°
HHL
3 2 1 −11.1°
X mm (in) Y mm (in)
CONTACT COORDINATES
1 LH WING TIP 42 123 (1 679) −28 659 (−1 128)
2 NLG BAY 12 519 (561) −679 (−27)
3 RH MLG WHEEL 35 234 (1 387) 5 342 (210)

−2.7° −11.1°
F_AR_066003_1_0230102_01_01
Scenario 3.2
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-023-A01
Page 8
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WING
JACKING
POINT
A B
F_AR_066003_1_0240101_01_01
Scenario 3.2
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-024-A01
Page 9
06-60-03 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
WING JACKING POINT
A
LOCATION
X Y Z
WING A
JACKING 145 (6) 543 (21) 2 760 (109)
POINT
Scenario 3.2
Arc Movements
@A330-200F
FIGURE-06-60-03-991-025-A01
LIFTING POINT
06-60-03
B
LOCATION
X Y Z
RIB15 181 (7) 680 (27) 3 455 (136)
B
F_AR_066003_1_0250101_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 10
@A330-200F
06-60-04 SCENARIO 4 ALL L/G UNSERVICEABLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 06-60-04-001-A01
Scenario 4: All L/G Unserviceable
See FIGURE 06-60-04-991-008-A.
See FIGURE 06-60-04-991-009-A.
Page 1
06-60-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_066004_1_0080101_01_01
200 mm DEFORMATION ON REAR FUSELAGE AND NACELLES
Scenario 4
All L/G Unserviceable (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-06-60-04-991-008-A01
Page 2
06-60-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FDL
5.4°
3 2 1
X mm (in) Y mm (in)
CONTACT COORDINATES
1 LH ENGINE 26 309 (1 036) −9 283 (−365)
2 REAR FUSELAGE 45 676 (1 798) 0
3 RH ENGINE 26 309 (1 036) 9 283 (365)

5.4° ESTIMATED TO 0°
F_AR_066004_1_0080102_01_02
Scenario 4
FIGURE-06-60-04-991-008-A01
Page 3
06-60-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR35
WING WING
JACKING JACKING
POINT POINT
B C D E
A FR35 1 473 (58)
PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS
B RIB15 ON RH WING 2 950 (116)
RH WING JACKING
C 2 612 (103)
POINT
JACKS
LH WING JACKING
D 2 612 (103)
POINT
E PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS RIB15 ON LH WING 2 950 (116)
F_AR_066004_1_0090101_01_01
Scenario 4
FIGURE-06-60-04-991-009-A01
Page 4
06-60-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
MOVING THE AIRCRAFT
07-00 MOVING THE AIRCRAFT
07-00-00 MOVING THE AIRCRAFT
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-00-00-002-A01
General Preparation
1. General
This chapter gives the procedures for moving the aircraft to a hard surface. There are different
procedures for moving the aircraft if the landing gear is serviceable, or if it is damaged.
A. Before moving the aircraft you must:
- Do a detailed inspection of the landing gear to confirm its structural integrity. The landing
gear must be capable of supporting the weight of the aircraft during Towing/Debogging
operations, see 02-30-01.
- Do a check to make sure that the landing gear is in the downlocked position with the
groundlock pins fitted. If it is not possible to fit the groundlock pins, a more detailed
inspection must be done to find the cause. See 02-30-01 for groundlock pin installation
details.
B. Use one of the following procedures when the landing gear is damaged or missing:
- Repair or replace the landing gear to make it capable of supporting the aircraft weight
during Towing/Debogging operations.
- Use an aircraft recovery transport vehicle or vehicles to move the aircraft. See 07-60-00.
C. Before moving the aircraft, make sure that:
- Fuel and cargo have been removed to make the aircraft as light as possible.
- The weight and Center of Gravity (CG) are adequate for towing stability, see TBD.
- The relevant authorities have confirmed that the aircraft can be moved.
- The airport authority and fire department have been told that the recovery process has
moved to the next phase.
- There are no fluid leaks.
2. Returning Undamaged Aircraft to a Hard Surface
A planned recovery will allow the undamaged aircraft to be returned to the runway in the least
possible time.
A. The recovery plan can include:
- Confirmation that the aircraft is in the correct condition to be moved.
- The need to remove fuel and cargo from the aircraft.
- The type of ground over which the aircraft must be moved.
- The direction in which the aircraft will be moved.
- The type and quantity of ground equipment and recovery vehicles needed.
Page 1
07-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
B. The following procedures may be necessary to return an undamaged aircraft to the runway or
taxiway:
- For an aircraft that has moved onto soft ground or snow, it may be necessary to use the
Debogging procedure, 07-40-00 and the procedure to prepare a roadway 07-20-00. When a
roadway is prepared, the width of the roadway must be sufficient to let the towing vehicle
turn the aircraft if necessary.
- To make sure that the towing loads are not exceeded; use a load measuring tool to monitor
the loads at all times.
- To make sure that the Debogging loads are not exceeded; use a load measuring tool to
monitor the loads at all times unless the fuse assembly is being used, see 07-40-04.
Page 2
07-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-20 PREPARING A ROADWAY
07-20-00 PREPARING A ROADWAY
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-20-00-001-A01
Preparing a Roadway
1. For each aircraft recovery, the recovery manager must contact the relevant specialists to obtain
correct data applicable to the ground strength.
If the aircraft has moved off the runway or taxiway, it may be necessary to build a roadway to move
the aircraft on.
The roadway must be excavated to a depth that will let the finished roadway safely support the
weight of the aircraft.
The width of the roadway must let the aircraft be turned as necessary and let the routing of the
aircraft be changed. The width of the roadway must let heavy recovery vehicles manoeuvre safely.
aircraft recovery.
2. If the ground is soft or is not stable, you must excavate the ground along the route to the runway
and build a roadway. If the aircraft wheels have made ruts that are not too deep, the ruts can be
filled with a foundation material.
This material can be compacted gravel or railway ties/sleepers covered with sheet steel or thick
plywood, see FIGURE 07-20-00-991-001-A.
See chapter 04-50-00 for information on soil characteristics. Normally, general construction
contractors will have sufficient knowledge and experience to make a safe roadway.
Some of the materials that can be used in the construction of a roadway are:
- Compacted stone, gravel and/or broken asphalt,
- Railway ties/sleepers,
- Sheet steel,
- Plywood
See chapter 09-30-01 for details of materials that can be used for the recovery operation. You must
make sure that materials used for recovery are safe to be used, can cope with the forecasted weather
conditions and will not break under load or cause a change in aircraft stability.
When sheet material is used on top of the compacted material, it is recommended that two layers of
sheet material are used. Lay the sheets with the joints of the bottom layer covered by the top layer,
see FIGURE 07-20-00-991-001-A and FIGURE 07-20-00-991-002-D. When using sheet steel be careful
to avoid fluid spills. Fluid spills on sheet steel can cause a loss of towing traction for the towing
vehicles and will be a hazard for the recovery team.
Steel or aluminum sections that can be bolted together are available commercially in most cities.
Fabric matting that is made of different types of glass fibre is also available commercially. There are
different types, sizes and strengths of these materials.
Page 1
07-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
If there is not sufficient sheet material to make the roadway, the materials that the aircraft has been
moved over can be re-used to complete the roadway.
If heavy timbers are used directly on the roadway, they must be covered with a layer of plywood or
steel. If this is not done, the load from individual wheels can push one of the timbers into soft ground
and cause the aircraft to stop.
When the ground is not level, the roadway must normally be made with a slope of 5˚ or less. If
possible, position the towing/winching vehicle on the runway to give maximum traction.
Page 2
07-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
5° SLOPE
TYPICAL USE OF
RAILWAY TIES/SLEEPERS
EXCAVATED AREA FILLED

WITH FOUNDATION MATERIAL
SHEET MATERIAL
OVERLAP
F_AR_072000_1_0010101_01_00
Preparing a Roadway
Typical Roadway Construction
FIGURE-07-20-00-991-001-A01
Page 3
07-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
RAILROAD TIES OR CONCRETE OR RUNWAY MATTING

TIMBERS COVERED COMPACTED MATERIAL (STEEL PLATES, FIBERGLASS,
WITH STEEL PLATE OR (ROCK, GRAVEL, etc.) ALUMINUM, etc.)
PLYWOOD SHEETS
F_AR_072000_1_0020401_01_00
Preparing a Roadway
Typical Roadway Construction
FIGURE-07-20-00-991-002-D01
Page 4
07-20-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-40 TOWING AND DEBOGGING
07-40-00 TOWING AND DEBOGGING
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-40-00-001-A01
General
1. This chapter gives the towing procedures to be used during an aircraft recovery.
WARNING : STAY IN COMMUNICATION WITH THE AIRFIELD OPERATING AUTHORITY/AIR

TRAFFIC CONTROLLER DURING THIS PERIOD AND GET THEIR PERMISSION
TO MOVE THE AIRCRAFT.
- For towing load and angle limits, see 07-40-04.
- For towing from the nose gear, see 07-40-01.
- For towing from the main gear, see 07-40-02.
- For towing with deflated tires, see 07-40-03.
For AMM towing procedure, see AMM 09-10-00PB201.
2. Debogging definition:
Airbus considers that debogging is towing in an abnormal situation, with or without slope
consideration.
Page 1
07-40-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-40-01 TOWING FROM THE NOSE LANDING GEAR
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 07-40-01-584-801-A01
Towing from the NLG with a Towbar
1. General
This procedure gives details to push the aircraft rearward or to tow the aircraft forward using a
towbar installed on the NLG.
2. Inspections
- Make sure that the safety devices are installed on the landing gears, TASK 02-30-01-481-802-
A02.
- Make sure that the aircraft is stable, see TASK 04-20-00-588-801-A01 or AMM
05-57-00-200-801.
- Make sure that the engine cowl are closed.
- Make sure that the H-dimension of the NLG is not more than 310 mm (12.20 in). See 07-40-04.
For towing limits, see 07-40-04.
D23156000 PIN-SAFETY
TABLE 1
Landing Gears
TASK 04-20-00-588-801-A01 TASK 04-20-00-588-801-A01-Stabilizing the Aircraft
07-40-04 07-40-04-TOWING LOAD LIMITS
AMM 05-57-00-200-801
AMM 31-60-00-860-801
AMM 29-00-00-863-802
FIGURE 07-40-01-991-002-A FIGURE 07-40-01-991-002-A-Towing from the NLG
Page 1
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
FIGURE 07-40-01-991-001-B FIGURE 07-40-01-991-001-B-Towing from the NLG
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 07-40-01-500-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) If possible, do an EIS start procedure, see AMM 31-60-00-860-801.
(2) On the Nose Wheel Steering deactivation electrical-box 5GC (see FIGURE
07-40-01-991-002-A):
(a) Set the ground-towing control lever to the towing position.
(b) Install the D23156000 PIN-SAFETY.
Subtask 07-40-01-500-002-A01
B. Installation of the Towbar
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE TOW BAR HAS A DAMPING SYSTEM, A
CALIBRATED SHEAR PIN AND TWO CALIBRATED TURN SHEAR PINS.
THIS IS TO PREVENT HIGH LOADS WHICH CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
LANDING GEAR.
(1) Install the towbar on the tow fitting.
(2) Connect the towbar to the tractor. See FIGURE 07-40-01-991-001-B.
Subtask 07-40-01-869-001-A01
C. Aircraft Configuration
(1) On the panel 312VU, on the triple pressure indicator:
- Make sure that the pointer of the top gauge (ACCU PRESS) is in the green range
3000 psi (206.8427 bar).
- If necessary, pressurize the Blue Hydraulic System (see AMM 29-00-00-863-802).
(2) On the panel 117VU, set the PARKING-BRK control-switch to OFF.
(3) Pressurize the Blue Hydraulic System during the towing operation (see AMM
29-00-00-863-802).
(4) Remove the wheel chocks from the main landing gear wheels and nose landing gear wheels.
Page 2
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 07-40-01-584-001-A01
D. Towing
WARNING : DURING TOWING / TAXIING OPERATION (LOW-SPEED OPERATION

INCLUDED), EACH PERSON IN THE AIRCRAFT MUST BE IN A SEAT AND
THE SEAT BELT MUST BE FASTENED. IF THE SEAT BELT IS NOT
FASTENED, THERE IS A RISK OF INJURY IF THE AIRCRAFT STOPS
SUDDENLY.
CAUTION : PUT THE PARKING BRAKE CONTROL SWITCH IN THE OFF POSITION
BEFORE YOU TOW OR PUSH BACK THE AIRCRAFT. THIS IS TO
PREVENT HIGH LOADS WHICH CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE NOSE
LANDING GEAR.
(1) Tow slowly and smoothly.
During the towing operations, put:
- one person in the cockpit to operate the brakes if necessary,
- two persons to monitor the wing tips.
NOTE : The shock absorber reaction can cause the aircraft to move forward and rearward
when you stop the wheels. Because of this, make sure that there is sufficient
space around the aircraft when you tow with the nose gear.
Subtask 07-40-01-869-002-A01
E. Close-up
(1) Visual Inspection
(a) When you have completed the towing operation, make sure that the nose wheels are
aligned with the aircraft centerline.
(2) Aircraft Configuration
(a) Put the wheel chocks in position in front of and behind the wheels.
(b) On the panel 117VU, set the PARKING BRK control switch to ON.
(c) On the panel 312VU, on the triple pressure indicator:
Make sure that the pointer of the top gauge (ACCU PRESS) is in the green range
3000 psi (206.8427 bar).
If necessary, pressurize the Blue Hydraulic System, see AMM 29-00-00-863-802.
(3) Removal of the Towbar
(a) Remove the towbar from the fitting of the NLG.
(b) On the Nose Wheel Steering deactivation electrical-box 5GC (see FIGURE
07-40-01-991-002-A).
- Remove the D23156000 PIN-SAFETY.
- Set the ground-towing control lever in the normal position.
Page 3
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TORSION
PUSH PULL
TURNING POINT WITH RUBBER
B
F_AR_074001_1_0010202_01_02
Towing from the NLG

Towing Attachment
FIGURE-07-40-01-991-001-B01
Page 4
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TOWING LEVER
5G
CA
NORMAL POSITION
(NOSE WHEEL STEERING OPERATIONAL)
TOWING POSITION SAFETY PIN

(NOSE WHEEL STEERING DEACTIVATED) (TOWING POSITION)
F_AR_074001_1_0020101_01_00
Towing from the NLG

N/W-Steering Deactivation Electrical-Box 5GC
FIGURE-07-40-01-991-002-A01
Page 5
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 07-40-01-584-802-A01
Towing from the NLG with a Towbarless Tractor
1. General
This procedure gives details to push the aircraft rearward or to tow the aircraft forward using a
towbarless tractor on the NLG.
2. Inspections
- Make sure that the safety devices are installed on the landing gear, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-
A02.
- Make sure that the aircraft is stable, see AMM 05-57-00-200-801 or TASK 04-20-00-588-801-
A01.
- Make sure that the engine cowl are closed.
TABLE 1
Landing Gears
TASK 07-40-01-584-801-A01 TASK 07-40-01-584-801-A01-Towing from the NLG with a Towbar
AMM 05-57-00-200-801
AMM 31-60-00-860-801
AMM 29-00-00-863-802
TABLE 2
Page 6
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
5. Procedure
WARNING : WHEN YOU TOW THE AIRCRAFT WITH A TOWBARLESS TRACTOR, THE
PARKING BRAKE OR THE BRAKE PEDALS SHALL ONLY BE USED IN CASE OF
EMERGENCY. IF YOU APLLY THE PARKING BRAKE OR THE BRAKE PEDALS,
YOU CAN CAUSE OVERLOAD TO THE NLG, DAMAGE TO THE TOWBARLESS
TRACTOR AND INJURY TO THE PERSONEL. IF THIS OCCURS, YOU MUST
CONTACT AIRBUS.
CAUTION : WHEN YOU USE A TOWBARLESS TRACTOR, MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY
FULLY ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS PROCEDURE. IF YOU DO NOT, THE
TRACTOR CAN CAUSE IMPORTANT SCRAPING OR OTHER DAMAGE TO THE
NLG AND TO THE AIRFRAME STRUCTURE AROUND THE NLG.
CAUTION : BEFORE YOU TOW THE AIRCRAFT WITH A TOWBARLESS TRACTOR, MAKE
SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT OR THE TRACTOR HAS AN OVERSTEERING
WARNING SYSTEM.
Subtask 07-40-01-500-003-A01
A. Preparation
(1) If possible, do an EIS start procedure, see AMM 31-60-00-860-801.
(2) On the Nose Wheel Steering deactivation electrical-box 5GC (see TASK 07-40-01-584-801-
A01):
Subtask 07-40-01-500-004-A01
B. Installation of the Towbarless Tractor
CAUTION : AIRBUS STRONGLY RECOMMENDS THAT THE OPERATORS OF

TOWBARLESS TRACTORS CAREFULLY ALIGNS THE CLAMPING DEVICE
OF THE TRACTOR WITH THE NOSE LANDING GEAR AXIS. THE GAP
BETWEEN THE CRADLE AND THE TORQUE-LINK IS VERY SMALL AND A
MISALIGNMENT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE TORQUE-LINK PIN. A
SIMPLE ALIGNMENT DEVICE ON THE TRACTOR (MARKING, METAL
INDICATOR, ETC. SUPPLIED BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE
TOWBARLESS TRACTOR OR MANUFACTURED LOCALLY) CAN HELP THE
DRIVER.
(1) There are special approval procedures for towbarless tractors. Before towing, make sure
that the towbarless is approved for the towing of this aircraft. For more information on the
towbarless tractors, see the SIL 09-002.
(2) Set the aircraft type on the towbarless tractor, if necessary.
Page 7
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(3) Remove the wheel chocks from the nose landing gear wheels.
(4) Align the clamping device of the tractor with the NLG axis.
(5) Lock on and lift the NLG.
(6) Make sure that the nose landing gear is correctly on the center of the tractor platform and
cannot be disengaged from the tractor.
(7) Remove the wheel chocks from the main landing gear wheels.
Subtask 07-40-01-869-003-A01
3000 psi (206.8427 bar).
- If necessary, pressurize the blue hydraulic system (see AMM 29-00-00-863-802).
(2) On the panel 117VU, set the PARKING-BRK control-switch to OFF.
(3) Pressurize the blue hydraulic system during the towing operation (see AMM
29-00-00-863-802).
Subtask 07-40-01-584-002-A01
D. Towing

SUDDENLY.
LANDING GEAR.
During the towing operations, put:
NOTE : The shock absorber reaction can cause the aircraft to move forward and rearward
when you stop the wheels. Because of this, make sure that there is sufficient
space around the aircraft when you tow with the nose gear.
Page 8
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 07-40-01-869-004-A01
E. Close-up
(a) On the panel 117VU, set the PARKING-BRK control switch to ON.
(b) On the panel 312VU, on the triple pressure indicator:
3000 psi (206.8427 bar).
- If necessary, pressurize the blue hydraulic system, see AMM 29-00-00-863-802.
(3) Removal of the Towbarless Tractor.
(a) Remove the NLG from the towbarless tractor.
(b) Put the wheel chocks in position in front of and behind the nose landing gear wheels.
(c) Put the wheel chocks in position in front of and behind the main landing gear wheels.
(d) On the Nose Wheel Steering deactivation electrical-box 5GC (see TASK
07-40-01-584-801-A01):
- Remove the D23156000 PIN-SAFETY
Page 9
07-40-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-40-02 TOWING FROM THE MAIN LANDING GEAR
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 07-40-02-584-801-A01
Towing from the Main Landing Gear
1. General
This procedure gives details to tow the aircraft forward or rearward from the MLG.
2. Inspections
- Make sure that the safety devices are installed on the landing gears, see TASK 02-30-01-481-802-
A02.
- Make sure that the aircraft is stable, see TASK 04-20-00-588-801-A01 or AMM 05-57-00PB200.
- Make sure that the engine cowls are closed.
- Make sure that the ground is hard. If necessary, put down the applicable surface equipment:
movable taxiway plates, see 07-20-00.
- Only try to turn if the ground conditions let you.
- Do a detail visual inspection of the towing cables and attachments before you do this procedure.
98F09101002000 CABLE, TOWING-MLG
98F09103500000 CABLE, TOWING-MLG
TABLE 1
Landing Gears
07-20-00 07-20-00-PREPARING A ROADWAY
AMM 05-57-00PB200
AMM 31-60-00-860-801
Page 1
07-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
AMM 29-00-00-863-802
FIGURE 07-40-02-991-001-A FIGURE 07-40-02-991-001-A-Towing from the MLG
TABLE 2
5. Procedure
Subtask 07-40-02-500-001-A01
A. Preparation
(1) If possible do an EIS start procedure, see AMM 31-60-00-860-801.
(2) On the Nose Wheel Steering deactivation electrical box 5GC, see TASK 07-40-01-584-801-
A01.
Subtask 07-40-02-500-002-A01
B. Installation of the Towing Cable
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE GROUND SAFETY-LOCKS ARE CORRECTLY

INSTALLED ON THE LANDING GEAR. THIS PREVENTS UNWANTED
MOVEMENT OF THE LANDING GEAR.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT NO PERSONS ARE NEAR THE TOWING CABLES WHEN
THE TRACTOR APPLIES TENSION TO THE CABLES. DEATH OR INJURY
CAN OCCUR IF A CABLE BREAKS.
(1) Install the towing fitting on the applicable position (FWD or AFT), see FIGURE
07-40-02-991-001-A.
(2) Install the 98F09101002000 CABLE, TOWING-MLG or 98F09103500000 CABLE,
TOWING-MLG on the towing fitting of the MLG, see FIGURE 07-40-02-991-001-A.
(3) Connect the 98F09101002000 CABLE, TOWING-MLG or 98F09103500000 CABLE,
TOWING-MLG to the tractor.
Subtask 07-40-02-869-001-A01
3000 psi (206.8427 bar).
Page 2
07-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(2) On the panel 117VU, set the PARKING BRK control switch to OFF.
Subtask 07-40-02-584-001-A01
D. Towing

SUDDENLY.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT NO PERSONS ARE NEAR THE TOWING CABLES WHEN
THE TRACTOR APPLIES TENSION TO THE CABLES. DEATH OR INJURY
CAN OCCUR IF A CABLE BREAKS.
LANDING GEAR.
(2) During towing operations put:
WARNING : DO NOT USE A MANUAL NOSE WHEEL STEERING BAR DURING TOWING
FROM THE FRONT BECAUSE THE TOWING CABLES WILL BE NEAR THE
PERSON AT THE STEERING BAR. DEATH OR INJURY CAN OCCUR IF A
TOWING CABLE BREAKS.
(3) If possible, keep the tractor aligned with the aircraft centerline.
Subtask 07-40-02-869-002-A01
E. Close-Up
(a) Put the wheel chocks in position in front of and behind the wheels.
(b) On the panel 117VU, set the PARKING BRK control switch to ON.
(c) On the panel 312VU, on the triple pressure indicator:
3000 psi (206.8427 bar).
Page 3
07-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F

(3) Removal of the tooling
(a) Disconnect and remove the towing cable.
(b) On the Nose Wheel Steering deactivation electrical-box 5GC (see TASK
07-40-01-584-801-A01):
- Remove the D23156000 PIN-SAFETY.
Page 4
07-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
B
TOWING FITTING
B
F_AR_074002_1_0010101_01_02
Towing from the MLG

Towing Fitting (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-07-40-02-991-001-A01
Page 5
07-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
C A
A
FWD
B C
FWD
TOWING CABLE
F_AR_074002_1_0010102_01_00
Towing from the MLG

Installation of Towing Cable (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-07-40-02-991-001-A01
Page 6
07-40-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-40-03 TOWING WITH DEFLATED TIRES
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 07-40-03-584-801-A01
Towing with Deflated Tires
1. General
This procedure gives details and limitations to tow the aircraft when one or more tires are deflated on
one or more landing gears.
2. Inspections
Not applicable.
The steering angle must be kept to a limit when you tow the aircraft with one or more tires deflated
on one or more landing gears.
TASK 07-40-01-584-802-A01 TASK 07-40-01-584-802-A01-Towing from the NLG with a
Towbarless Tractor
TABLE 1
5. Procedure
Subtask 07-40-03-584-001-A01
A. Towing by Nose Gear
(1) One tire is deflated on one or more gears (a maximum of 4 deflated tires). Tow by the
nose gear only, see TASK 07-40-01-584-801-A01.
(a) Both nose gear tires inflated.
- The maximum permitted lateral angle of the towbar is plus or minus 40 degrees.
(b) One nose gear tire deflated.
- The maximum permitted lateral angle of the towbar is plus or minus 10 degrees.
(2) Two tires are deflated (one per axle) on any one main gear. Tow by the nose gear only, see
TASK 07-40-01-584-801-A01.
(a) Both nose gear inflated.
- The maximum deflection of the towbar is plus or minus 10 degrees.
Page 1
07-40-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Subtask 07-40-03-584-002-A01
B. Towing by Main Gear
(1) Two tires are deflated on the same axle or three tires are deflated on the main gear.
- Tow by the main gear only, see TASK 07-40-01-584-802-A01.
- The maximum permitted steering angle is plus or minus 50 degrees.
(2) Four tires are deflated on the same main gear.
- Tow by the main gear only, see TASK 07-40-01-584-802-A01.
- No deflection of the towbar is permitted.
- The towing speed must not be more than 5 km/h (3 mph).
Page 2
07-40-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-40-04 TOWING LOAD LIMITS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-40-04-001-A01
Load and Angle Limits
1. Towing
WARNING : OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING TOWING OR MOVEMENT OF THE

AIRCRAFT. MAKE SURE THAT THE PATH OF THE AIRCRAFT IS CLEAR. MAKE
SURE THAT NO PERSONS SIT OR STAND ON THE TOW BAR OR USE THE
TRACTOR AS TRANSPORT, THIS IS TO PREVENT THE RISK OF INJURY.

INCLUDED), EACH PERSON IN THE AIRCRAFT MUST BE IN A SEAT AND THE
SEAT BELT MUST BE FASTENED. IF THE SEAT BELT IS NOT FASTENED,
THERE IS A RISK OF INJURY IF THE AIRCRAFT STOPS SUDDENLY.
CAUTION : DO NOT TOW OR MOVE THE AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND IF THE ENGINE
COWLS ARE OPEN.
MOVEMENT OF THE AIRCRAFT WITH THE COWLS OPEN CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE COWLS AND THE NACELLE STRUCTURE.
It is recommended that you use a towbar with a damping system.
A. You can use the NLG towbar fitting to tow or push the aircraft:
- With maximum weight,
- With the engines between zero and idle.
B. You can use the MLG attachments to tow the aircraft:
- With the engines stopped,
- When it is bogged.
C. Do not tow the aircraft if the dimension H is more than 310 mm (12.2047 in), (see FIGURE
07-40-04-991-001-A). If you do so, you can cause damage to the cams that make the nose gear
wheels go back to the center position.
D. Keep a minimum of 3 m (9.84 ft) separation from the nose wheels, towbar and tractor while the
aircraft moves.
2. Speed Limits
The maximum permitted towing speed changes with the aircraft configuration.
A. Doors closed and locked or removed:
(1) For a tractor with a towbar, a maximum speed of 25 km/h (15.5 mph) is permitted.
(2) For a towbarless tractor, a maximum speed of 32 km/h (19.9 mph) is permitted.
Page 1
07-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
B. Passenger/Crew doors fully open and locked and/or cargo doors open in vertical position:
(1) The maximum permitted speed is 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
C. In wind conditions, calculate the permitted towing speed before towing:
(1) Measure the wind speed.
(2) Do a check of aircraft stability, see TBD or AMM 05-57-00-200-801.
(3) Substract measured wind speed from wind speed limit shown on the stability curve. This
gives the maximum permitted towing speed.
3. Approximate Towing Loads
See FIGURE 07-40-04-991-002-B.
NOTE : In all the formulas, MTW = Maximum Taxi Weight.

A. When you push the aircraft rearward with the engines at idles, you must add the engine thrust
resistance to the towing loads.
NOTE : The engine thrust resistance at ground idle is:

- RR: 1500 daN (for each engine in operation),
- PW: 1275 daN (for each engine in operation),
B. Use these coefficients for the friction between the tires of the tow tractor and the ground to
calculate the tractor weight:
- Dry concrete or asphalt: 0.80
- Wet asphalt: 0.75
- Wet concrete: 0.57
- Hard snow: 0.20
- Ice: 0.05
Minimum Tractor Weight = 6% MTW / (friction coefficient).
4. Limit Loads and Angles
See FIGURE 07-40-04-991-003-A.
A. In all the towing configurations, the safety pin locks the control lever on electrical-box in the
disengaged position.
B. The maximum permitted steering angle on each side of the aircraft centerline is:
- +/- 60 degrees with or without towbar.
C. During towing, the towing angle must not be more that then angle shown on the FWD NLG
doors.
D. Tow the aircraft (slowly and smoothly) with the main landing gear:
- The maximum towing angle in the vertical plane is 5 degrees.
- The NLG gives the limits for the maximum towing angle in the horizontal plane.
E. Use a towbar with:
- The towing shear pins, calibration 28620 daN (64340.3071 lbf) for the protection of the
landing gear against too high loads,
Page 2
07-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- The safety shear pin, calibration 3130m.daN (23082.59 lbf.ft) for the protection of the
landing gear against too high torsion.
F. Use:
- The tow special fork fitting and a cable to tow the main landing gear forward or rearward.
Attach these special fork fittings to the lugs at each end of the landing gear.
- The safety shear pin, calibration 51300 daN (115322 lbf) which comes with the two-
fitting/cable set.
Page 3
07-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_074004_1_0010101_01_00
Towing Limits
Maximum Extension of the NLG Shock Absorber
FIGURE-07-40-04-991-001-A01
Page 4
07-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TOWING FORCES
BREAKAWAY 6% MTW
ROLLING 3% MTW
BREAKAWAY 6% MTW
ON SLOPE + 1% MTW PER
1% SLOPE
ROLLING 3% MTW
ON SLOPE + 1% MTW PER
1% SLOPE
F_AR_074004_1_0020201_01_00
Towing Limits
Towing Forces
FIGURE-07-40-04-991-002-B01
Page 5
07-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CL
B B
B B
60° 60°
MAXIMUM
GEAR LOADS
daN lbf A
A 28 620 64 340
B 51 300 115 322
F_AR_074004_1_0030101_01_01
Towing Limits
Towing Loads and Angles
FIGURE-07-40-04-991-003-A01
Page 6
07-40-04 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-60 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT
07-60-00 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-60-00-001-A01
General
1. This section describes the moving of aircraft with damaged or missing landing gear.
If it is possible, the aircraft must always be moved the landing gear supporting the weight of the
aircraft.
Before moving the aircraft, you must verify the structural integrity of the landing gear and the
structural attachments in accordance with the landing gear inspection procedure 02-30-01.
For landing gears that are not correctly extended, see TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01 for information
on the manual extension of the landing gear.
If any of the landing gear are damaged, you must always try to repair or replace the damaged landing
gear. This could include:
- The repair of the existing landing gear,
- The installation of a replacement landing gear,
- The temporary bracing of the landing gear to support the weight of the aircraft.
The repair or replacement of damaged landing gear is the recommended solution if a replacement
landing gear is available and the structural attachments for the landing gear are not damaged.
If it is not possible to move the aircraft using its landing gears, then you must use a different support
system to move the aircraft, see 07-60-03. It may be necessary to use one of the following vehicles or
a combination of vehicles to move the aircraft.
- Flat bed trailers
- Movable cranes
- Specialist aircraft recovery transportation systems
- General purpose trucks
- Commercial transport equipment.
Moving the aircraft using aircraft recovery vehicles must be the last method to be used after all
other methods have been analyzed. When aircraft recovery transport vehicles are used, secondary
damage is possible.
Page 1
07-60-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-60-01 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT ON TRAILERS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-60-01-001-A01
Moving Damaged Aircraft on Trailers
1. If the Landing Gear cannot be made serviceable, the use of trailers gives a safe and correct method of
supporting the aircraft fuselage and/or the wings.
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE TRAILERS, AND ALL OTHER EQUIPMENT YOU USE
WITH THE TRAILERS, ARE SAFE FOR THE WEIGHT THEY MUST SUPPORT.
CAUTION : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE SUPPORTS. MAKE SURE THAT THE LOADS ON
THE AIRFRAME ARE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE LOADS (SKIN LOADING
LIMITS) WHEN YOU USE SUPPORTS. THE SUPPORTS APPLY LOADS THAT
DO NOT OCCUR IN NORMAL OPERATION.
CAUTION : SECONDARY DAMAGE CAN OCCUR WHEN YOU USE TRAILERS TO SUPPORT
AND MOVE THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION : DO NOT APPLY LOADS TO THE ENGINE NACELLE STRUCTURE BECAUSE

SECONDARY DAMAGE WILL OCCUR.
CAUTION : DO NOT APPLY LOADS TO THE FLAP-TRACK FAIRING STRUCTUE BECAUSE

SECONDARY DAMAGE WILL OCCUR
A. See 06-40-00 for the bearing area under the fuselage and wings.
B. You must inspect the aircraft structure for damage in the bearing areas. Make sure that the
structure is capable of supporting the weight of the aircraft on the trailers.
C. You can support the forward fuselage on a turntable, this will help to turn the aircraft during
the move. If a turntable is used, it must conform to the weight requirements and general aircraft
specifications to prevent secondary damage and assist in the removal of the aircraft.
D. Install supports between the aircraft and the trailer surface. These can be made of timber and
must be covered with padded material to avoid damage to the aircraft surfaces. The supports
that you use must be able to support the expected loading.
E. Materials such as mattresses, rubber padding, tires, pneumatic bags and sand bags can be used
as padding. It is important that the padding is arranged to follow the contour of the aircraft
surfaces, this will helps to spread the loads on the surface and to avoid point loads. Filler foam
can be used at the support areas to fill gaps and make a correct contoured support.
You must not exceed the allowable skin loading limits on the aircraft surfaces, see 06-40-00.
F. It is important that the supports (timber) and padding remain stable while you move the
aircraft. It may also be necessary to tie down the aircraft structure to the trailer to prevent
relative movement between the aircraft and the trailer.
Page 1
07-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
G. Some aircraft recovery trailers have hydraulically controlled supports, that conform to the
fuselage and wing contours.
H. Monitor the loads during all the moving operation.
Page 2
07-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
SOME TRAILERS
HAVE HYDRAULICALLY
CONTROLLED SUPPORTS
MAXIMUM
15 DEGREE TILT
HYDRAULIC PLATFORM
BOGIES FOR SMALLER
LOADS
CABLE AND CHAIN

CONNECTION
NOSE TRAILER
WITH ADJUSTABLE
TURNTABLE
F_AR_076001_1_0010101_01_00

Configuration of Trailers
FIGURE-07-60-01-991-001-A01
Page 3
07-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_076001_1_0020101_01_02
(PLYWOOD, PNEUMATIC LIFTING BAGS, TIRES, ETC)
TYPICAL TURNTABLE
TIEDOWN STRAP
PADDING MATERIALS
FLATBED TRAILER
FLATBED TRAILER

Typical Use of Trailers with Aircraft
FIGURE-07-60-01-991-002-A01
Page 4
07-60-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-60-02 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT WITH CRANES
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-60-02-001-A01
Moving Damaged Aircraft with Cranes
1. General
CAUTION : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE SUPPORTS. MAKE SURE THAT THE LOADS ON
THE AIRFRAME ARE LESS THAN THE ALLOWABLE LOADS (SKIN LOADING
LIMITS) WHEN YOU USE SUPPORTS. THE SUPPORTS APPLY LOADS THAT
DO NOT OCCUR IN NORMAL OPERATION.
THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION : MAKE SURE THAT THE CRANE YOU USE CAN LIFT THE ESTIMATED LOAD
PLUS THE WEIGHT OF THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT BEFORE YOU START TO
LIFT THE AIRCRAFT.
The principles outlined in this chapter are provided as a guide to assist an aircraft recovery.
See 06-50-00 for information on the use of cranes.
If it is possible, damaged landing gears must be repaired or replaced. This will allow the aircraft to be
moved with it’s own landing gear supporting the weight of the aircraft.
If it is not possible to repair or replace the damaged landing gear, an alternative method is to use a
mobile crane or a crawler crane to help move the aircraft.
NOTE : You must analyze other methods of supporting and moving the aircraft before using this
method.
If the aircraft is in this condition, then it is possible to use cranes and sling assembly to level and lift
the aircraft. The cranes can then be left in place to support and move the aircraft.
Roadways must be properly prepared to support the weight of the crane and the aircraft as they are
moved, see 07-20-00.
2. Moving the Aircraft with Cranes
The crane must be positioned close enough to the aircraft and the lifting point, to let the crane use
its lifting capacity safely.
Page 1
07-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
A. You must monitor and record the loads on the slings when you use this process.
B. The moveable cranes must begin to move at the same time, and must move steadily at the
same speed during the entire aircraft movement operation.
C. The person controlling the operation must be in constant contact with the crane
drivers/operators.
D. See 06-50-00 for tooling specification, procedures and limitations to level/lift the aircraft using
cranes.
Page 2
07-60-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
07-60-03 MOVING DAMAGED AIRCRAFT WITH SPECIALIZED EQUIPMENT
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 07-60-03-001-A01
Moving Damaged Aircraft with Specialized Vehicles
1. Specialized recovery vehicles include sledges and patent trailer systems made by different
manufacturers.
CAUTION : DO NOT APPLY LOADS OUT OF THE ALLOWABLE LIMITS BECAUSE

SECONDARY DAMAGE WILL OCCUR
CAUTION : DO NOT APPLY LOADS TO THE ENGINE NACELLE STRUCTURE BECAUSE

SECONDARY DAMAGE WILL OCCUR.
A. The sledge systems are simple systems that are used to support the aircraft while it is towed on
soft ground.
B. The patent trailer systems are complex systems and can be used to move damaged aircraft that
has no serviceable landing gear, see 07-60-01.
This type of trailer normally:
- Has hydraulically controlled supports that can conform to the fuselage and wing contours.
- Has a multi-wheel steering function.
- Can be linked with beams or cables to other trailers.
Page 1
07-60-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
08-00 POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
08-00-00 POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 08-00-00-001-A01
General
1. Records
Airbus recommends that you make records on the full recovery operation.
These records can help you:
- To make aircraft maintenance operations easier for the return to service
- To have a feedback of the recovery operation
- To have traceability after the recovery.
The records can include:
- The aircraft inspection report
- Results of loads and CG calculations
- The technique used to level/lift and move the aircraft
- Loads applied during the recovery operation
- ...
2. Post Recovery Inspections
If necessary, do the ”Inspection After Leaving Runway or Taxiway”, see AMM 05-51-24-200-801.
Page 1
08-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
APPENDIX
09-00 APPENDIX
09-00-00 APPENDIX
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-00-00-001-A01
Introduction
1. This chapter has the structure that follows:
A. General Information (09-10)
(1) General charts and formulae for metric and imperial measurement conversion.
(2) Definitions related to aircraft recovery (glossary).
(3) General aircraft dimensions (fuselage, wing and horizontal stabilizer stations, frames and
ribs, door sizes, ground clearances, ground service connections illustrations, etc.).
B. Recovery Preparation (09-20)
(1) Guides or planning charts not related to the aircraft type.
(2) Possible composition of the recovery team.
C. Tooling and Equipment (09-30)
(1) General aircraft recovery materials and equipment.
(2) Specific aircraft tooling and aircraft recovery kits.
(3) Aircraft Recovery Kits.
D. Calculation Worksheets (09-50)
(1) Weight and balance calculation worksheets.
Page 1
09-00-00 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10 GENERAL INFORMATION
09-10-01 UNITS AND CONVERSIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-01-002-A01
Units of Measurements
1. This topic gives the ISO and NON-ISO units used in this manual.
Length meters (m)
millimeters (mm)
Area square meters (m2)
Volume cubic meters (m3)
Weight kilograms (kg)
Density kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3)
kilograms per liter (kg/l)
Force Newtons (N)
Moment Newton-meters (N.m)
product of weight and length in kilogram-meters (kgm)
Pressure Pascals (Pa)
bars (bar)
Velocity meters per second (m/s)
kilometers per hour (km/h)
Capacity and Quantity liters (l)
Temperature degrees Celsius (˚C)
Angle radians (rad)
degrees (˚)
ISO and Derived Measurement System
TABLE 1
Length feet (ft)

inches (in)
Area square feet (ft2)
Volume cubic feet (ft3)
Weight pounds (lb)
Page 1
09-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Density pounds per cubic foot (lb/ft3)

pounds per US gallon (lb/US gal)
Force pound-force (lbf)
Moment pound-force feet (lbf.ft)
product of weight and length in pounds-inches (lb.in)
Pressure pounds per square inch (psi)
Velocity feet per seconds (ft/s)
miles per hour (mph)
Capacity and Quantity US gallons (US gal)
Temperature degrees Fahrenheit (˚F)
Angle radians (rad)
degrees (˚)
US Customary System
TABLE 2
Page 2
09-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-01-001-A01
Conversion Tables
1. This topic gives the conversion values to use for the conversion of units.
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
Meters (m) 39.37008 Inches (in)
Meters (m) 3.280840 Feet (ft)
Millimeters (mm) 0.03937008 Inches (in)
Millimeters (mm) 0.00328084 Feet (ft)
Length
Inches (in) 0.0254 Meters (m)
Inches (in) 25.4 Millimeters (mm)
Feet (ft) 0.3048 Meters (m)
Feet (ft) 304.8 Millimeters (mm)
Square meters (m2) 10.763910 Square feet (ft2)
Area
Square feet (ft2) 0.09290304 Square meters (m2)
Cubic meters (m3) 35.31466 Cubic feet (ft3)
Volume
Cubic feet (ft3) 0.02831685 Cubic meters (m3)
Kilograms (kg) 2.204622 Pounds (lb)
Weight
Pounds (lb) 0.4535924 Kilograms (kg)
Kilograms per liter (kg/l) 62.42797 Pounds per cubic foot (lb. ft3)
Kilograms per liter (kg/l) 8.3456459 Pounds per US gallon (lb/US gal)
Kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3) 0.06242797 Pounds per cubic foot (lb. ft3)
Kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3) 0.0083457 Pounds per US gallon (lb/US gal)
Density
Pounds per cubic foot (lb. ft3) 0.016018463 Kilograms per liter (kg/l)
Pounds per cubic foot (lb. ft3) 16.018463 Kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3)
Pounds per US gallon (lb/US gal) 0.119823 Kilograms per liter (kg/l)
Pounds per US gallon (lb/US gal) 119.8225188 Kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3)
Newtons (N) 0.2248089 Pound-forces (lbf)
Pound-forces (lbf) 4.448222 Newtons (N)
Force
Newtons (N) 10 Decanewtons (daN)
Decanewtons (daN) 0.1 Newtons (N)
Newton-meters (N.m) 0.7375621 Pound-force feet (lbf.ft)
Pound-force feet (lbf.ft) 1.355818 Newton-meters (N.m)
Moment
Newton-meters (N.m) 10 Decanewton-meters (daN.m)
Decanewton-meters (daN.m) 0.1 Newton-meters (N.m)
Page 3
09-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
Pascals (Pa) 0.0001450377 Pounds per square inch (psi)
Bars (bar) 14.50377 Pounds per square inch (psi)
Pressure
Pounds per square inch (psi) 6894.757 Pascals (Pa)
Pounds per square inch (psi) 0.06894757 Bars (bar)
Meters per second (m/s) 3.2808399 Feet per second (ft/s)
Meters per second (m/s) 2.2369 Miles per hour (mph)
Kilometers per hour (km/h) 0.9113 Feet per second (ft/s)
Kilometers per hour (km/h) 0.6214 Miles per hour (mph)
Feet per second (ft/s) 0.3048 Meters per second (m/s)
Feet per second (ft/s) 1.0973 Kilometers per hour (km/h)
Velocity Miles per hour (mph) Meters per second (m/s)
0.4470
Miles per hour (mph) 1.6093 Kilometers per hour (km/h)
Knots (kt) 1.852 Kilometers per hour (km/h)
Kilometers per hour (km/h) 0.5399568 Knots (kt)
Knots (kt) 1.150 Miles per hour (mph)
Miles per hour (mph) 0.86897 Knots (kt)
Capacity Liters (l) 0.264172 US gallons (US gal)
Quantity US gallons (US gal) 3.785412 Liters (l)
Conversion Table
TABLE 1
Temperature conversion:
- Temperature conversion from degrees Celsius (˚C) to degrees Fahrenheit (˚F):
˚F = 1.8 × ˚C + 32
- Temperature conversion from degrees Fahrenheit (˚F) to degrees Celsius (˚C):
˚C = 0.5555 × (˚F - 32)
Page 4
09-10-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-02 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-02-001-A01
Definition of Terms
1. General
The terms that follow are used in the ARM.
A. Aircraft Recovery
An aircraft recovery operation is the action of moving any aircraft that is disabled and unable to
move with its power or with the standard use of a correct tow tractor and standard tow bar,
but can be economically repairable.
Examples of aircraft recovery incidents are:
- One or more landing gears off the hard surface of a runway, taxiway or apron,
- Aircraft bogged down in mud, snow or sand,
- One or more landing gears retracted, collapsed, damaged, or missing.
B. Warnings, Cautions and Notes
These definition of these are as follow:
- WARNING: Calls attention to the use of materials, processes, methods, procedures or limits
that must be obeyed to prevent injury or death to persons.
- CAUTION: Calls attention to methods and procedures that must be obeyed to prevent
damage to equipment.
- NOTE: Calls attention to methods that make the job easier or give more information.
2. Weight Terms
A. Manufacturer Empty Weight (MEW)
The weight of the structure, power plant, systems, furnishings and other items of equipment,
part of a special aircraft configuration, with the fluids in closed systems (e.g. hydraulic fluid).
The weights of all operator items are not included.
B. Operator Items
These items include:
- Unusable fuel,
- Oil for engines, IDG and APU,
- Water for galleys and lavatories,
- Chemical fluids for waste tanks,
- Aircraft documents and tool kits,
- Passenger seats and life vests,
- Galley structures and fixed equipment,
- Catering,
- Flight and cabin crew and their baggage,
- Emergency equipment that includes:
Page 1
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
Evacuation aids, life rafts, portable oxygen bottles and stowage boxes, extinguishers,
megaphones, flash lights, axes, first aid kits, emergency radio beacons, fire resistant gloves
and smoke goggles, demonstration kits, life vests for crew and children.
C. Operational Empty Weight (OEW)
The OEW is the sum of the Manufacturer Empty Weight plus the operator items.
D. Dry Operating Weight (DOW)
The DOW is the total weight of an aircraft prepared for a special type of operation without all
the usable fuel and traffic load.
It is the sum of the OEW and the special items for the type of flight (e.g. catering, newspapers,
pantry equipment etc.).
E. Recoverable Empty Weight (REW)
The REW is the sum of the MEW and the weight of the different operator items which are part
of the aircraft. The REW does not include the crew and their baggage or catering equipment
and supplies.
F. Net Recoverable Weight (NRW)
The NRW is the REW of the aircraft without the missing or removed aircraft equipment and
components. It includes fuel, liquids and cargo remaining on board.
The applicable recovery scenario is based on the NRW.
G. Payload (P/L)
The payload is the weight of the passengers, cargo and baggage.
H. Center of Gravity (CG)
The CG is the point where the aircraft can balance if it hangs at that point. It is the point
where the aircraft weight is applied.
If more weight is put in a different point, it causes an unbalancing force which is the ”moment”.
In case of recovery action, the position of CG has to stay within certain predefined limits to
ensure aircraft general stability.
J. Reference Chord (RC) or Mean Aerodynamic Chord (MAC)
Usually the position of the CG is defined by a percentage of Reference Chord (%RC).
The Reference Chord is a reference line used in the design of the wing. Its position relative to
the wing and fuselage is accurately known. It represents the variation of position of the CG,
according to the weight and balance management or other parameters. The normal position of
the CG is considered at 25%RC. The position and dimensions of this reference are mentioned in
TASK 03-00-00-558-801-A01. These dimensions are specially dedicated to an aircraft type.
K. Maximum Design Landing Weight (MLW)
The MLW is the maximum permitted weight at which the aircraft can land.
L. Maximum Ramp Weight (MRW) / Maximum Taxi Weight (MTW)
The MRW / MTW is the maximum permitted weight for ground maneuvers, that include taxi
and run-up fuel.
Page 2
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
M. Maximum Takeoff Weight (MTOW)

The MTOW is the maximum permitted weight when the brakes are released for takeoff, or at
the start of the takeoff roll.
N. Maximum Zero Fuel Weight (MZFW)
The MZFW is the maximum operating weight without usable fuel.
P. Actual Zero Fuel Weight (AZFW)
The AZFW is the sum of the operational empty weight and payload.
The AZFW must never be more the maximum design zero fuel weight (MZFW).
Q. Engineered Lifting
An engineered lifting is a lifting of the aircraft in controlled conditions, with a predefined process
using specific GSE. Before this procedure is started, it is necessary to do:
- An accurate analysis of the requirements
- An accurate engineering planning and a risk/hazard assessment
- A lifting procedure approved by the local authority regulations.
Page 3
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-02-003-A01
Abbreviations
1. List of Abbreviations
The abbreviations that follow are used in the ARM.
A/C Aircraft
AC Aircraft Characteristics for Airport Planning
ACT Additional Center Tank
AD Aircraft Datum
AFRP Aramid Fiber Reinforced Plastic
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
ARM Aircraft Recovery Manual
ARWG Aircraft Recovery Working Group
ATA Air Transport Association of America
AZFW Actual Zero Fuel Weight
CBR California Bearing Ratio
CFRP Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic
CG Center of Gravity
CL Center Line
CLG Center Landing Gear
CLS Cargo Loading System
CLSM Cargo Loading System Manual
CRC Crew Rest Compartment
CTR Center
DBP Drawbar Pull
DOW Dry Operating Weight
ECAM Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring
EIS Electronic Instrument System
EWH External Wiring Harness
FD Fuselage Datum
FDL Fuselage Datum Line
FQI Fuel Quantity Indicator
FR Frame
FWD Forward
GFRP Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic
GPU Ground Power Unit
Page 4
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
GSE Ground Service Equipment

IATA International Air Transport Association
IATP International Airline Technical Pool
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IDG Integrated Drive Generator
INBD Inboard
INR Inner
IPC Illustrated Parts Catalog
L/G Landing Gear
LDG Landing
LDMCR Lower Deck Mobile Crew Rest
LGCIU Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit
LH Left Hand
LRE List of Radioactive and Hazardous Elements Manual
MAC Mean Aerodynamic Chord
MCDU Multipurpose Control & Display Unit
MEW Manufacturer’s Empty Weight
MFP Maintenance Facility Planning Manual
MID Middle
MLG Main Landing Gear
MLW Maximum Design Landing Weight
MMI Manual Magnetic Indicator
MRW Maximum Ramp Weight
MSN Manufacturer’s Serial Number
MTOW Maximum Design Take Off Weight
MTW Maximum Taxi Weight
MZFW Maximum Design Zero Fuel Weight
NAS Navy and Army Standard
NLG Nose Landing Gear
NRW Net Recoverable Weight
NWS Nose Wheel Steering
OEW Operating Empty Weight
OUTBD Outboard
P/BSW Push Button Switch
P/L Payload
PAX Passenger
PSU Passenger Service Unit
Page 5
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
RC Reference Chord
RCT Rear Center Tank
REW Recoverable Empty Weight
RH Right Hand
SRM Structural Repair Manual
STA Station
STGR Stringer
T Trim
TBD To Be Define / Determined
TBIL To Be Issued Later
TEM Illustrated Tool and Equipment Manual
THS Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer
TK Tank
TPIS Tire Pressure Indicating System
ULD Unit Load Device
W&B Weight and Balance
WBM Weight and Balance Manual
XFR Transfer
List of Abbreviations
TABLE 1
Page 6
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-02-002-A01
Aircraft Reference Axes
1. Definitions
See FIGURE 09-10-02-991-001-A
A. AD (Aircraft Datum)
Vertical plane (equation Y=0). It is shown as a line on XY and YZ drawings.
B. FD (Fuselage Datum)
Horizontal plane (equation Z=0). It is shown as a line (FDL) on XZ and YZ drawings.
C. Fuselage Datum Line (FDL)
View of FD plan on 2D drawings (XZ and YZ planes).
D. Center Line (C/L)
Intersection of AD and FD planes.
E. H-arm
Horizontal arm from X=0 in length unit.
F. Y-arm
Lateral arm Y=0 in length unit.
G. Z-arm
Vertical arm Z=0 in length unit.
Page 7
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
AD
+Z
+X
6.3825 m
(251.28 in)
7.000 m
(275.59 in)
+Y
F_AR_091002_1_0010101_01_02
Aircraft Reference Axes

General
FIGURE-09-10-02-991-001-A01
Page 8
09-10-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-03 AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-03-001-B01
General
1. This chapter gives the main dimensions of the A330-200F aircraft (see FIGURE 09-10-03-991-003-A
and FIGURE 09-10-03-991-004-A).
Page 1
09-10-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
58.82m
(192.98 ft)
8.80 m
(28.87 ft)
6.67 m 22.18 m
(21.88 ft) (72.77 ft)
57.51 m
(188.68 ft)
60.30 m
(197.83 ft)
19.40 m
(63.65 ft)
10.68 m
(35.04 ft)
18.74 m
(61.48 ft)
NOTE: RELATED TO AIRCRAFT ATTITUDE AND WEIGHT

F_AR_091003_1_0030101_01_01
Aircraft Dimensions
Side and Front View
FIGURE-09-10-03-991-003-A01
Page 2
09-10-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
58.36 m
(191.47 ft)
A=RR Trent 700: 18.06 m (59.25 ft)

PW4000: 18.37 m (60.28 ft)
F_AR_091003_1_0040101_01_02
Aircraft Dimensions
Top View
FIGURE-09-10-03-991-004-A01
Page 3
09-10-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-05 COMPOSITE MATERIALS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-05-001-A01
General
1. Types of Material
Some components and sections of the aircraft structure are made from composite materials, see
FIGURE 09-10-05-991-001-F. The types of materials used are:
- Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic (CFRP),
- Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic (GFRP),
- Aramid Fiber Reinforced Plastic (AFRP).
Page 1
09-10-05 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CARBON FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (CFRP)
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP)
ARAMID FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (AFRP)
F_AR_091005_1_0010601_01_00
Composite Materials
Location of Composite Materials on the External Surfaces of the Aircraft
FIGURE-09-10-05-991-001-F01
Page 2
09-10-05 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-06 FUSELAGE FRAMES AND H-ARM TABLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-06-001-D01
General
1. This chapter gives the H-Arm of each frame.
The H-arm is used to calculate the CG. The H-arm is the length of the lever arm from the above
datum point to the specific station. The datum point is at 6.3825 m (251.280 in) forward of the
radome.
Page 1
09-10-06 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR13B UPR
FR14 UPR
FR14B UPR
x=0 FR12A FR14C UPR
FR12 FR15B UPR
FR11A FR15C UPR
FR11 FR16A UPR
FR10A FR17
FR10 FR18
FR9
FR8
CL
FR1
FR2
6.3825 m FR3
(251.280 in) FR4 FR19
FR5 FR16A LWR
FR6 FR16 LWR
FR7 FR15A LWR
FR15 LWR
FR14A LWR
FR14 LWR
FR13A
FR13
H−ARM H−ARM H−ARM

FR FR FR
m (in) m (in) m (in)
NOSE 6.3825 (251.280) 11 10.1875 (401.083) 15 LWR 12.1155 (476.988)
1 7.6625 (301.673) 11A 10.4275 (410.532) 15A LWR 12.3595 (486.595)
2 7.9425 (312.697) 12 10.6675 (419.981) 15B UPR 12.5635 (494.626)
3 8.1495 (320.847) 12A 10.9075 (429.429) 15C UPR 12.8055 (504.154)
4 8.3555 (328.957) 13 11.1475 (438.878) 16 LWR 12.6035 (496.201)
5 8.5825 (337.894) 13A 11.3875 (448.327) 16A LWR 12.8495 (505.886)
6 8.8095 (346.831) 13B UPR 11.6125 (457.185) 16A UPR 13.0471 (513.666)
7 9.0365 (355.768) 14 LWR 11.6275 (457.776) 17 13.1535 (517.855)
8 9.2635 (364.705) 14 UPR 11.8375 (466.043) 18 13.3985 (527.500)
9 9.4905 (373.642) 14A LWR 11.8715 (467.382) 19 13.9285 (548.366)
10 9.7175 (382.579) 14B UPR 12.0795 (475.571)
10A 9.9525 (391.831) 14C UPR 12.3215 (485.099)
F_AR_091006_1_0080101_01_00
Fuselage Frames and H-arm

Section 11/12 (Sheet 1 of 6)
FIGURE-09-10-06-991-008-A01
Page 2
09-10-06 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR22
FR21 FR23
FR20 FR24
FR19 FR25
FR18 FR26
CL
H−ARM
FR
m (in)
18 13.3985 (527.500)
19 13.9285 (548.366)
20 14.4585 (569.233)
21 14.9885 (590.009)
22 15.5185 (610.965)
23 16.0485 (631.831)
24 16.5785 (652.697)
25 17.1085 (673.563)
26 17.6385 (694.430)
F_AR_091006_1_0080102_01_00

Section 13 (Sheet 2 of 6)
FIGURE-09-10-06-991-008-A01
Page 3
09-10-06 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR35
FR34 FR36
FR33 FR37
FR32
FR31 FR37.1
FR37.2
FR30
FR29 FR37.3
FR26 FR37.4
FR38
CL
H−ARM H−ARM
FR FR
m (in) m (in)
26 17.6385 (694.430) 36 21.8785 (861.359)
29 18.1685 (715.296) 37 22.4085 (882.225)
30 18.6985 (736.162) 37.1 22.9385 (903.091)
31 19.2285 (757.028) 37.2 23.4685 (923.957)
32 19.7585 (777.894) 37.3 23.9985 (944.823)
33 20.2885 (798.760) 37.4 24.5285 (965.689)
34 20.8185 (819.626) 38 25.0585 (986.556)
35 21.3485 (840.493)
F_AR_091006_1_0080103_01_00

FIGURE-09-10-06-991-008-A01
Page 4
09-10-06 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR47 FR49
FR45 FR51
FR43 FR53
FR41 FR53.2
FR40.2 FR53.4
FR40 FR53.6
FR39.1 FR53.8
FR38 FR54
CL
FR53.9
FR39 FR53.7
FR39.2 FR53.5
FR40.1 FR53.3
FR40.3 FR53.1
FR42 FR52
FR44 FR50
FR46 FR48
H−ARM H−ARM H−ARM H−ARM

FR FR FR FR
m (in) m (in) m (in) m (in)
38 25.0585 (986.556) 41 29.2985 (1153.485) 49 33.5432 (1320.598) 53.4 37.7973 (1488.083)
39 25.5885 (1007.422) 42 29.8285 (1174.351) 50 34.0756 (1341.559) 53.5 38.3273 (1508.949)
39.1 26.1185 (1028.288) 43 30.3585 (1195.217) 51 34.6079 (1362.516) 53.6 38.8573 (1529.815)
39.2 26.6485 (1049.154) 44 30.8885 (1216.083) 52 35.1403 (1383.476) 53.7 39.3873 (1550.681)
40 27.1875 (1070.374) 45 31.4185 (1236.949) 53 35.6726 (1404.433) 53.8 39.9173 (1571.547)
40.1 27.7085 (1090.886) 46 31.9485 (1257.816) 53.1 36.2050 (1425.394) 53.9 40.4475 (1592.421)
40.2 28.2385 (1111.752) 47 32.4785 (1278.682) 53.2 36.7373 (1446.350) 54 40.9773 (1613.280)
40.3 28.7685 (1132.619) 48 33.0109 (1299.642) 53.3 37.2673 (1467.217)
F_AR_091006_1_0080104_01_00

Section 15/21 (Sheet 4 of 6)
FIGURE-09-10-06-991-008-A01
Page 5
09-10-06 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR62 FR64
FR60 FR66
FR58 FR68
FR56 FR70
FR54 FR72
CL
FR71
FR55 FR69
FR57 FR67
FR59 FR65
FR61 FR63
H−ARM H−ARM H−ARM

FR FR FR
m (in) m (in) m (in)
54 40.9773 (1613.280) 61 44.6873 (1759.343) 68 48.3973 (1905.406)
55 41.5073 (1634.146) 62 45.2173 (1780.209) 69 48.9273 (1926.272)
56 42.0373 (1655.012) 63 45.7473 (1801.075) 70 49.4573 (1947.138)
57 42.5673 (1675.878) 64 46.2773 (1821.941) 71 49.9873 (1966.004)
58 43.0973 (1696.744) 65 46.8073 (1842.807) 72 50.5173 (1988.870)
59 43.6273 (1717.610) 66 47.3373 (1863.673)
60 44.1573 (1738.476) 67 47.8673 (1884.539)
F_AR_091006_1_0080105_01_00

Sections 16 and 17 (Sheet 5 of 6)
FIGURE-09-10-06-991-008-A01
Page 6
09-10-06 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR88 FR90
FR86 FR92
FR84 FR94
FR80 FR96
FR78 FR98
FR76 FR100
FR74 FR102
FR72 FR104A
FR106A
FR105A
FR103
FR101
CL FR99
FR97
FR95
FR93
FR73 FR91
FR89
FR75 FR87
FR77 FR85
FR79 FR83
H−ARM H−ARM H−ARM H−ARM

FR FR FR FR
m (in) m (in) m (in) m (in)
72 50.5173 (1988.870) 83 55.8133 (2197.374) 92 59.8313 (2355.536) 101 62.6043 (2464.736)
73 51.0473 (2009.736) 84 56.3393 (2218.083) 93 80.1193 (2366.902) 102 62.8893 (2475.957)
74 51.6533 (2033.594) 85 56.8663 (2238.831) 94 60.4193 (2378.713) 103 63.1743 (2487.177)
75 52.2593 (2057.453) 86 57.3923 (2259.539) 95 60.7193 (2390.524) 104A 63.3943 (2495.839)
76 52.8653 (2081.311) 87 57.9193 (2280.287) 96 61.0393 (2403.122) 105A 63.6143 (2504.500)
77 53.4713 (2105.169) 88 58.3693 (2298.004) 97 61.3593 (2415.721) 106A 63.8243 (2512.768)
78 54.0773 (2129.028) 89 58.8193 (2315.721) 98 61.6793 (2428.319)
79 54.6833 (2152.886) 90 59.2693 (2333.437) 99 61.9993 (2440.917)
80/82 55.2873 (2176.665) 91 59.6139 (2347.217) 100 62.3193 (2453.516)
F_AR_091006_1_0080107_01_00

Sections 18 and 19/19.1 (Sheet 6 of 6)
FIGURE-09-10-06-991-008-A01
Page 7
09-10-06 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-08 WING RIBS AND STATIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-08-001-A01
Wing Ribs and Stations
1. General
This chapter gives the Wing Ribs and Stations, see FIGURE 09-10-08-991-001-A.
The position of each Wing Rib is identified by a station (STA). All measurements are:
- At 90 degrees to Rib 1.
- Measured between Rib 1 and the intersection of each rib datum with the Front Spar datum at
the lower outside skin surface.
NOTE : The stations are given in centimeters with no conversion.
Page 1
09-10-08 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
2.793 m
AD (9.16 ft)
RIB1
WY RIB2
STA0 RIB3
STA73 RIB4
STA147 RIB5
STA221 RIB6 RIB7
STA291 RIB8
STA362 RIB9 RIB10
STA433
STA504 RIB11 RIB10A
STA568 RIB12
STA626 RIB14 RIB13
STA684 RIB15
RIB16
STA758
STA822 RIB17
STA886 RIB18
STA951 RIB19 RIB20 RIB21
STA1015
STA1079 RIB22
STA1144 RIB23
STA1208 RIB24
STA1272 RIB25
STA1337 RIB26
STA1401 RIB27
STA1465
STA1530 RIB28
STA1601 RIB29
STA1671 RIB30
STA1734 RIB31
STA1798 RIB32
STA1868 RIB33
STA1934 RIB34
A STA2000 RIB35
RIB36
STA2065
LH SHOWN STA2128 RIB37
RH SYMMETRICAL STA2191 RIB38
STA2253 RIB39
STA2316
NOTE: ALL STA NUMBERS ARE GIVEN IN cm STA2379
STATION REFERENCES GIVEN, APPLY STA2441
TO THE INTERSECTION OF THE RIB STA2504
DATUMS WITH THE FRONT SPAR DATUM STA2557
AT THE OUTSIDE SKIN SURFACE
F_AR_091008_1_0010101_01_01
Wing
Ribs and Stations
FIGURE-09-10-08-991-001-A01
Page 2
09-10-08 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-09 HORIZONTAL STABILIZERS RIBS AND STATIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-09-001-A01
General
1. This chapter gives the horizontal stabilizer ribs and stations, see FIGURE 09-10-09-991-001-A.
The position of each horizontal stabilizer rib is identified with a station (STA) which is the distance
between the rib and RIB1 datum.
NOTE : The stations are given in centimeters with no conversion.
Page 1
09-10-09 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
RIB1
STA0 RIB2
RIB3 RIB4
RIB5
STA46
RIB6
STA92 RIB7
RIB8
STA149 RIB9
STA179 RIB10
STA237 RIB11
STA285 RIB12
STA333 RIB13
STA378
RIB14
STA426
STA474 RIB15
STA522 RIB16
STA570 RIB17
STA618 RIB18
STA666
RIB19
STA714
A STA762
RIB20
LH SHOWN STA810 RIB21

RH SYMMETRICAL STA858
STA906
STA972
NOTE: ALL STA NUMBERS ARE GIVEN IN cm

F_AR_091009_1_0010101_01_01
Horizontal Stabilizer
Ribs and Stations
FIGURE-09-10-09-991-001-A01
Page 2
09-10-09 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-10 DOOR SIZES AND LOCATIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-10-001-A01
General
1. This chapter gives data related to the aircraft doors. There are different types of door installed on the
aircraft. The different doors are given in the sections that follow:
- For the Passenger/Crew doors, see DESC 09-10-10-002-A01.
- For the Cargo Compartment doors, see DESC 09-10-10-003-A01.
- For the Nose Landing Gear doors, see DESC 09-10-10-004-A01.
- For the Main Landing Gear doors, see DESC 09-10-10-005-A01.
- For the APU doors, see DESC 09-10-10-006-A01.
Page 1
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-10-002-A01
Passenger/Crew Doors and Emergency Exit Doors
1. General
This section gives data related to the identification, location and clearances of the forward crew
doors.
2. Location
For the location of the forward crew doors, see FIGURE 09-10-10-991-001-B.
3. Clearances
For the clearances of the forward crew doors, see FIGURE 09-10-10-991-002-B.
Page 2
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_091010_1_0010202_01_00
(19.19 ft)
FORWARD CREW DOOR

5.85 m
Forward Crew Doors

Location
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-001-B01
Page 3
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
2.43 m 1.07 m
(95.67 in) (42.13 in)
0.64 m
(25.20 in)
CL
3.30 m
(129.92 in)
0.75 m
(29.53 in)
CRITICAL
CLEARANCE
LIMIT
3.00 m
(118.11 in)
1.93 m
(75.98 in)
CL
0.045 m
(1.77 in)
SEE 09−10−11
CL
F_AR_091010_1_0020201_01_01
Forward Crew Doors

Clearances
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-002-B01
Page 4
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-10-003-A01
Cargo Compartment Doors
1. General
This section gives data related to the identification, location and clearances of the different cargo
compartment doors, see FIGURE 09-10-10-991-006-B. There are four cargo compartments:
- The forward cargo compartment.
- The aft cargo compartment.
- The bulk cargo compartment.
- The main deck cargo compartment.
Page 5
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
**ON A/C A330-200F
MAIN DECK
CARGO DOOR
9.92 m
(32.55 ft)
BULK CARGO AFT CARGO FORWARD CARGO

COMPARTMENT COMPARTMENT COMPARTMENT
Location (Sheet 1 of 5)
DOOR DOOR DOOR
@A330-200F
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-006-B01
09-10-10
9.53 m
(31.27 ft)
38.98 m
(127.89 ft)
42.01 m
(137.83 ft)
F_AR_091010_1_0060201_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 6
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CL
2.70 m
(106.30 in) SEE 09−10−11
CL
CL
2.04 m
1.70 m
(80.31 in)
(66.93 in)
5.27 m
(207.48 in)
A A
F_AR_091010_1_0060202_01_00

Clearances - Forward Cargo Compartment Door (Sheet 2 of 5)
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-006-B01
Page 7
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CL
CL
2.78 m
(109.45 in) SEE 09−10−11
A
CL
CL
2.03 m
1.68 m
(79.92 in)
(66.14 in)
5.19 m
(204.33 in)
A A
F_AR_091010_1_0060203_01_00

Clearances - Aft Cargo Compartment Door (Sheet 3 of 5)
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-006-B01
Page 8
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CL
CL
0.95 m 1.11 m
SEE 09−10−11
(37.40 in) (43.70 in)
A
CL
CL
1.41 m
1.07 m (55.51 in)
(42.13 in)
A A
F_AR_091010_1_0060204_01_00

Clearances - Bulk Cargo Compartment Door (Sheet 4 of 5)
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-006-B01
Page 9
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
PW = 8.45 m (332.68 in)

4.07 m RR = 8.13 m (320.08 in)
(160.24 in)
A
3.69 m
(145.28 in)
SEE 09−10−11
A
4.60 m
(181.1 in)
3.36 m 2.58 m
(132.28 in) (101.57 in) 2.44 m
(96.06 in)
A A
F_AR_091010_1_0060205_01_01

Clearances - Main Deck Cargo Compartment Door (Sheet 5 of 5)
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-006-B01
Page 10
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-10-004-A01
Nose Landing Gear Doors
1. General
This section gives data related to the location and clearances of the nose landing gear doors. The
nose landing gear has two pair of doors, the forward NLG doors and the rear NLG doors.
2. Location and Clearances
For the location and clearances of the nose landing gear doors, see FIGURE 09-10-10-991-010-F.
Page 11
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
0.61 m
2.41 m (24.02 in)
(94.88 in)
1.38 m
(54.33 in)
0.64 m
(25.20 in) 2.00 m
0.64 m
(78.74 in)
(25.20 in)
F_AR_091010_1_0100601_01_01
Door Sizes and Locations

Nose Landing Gear Doors
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-010-F01
Page 12
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-10-005-A01
Main and Center Landing Gear Doors
1. General
This section gives data related to the location and clearances of the main landing gear doors, see
FIGURE 09-10-10-991-011-B.
Page 13
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CL
26.79 m 3.96 m
(87.88 ft) (155.91 in)
CL
1.56 m
(61.42 in)
Z=2 m (78.74 in)
3.03 m
(119.29 in)
°
81
2
(92 .34 m
.13
in)
1.10 m
(43.31 in)
2.70 m 0.23 m
(106.30 in) (9.06 in)
GROUND LINE
A
LH SHOWN
RH SYMMETRICAL
F_AR_091010_1_0110201_01_01
Location and Clearances

Main Landing Gear Doors
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-011-B01
Page 14
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-10-006-A01
APU Doors
1. General
This section gives data related to the location and clearances of the APU doors.
2. Location and Clearances
For the location and clearances of the APU doors see FIGURE 09-10-10-991-014-A.
Page 15
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR95
FR101
CL
6.55 m
5.83 m (21.49 ft)
(19.13 ft)
F_AR_091010_1_0140101_01_00
Location and Clearances

APU Doors
FIGURE-09-10-10-991-014-A01
Page 16
09-10-10 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-11 AIRCRAFT GROUND CLEARANCES
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-11-001-A01
General
1. This section gives the height of various points of the aircraft, above the ground, for different aircraft
configurations.
Dimensions in the tables are approximate and will vary with tire type, W&B and others special
conditions.
The dimensions are given for:

- the basic aircraft OWE with a mid CG,
- the MRW for the highest weight variant with a FWD CG and a AFT CG,
- the MRW for the heaviest weight variant with a FWD CG and a AFT CG,
- aircraft on jacks, FDL at 6.5 m (21.33 ft).
NOTE : Passenger and cargo door ground clearances are measured from the center of the door sill
and from floor level.
For the ground clearances of the:

- Basic ground clearances, see FIGURE 09-10-11-991-001-B.
- Extended leading edge slats, see FIGURE 09-10-11-991-002-A.
- Extended trailing edge flaps, see FIGURE 09-10-11-991-003-A.
- Extended spoilers, see FIGURE 09-10-11-991-004-A.
- Ailerons in the down position, see FIGURE 09-10-11-991-005-A.
- Ailerons in the up position, see FIGURE 09-10-11-991-006-A.
- Flap tracks with the flaps extended, see FIGURE 09-10-11-991-007-A.
Page 1
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
GROUND
LINES
Z E1 E4 C1 E5 R H E6 C2 J VU M
E2 E3
DOOR SILL A B D K Y
HEIGHTS
P N O
V U T S
R
HEIGHT FROM GROUND HEIGHT FROM GROUND

m ft m ft
A 4.98 16.34 K 3.52 11.55
B 3.11 10.20 M 17.41 8.69
C1 8.06 26.44 N 7.80 10.43
C2 8.44 27.69 O 8.31 25.82
D 5.06 16.60 P 9.23 6.53
E1 3.07 10.07 R (PW) 1.13 3.74
E2 2.39 7.84 R (RR) 1.06 15.03
E3 2.22 7.28 S 2.74 8.99
E4 2.42 7.94 T 2.98 9.78
E5 2.47 8.10 U 2.92 9.58
E6 2.70 8.86 V 3.02 9.91
H 2.16 7.09 VU 7.92 25.98
J 5.55 18.21 Y 3.61 11.84
Z 6.22 20.41
NOTE: THE DISTANCES GIVEN IN THE GROUND CLEARANCES CHARTS ARE REFERENCE DISTANCES
CALCULATED FOR A/C WEIGHT AND CG CONDITIONS
THE CONDITIONS USED IN THE CALCULATIONS ARE MAXIMUM A/C WEIGHT (MINIMUM GROUND
CLEARANCES) AND A TYPICAL A/C MAINTENANCE WEIGHT (TYPICAL GROUND CLEARANCES
FOR MAINTENANCE)
PASSENGER AND CARGO DOOR CLEARANCES ARE MEASURED FROM THE CENTER OF THE DOOR
SILL AND FROM FLOOR LEVEL.
F_AR_091011_1_0010201_01_03
Aircraft Ground Clearances

Basic Ground Clearances
FIGURE-09-10-11-991-001-B01
Page 2
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
K L M N P
E F G H J
B C D
A

m ft m ft
A 3.46 11.35 H 5.30 17.39

B 4.25 13.94 J 5.37 17.62
C 4.28 14.04 K 5.65 18.54
D 4.65 15.26 L 5.65 18.54
E 4.65 15.26 M 5.91 19.39
F 4.99 16.37 N 5.91 19.39
G 4.99 16.37 P 6.16 20.21
F_AR_091011_1_0020101_01_00

Leading Edge Slats - Extended
FIGURE-09-10-11-991-002-A01
Page 3
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A
B C
D
HEIGHT FROM GROUND

m ft
A 5.21 17.09
B 4.00 13.12
C 4.00 13.12
D 2.71 8.89
F_AR_091011_1_0030101_01_00

Trailing Edge Flaps - Extended
FIGURE-09-10-11-991-003-A01
Page 4
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A B CD E F G H J K L M

m ft m ft
A 6.60 21.65 G 6.12 20.08

B 6.44 21.13 H 5.93 19.46
C 6.44 21.13 J 5.93 19.46
D 6.29 20.64 K 5.72 18.77
E 6.29 20.64 L 5.31 17.42
F 6.12 20.08 M 4.76 15.62
F_AR_091011_1_0040101_01_00

Spoilers - Extended
FIGURE-09-10-11-991-004-A01
Page 5
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A B C D
HEIGHT FROM GROUND

m ft
A 6.30 20.67
B 5.83 19.13
C 5.83 19.13
D 5.47 17.95
F_AR_091011_1_0050101_01_00

Ailerons - Down
FIGURE-09-10-11-991-005-A01
Page 6
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A B C D
HEIGHT FROM GROUND

m ft
A 6.85 22.47
B 6.58 21.59
C 6.58 21.59
D 6.38 20.93
F_AR_091011_1_0060101_01_00

Ailerons - Up
FIGURE-09-10-11-991-006-A01
Page 7
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A B C D
HEIGHT FROM GROUND

m ft
A 4.08 13.39
B 3.73 12.24
C 3.48 11.42
D 2.95 9.68
F_AR_091011_1_0070101_01_00

Flap Track Fairings - Flaps Extended
FIGURE-09-10-11-991-007-A01
Page 8
09-10-11 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-12 AIRCRAFT GROUND SERVICE CONNECTIONS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-12-001-A01
General
1. This chapter gives data about the ground service connections of the aircraft.
See FIGURE 09-10-12-991-001-B for the ground service connections general layout.
This chapter gives data about the systems that follow:
- Hydraulic System, see DESC 09-10-12-002-A01,
- Electrical System, see DESC 09-10-12-003-A01,
- Fuel System, see DESC 09-10-12-004-A01,
- Potable Water System, see DESC 09-10-12-005-A01,
- Waste Water Disposal System, see DESC 09-10-12-006-A01.
Page 1
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
15 1 2 5 6 2 16
9
1 2 14 13 2
3 10
15 4 16
12
5 11
6
7
8
1 − EXTERNAL POWER PANEL 9 − YELLOW GROUND CONNECTOR

2 − REMOTE WATER DRAIN 10 − GREEN GROUND CONNECTOR
3 − LOW PRESSURE AIR GROUND CONNECTOR 11 − BLUE GROUND CONNECTOR
4 − HIGH PRESSURE AIR GROUND CONNECTORS 12 − AIR CHARGING FOR HYDRAULIC ACCUMULATORS
FOR ENGINE STARTING 13 − REFUEL/DEFUEL CONTROL PANEL
5 − IDG OIL FILLING 14 − POTABLE WATER SERVICE PANEL
6 − ENGINE OIL FILLING 15 − WASTE SERVICE PANEL
7 − PRESSURE REFUEL/DEFUEL COUPLING 16 − APU OIL FILLING
8 − OVERWING REFUEL COUPLING
F_AR_091012_1_0010201_01_00
Ground Service Connections

General Layout
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-001-B01
Page 2
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-12-002-A01
Hydraulic System
1. Access
This section gives data related to the location of the ground service connections.
Position from Aft Position from Aircraft Centerline Height from
Access
of Nose LH Side RH Side Ground
Green Hydraulic
Ground Service 41.30 m 1.34 m 2.23 m
-
Panel (135.49 ft) (4.39 ft) (7.31 ft)
Access Door 197CB
Yellow Hydraulic
-
Panel (116.14 ft) (4.26 ft) (6.39 ft)
Access Door 196BB
Blue Hydraulic
-
Panel (112.89 ft) (4.19 ft) (6.36 ft)
Access Door 195BB
Ground Service Panels
TABLE 1
NOTE : Distances are approximate.

2. Technical Specifications
This section gives data related to the specifications of the ground service connections.
A. Ground Test
Reservoir Pressurization
On each ground service panel:
- One Connector AE96997M (delivery).
- One Connector AE96996P (suction).
B. Reservoir Filling
On the Green system ground service panel:
- One Connector AE96993E, for pressurized supply.
- One handpump filling connection for unpressurized (suction) supply.
Page 3
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

FR53.5
FR53.4
A GND CNCTR
PRESS GAGE NITROGEN CHARGING
G POWER ACCU G POWER ACCU
LEVER HAND
PUMP
HYD
RSVR FILLING
ADJUSTMENT
INDICATOR
MAN SELECTOR
VALVE−RSVR
FILLING
GND CNCTR−SELF
FILTER−RSVR SEALLING RSVR
FILLING
FILLING
RSVR
FILLING VALVE HAND PUMP
RSVR FILLING
GND CNCTR−SELF
SEALING G DELIVERY
GND CNCTR−SELF VALVE−MAN
DEPRESS G−RSVR
A
SEALING G SUCTION
F_AR_091012_1_0020101_01_01

Green System Ground Service Panel
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-002-A01
Page 4
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR44
FR45
GND CNCTR−SELF
CHARGES VALVES VALVE−MAN SEALING,
PARK BRK ACCU DEPRESS,B RSVR B DELIVERY
PRESS GAGES
PARK BRK ACCU
PRESS CAGE
B POWER ACCU
GND CNCTR GND CNCTR

GND CNCTR A SELF−SEALING, GND CNCTR
NITROGEN SELF−SEALING,
B SUCTION SELF−SEALING, G RSVR PRESS
CHARGING B/Y RSVR PRESS
B POWER ACCU
F_AR_091012_1_0030101_01_00

Blue System Ground Service Panel
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-003-A01
Page 5
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR46
FR47
SIGHT
HAND PUMP GLASS
CARGO DOORS,Y RAT STOW PANEL
CARGO DOOR
SELECTOR MANIFOLD
GND CNCTR−SELF
SEALING,Y SUCTION
PRESS GAGE
VALVE−MAN Y POWER ACCU
DEPRESS,Y RSVR
GND CNCTR
NITROGEN CHARGING
GND CNCTR−SELF Y POWER ACCU
A SEALING, Y DELIVERY
F_AR_091012_1_0140101_01_00

Yellow System Ground Service Panel
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-014-A01
Page 6
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-12-003-A01
Electrical System
1. Access
Access
External Power 7.20 m 2.29 m
Receptacle (23.62 ft) on centerline (7.51 ft)
TABLE 1

A. External Power Receptacles:
- Two Standard ISO R461 Receptacles - 90 KVA each.
B. Power Supply:
- Three Phases, 115 V, 400 Hz.
C. Electrical Connectors for Servicing:
- AC Outlets: HUBBEL 5258.
- DC Outlets: HUBBEL 7472.
- Vacuum Cleaner Outlets: HUBBEL 5258.
Page 7
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
925 VU GROUND CONNECTOR
F_AR_091012_1_0040101_01_00

External Power Receptacles
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-004-A01
Page 8
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-12-004-A01
Fuel System
1. Access
Access
Refuel/Defuel 31.10 m 0.80 m 1.90 m
Integrated Panel -
(102.03 ft) (2.62 ft) (6.23 ft)
Access Door 198DB
Refuel/Defuel
Coupling, Left 26.80 m 12.60 m 5.10 m
-
Access Door 522HB (87.92 ft) (41.33 ft) (16.73 ft)
(Optional)
Refuel/Defuel 26.80 m 12.60 m 5.10 m
Coupling, Right -
(87.92 ft) (41.33 ft) (16.73 ft)
Access Door 622HB
Overwing gravity 31.30 m 17.2 m 17.2 m 6.10 m
refuel cap (102.68 ft) (56.43 ft) (56.43 ft) (20.01 ft)
TABLE 1

A. Refuel/Defuel Couplings:
- Right wing: two standard ISO R45, 2.5 in.
- Left wing: two standard ISO R45, 2.5 in.
B. Refuel Pressure:
- Max. pressure: 3.45 bar (50 psi).
C. Refuel Flow:
- 1580 l/minute (417 U.S gal/minute) per connection.
Page 9
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
HIGH LEVEL OVERFLOW

L OUTER TK L INNER TK CTR TK TRIM TK R INNER TK R OUTER TK L TT R
HI LEVEL TRANSF. VALVE

INC TEST
1b kg OPEN
L INR. CENTER R INR. x 1000 PRESELECTED LOAD
CKPT
END DEC CLOSED
L OUTER TRIM R OUTER ACTUAL
PWR APU EMERG.
MODE SELECT REFUEL/DEFUEL VALVES
L OUTER TK L INNER TK CTR TK TRIM TK R INNER TK R OUTER TK SUPPLY
REFUEL OPEN NORM SHUT
OFF NORM DOWN
SHUT
DEFUEL
BAT

F_AR_091012_1_0080101_01_02

Refuel/Defuel Panel
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-008-A01
Page 10
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
A A
REFUEL/DEFUEL COUPLING CAP
REFUEL/DEFUEL COUPLINGS
REFUEL/DEFUEL COUPLING CAP A
F_AR_091012_1_0090101_01_00

Refuel/Defuel Couplings
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-009-A01
Page 11
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
ARROW PAINTED
GROUND CONNECTION ON TOP SKIN
OVERWING REFUEL ADAPTOR CAP

A
F
W
D
F_AR_091012_1_0150101_01_00

Gravity Refuel Couplings
FIGURE-09-10-12-991-015-A01
Page 12
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-12-005-A01
Potable Water System
1. Access
Access
Potable Water 14.03 m 0.76 m 2.64 m
Ground Service -
(46.03 ft) (2.49 ft) (8.66 ft)
Panel
Drain Panel 6.10 m 1.70 m 3.07 m
-
(20.01 ft) (5.58 ft) (10.07 ft)
TABLE 1

A. Connections
(1) On the ground service panel :
- One heated 3/4 in. quick release filling connection.
- One heated 3/4 in. overflow and discharge connection.
- One ground pressurization connection.
(2) On drain panel:
- One standard 3/4 in. drain connection with back-up mechanical control.
B. Capacity
- 100 l (26 US gal).
C. Filling Pressure
- Filling Pressure : 3.45 bar (50 psi).
- Flow rate:45 l/minute (12 US gal/minute).
Page 13
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-12-006-A01
Waste Water Disposal-System
1. Access
Access
Waste Water Ground 5.61 m 1.43 m
-
2.95 m
Service Panel 1 (18.41 ft) (4.69 ft) (9.68 ft)
Waste Water Ground 6.10 m 1.69 m
-
3.15 m
Service Panel 2 (20.01 ft) (5.54 ft) (10.33 ft)
TABLE 1

A. Connections
Firs panel
- One standard Roylyn 1 in. flushing and filling connection.
Second panel
- One standard Taco Type valve 4 in. draining connection.
B. Capacity waste tanks
- 35 l (9 US gal).
C. Chemical fluid
- 9.5 l (3 US gal)
Page 14
09-10-12 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-13 AIRCRAFT GROUNDING POINTS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-13-001-A01
Grounding Points
1. Access
Access
NLG 6.67 m 1.40 m
(21.88 ft) On Centerline (4.59 ft)
LH MLG 28.37 m 5.34 m 1.50 m
(93.08 ft) (17.52 ft) (4.92 ft)
RH MLG 28.37 m 5.34 m 1.50 m
(93.08 ft) (17.52 ft) (4.92 ft)
Grounding Points Locations
TABLE 1
Page 1
09-10-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
GROUNDING A
POINT
GROUNDING
POINT
NOSE GEAR MAIN GEAR
LANDING
GEAR
GROUNDING
POINT
GROUND CABLE
A (OPTIONAL)
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
F_AR_091013_1_0010101_01_00
Grounding Point
Location
FIGURE-09-10-13-991-001-A01
Page 2
09-10-13 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-14-001-A01
General
1. This chapter gives data related to the location, dimensions and load capacity of the different cargo
compartments according to the Standard Layout. The aircraft has four cargo compartments, located
within the main and lower decks.
All compartments may be used independently of the main deck cargo compartment configurations
within the overall weight and performance limitations of the aircraft.
The main deck of the aircraft has one cargo compartment. The lower deck of the aircraft has three
cargo compartments. These compartments are given in the sections that follow:
- For the Main Deck Cargo Compartment, see DESC 09-10-14-005-A01.
- For the Forward Cargo Compartment, see DESC 09-10-14-002-A01.
- For the Aft Cargo Compartment, see DESC 09-10-14-003-A01.
- For the Bulk Cargo Compartment, see DESC 09-10-14-004-A01.
The main, forward and aft cargo compartments can have different types of Unit Load Devices
(ULDs) loaded. The bulk cargo compartment, Standard Layout, does not have ULDs loaded but has
luggage and/or bulk cargo. It will also provide transportation for live animals. The load capacity of
the four cargo compartments comprises a
- containerized and bulk volume of: 381.38 m3 (13 468.31 ft3), or
- palletized and bulk volume of: 438.96 m3 (15 501.73 ft3).
NOTE : See your customized WBM for accurate data related to the aircraft configuration.
The different types of ULDs that are normally loaded are:
- Half size (60.4 in x 61.4 in), maximum gross weight - 1 587 kg (3 500 lb).
- Full size (60.4 in x 125 in), maximum gross weight - 3 174 kg (7 000 lb).
- Pallet (88 in x 125 in), maximum gross weight - 4 626 kg (10 200 lb).
- Pallet (96 in x 125 in), maximum gross weight - 5 103 kg (11 250 lb).
Page 1
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-14-002-A01
Forward Cargo Compartment
1. General
This section gives data related to the location, dimensions and load capacity of the forward cargo
compartment.
2. Location and Dimensions
For the location and dimensions of the forward cargo compartment, see FIGURE 09-10-14-991-001-C.
3. Load Capacity
The compartment has a maximum load capacity of approximately 18 869 kg (41 600 lb).
The usable cargo volume for the different ULD are:
- Usable containerized volume of approximately - 62.6 m3 (2 212 ft3), based on an LD3 container of
- 4.47 m3 (158 ft3).
- Usable palletized volume of approximately - 46.1 m3 (1 628 ft3), based on a 96 x 125 inch pallet
of - 11.52 m3 (407 ft3), loaded to a height of 1.62 m (5.3 ft).
Page 2
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR20 FR39.1
DEPENDING ON A/C CONFIGURATION
FR39.1
MAX 4.15 m
(13.62 ft)
FR25
FR20
MAX 11.66 m
(38.30 ft)
MAX 3.18 m
(10.43 ft)
MAX 1.71 m
(5.61 ft)
F_AR_091014_1_0010301_01_00
Cargo Compartments
Location and Dimensions - Forward Cargo Compartment
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-001-C01
Page 3
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-14-003-A01
Aft Cargo Compartment
1. General
This section gives data related to the location, dimensions and load capacity of the aft cargo
compartment.
For the location and dimensions of the aft cargo compartment, see FIGURE 09-10-14-991-003-C.
3. Load Capacity
The compartment has a maximum load capacity of approximately 15 241 kg (33 600 lb).
The usable cargo volume for the different ULD are:
- Usable containerized volume of approximately - 53.69 m3 (1 896 ft3), based on an LD3 container
of - 4.47 m3 (158 ft3).
- Usable palletized volume of approximately - 46.1 m3 (1 628 ft3), based on a 96 x 125 inch pallet
of - 11.52 m3 (407 ft3), loaded to a height of 1.62 m (5.3 ft).
Page 4
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR53.2 FR66
FR66
FR65
FR59A
MAX 4.15 m
(13.62 ft)
FR53.2
MAX 10.19 m
(33.43 ft)
MAX 3.18 m
(10.43 ft)
MAX 1.67 m
(5.48 ft)
F_AR_091014_1_0030301_01_00
Cargo Compartments
Location and Dimensions - Aft Cargo Compartment
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-003-C01
Page 5
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-14-004-A01
Bulk Cargo Compartment
1. General
This section gives data related to the location, dimensions and load capacity of the bulk cargo
compartment. The compartment has removable divider, door area and partition nets, see FIGURE
09-10-14-991-015-C. The floor of the compartment has some tie down points that have a maximum
load capacity of 8 900 N (2 000 lbf).
For the location and dimensions of the bulk cargo compartment, see FIGURE 09-10-14-991-016-C.
3. Load Capacity
The compartment has a maximum load capacity of approximately:
- 3 468 kg (7 645 lb) and a maximum cargo volume of 19.7 m3 (695 ft3).
Page 6
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR65 FR73
FR73
FR69A
FR67
FR65A
FR65
FR68 FR69
FR65A FR67
FR69A
FR65
FR73
1
THE FOLLOWING NET TYPES ARE INSTALLED:
51 1− DOOR NET TYPE A
4
2− DOOR NET TYPE B
3− DOOR NET TYPE C
4− CORNER NET
3 5− DIVIDER NET
6− DIVIDER NET
LEGEND:
2 NET SECTIONS
5 53
6 52
A
F_AR_091014_1_0150302_01_00
Cargo Compartments
Cargo Nets - Bulk Cargo Compartment
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-015-C01
Page 7
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

FR20 FR79 / FR80
FR65 FR73
FR73
4.06 m
(13.32 ft)
FR65
MAX WIDTH
3.81 m (12.5 ft)
MAX HEIGHT
1.82 m (5.97 ft)
F_AR_091014_1_0160301_01_00
Cargo Compartments
Location and Dimensions - Bulk Cargo Compartment
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-016-C01
Page 8
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-14-005-A01
Main Deck Cargo Compartment
1. General
This Section gives data related to location, dimensions and load capacity of the main deck cargo
compartment.
For the location and dimensions of the main deck cargo compartment, see FIGURE
09-10-14-991-007-A.
3. Load Capacity
The compartment has a maximum load capacity of approximately .
For typical loads of the main deck cargo compartment, see FIGURE 09-10-14-991-008-A.
The maximum cargo volume for different types of load, depending on A/C configuration, are:
- Container (88 in. x 62 in.) - 245.35 m3 (8 664.5 ft3), or
- Container (88 in. x 125 in.) - 205.5 m3 (7 259 ft3), or
- Container (125 in. x 96 in.) - 167.15 m3 (5 903 ft3), or
- Pallet (88 in. x 125 in.) - 325.28 m3 (11 487 ft3), or
- Pallet (96 in. x 125 in.) - 327.06 m3 (11 550 ft3).
Page 9
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR20 FR79 / FR80

A
DEPENDING ON A/C CONFIGURATION − (BASIC CONFIGURATION)
FR20 OVERALL LENGTH FR79 / FR80

41.04 m (134.65 ft)
FWD A
CROSS−SECTION
SIDE BY SIDE CONFIGURATION
MAX. USABLE WIDTH

5.28 m (17.32 ft)
MAX. HEIGHT
2.44 m (8.00 ft)
F_AR_091014_1_0070101_01_00
Cargo Compartments
Location and Dimensions - Main Deck Cargo Compartment (Sheet 1 of 3)
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-007-A01
Page 10
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR20 FR79 / FR80

A

41.04 m (134.65 ft)
A
FWD
CROSS−SECTIONS
SINGLE ROW CONFIGURATION
MAX USABLE WIDTH MAX USABLE WIDTH

5.28 m (17.32 ft) OR 5.28 m (17.32 ft)
MAX HEIGHT MAX HEIGHT

2.44 m (8.00 ft) 2.44 m (8.00 ft)
F_AR_091014_1_0070102_01_00
Cargo Compartments
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-007-A01
Page 11
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FR20 FR79 / FR80

A

41.04 m (134.65 ft)
A
FWD
CROSS−SECTIONS
MAX USABLE WIDTH

5.28 m (17.32 ft)
OR OR
MAX HEIGHT
2.44 m (8.00 ft)
F_AR_091014_1_0070103_01_00
Cargo Compartments
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-007-A01
Page 12
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

FR20 FR79 / FR80
A
DEPENDING ON A/C CONFIGURATION − (BASIC CONFIGURATION)
MAXIMUM POSITION LOAD

− 18 96 in x 125 in ULDs AND − 4 125 in x 96 in ULDs
OR
OR
FWD A
CROSS−SECTIONS
88/96 in 88 in
OR
88/96 in x 125 in 88 in x 108 in

96 in SIDE BY SIDE 96 in SIDE BY SIDE
F_AR_091014_1_0080101_01_00
Cargo Compartments
Load Capacity - Main Deck Cargo Compartment (Sheet 1 of 3)
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-008-A01
Page 13
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

FR20 FR79 / FR80
A

− 16 96 in x 125 in ULDs
OR
− 17 88 in x 125 in ULDs
OR
− 9 125 in x 96 in ULDs AND
− 4 96 in x 125 in ULDs
OR
− 4 88 in x 125 in ULDs
FWD A
88/96 in x 125 in
SINGLE ROW
OR
96 in 96 in
CROSS−SECTIONS
SINGLE ROW 125 in 96 in
CONFIGURATION
F_AR_091014_1_0080102_01_00
Cargo Compartments
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-008-A01
Page 14
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

FR20 FR79 / FR80
A

− 6 62 in x 88 in ULDs
OR
− 6 62 in x 88 in ULDs
OR
− 3 88 in x 125 in ULDs
CROSS−SECTIONS FWD A
OR OR
96 in
62 in 79 in 79 in 79 in 79 in 79 in
96 in 125 in
F_AR_091014_1_0080103_01_00
Cargo Compartments
FIGURE-09-10-14-991-008-A01
Page 15
09-10-14 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-10-15 LOCATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-15-001-A01
General
1. A number of items and areas on the aircraft contain Hazardous Materials.
WARNING : IDENTIFY WHICH HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WERE TRANSPORTED IN THE

CARGO COMPARTMENTS.
NOTE : The List of Radioactive and hazardous Element manual (LRE) gives information on these
materials.
TheFIGURE 09-10-15-991-001-E gives the general location of the Hazardous Materials that you can
find on the aircraft.
NOTE : The number and arrangement of the portable equipment depend on the aircraft
configuration.
Page 1
09-10-15 Oct 01/11
APU FIRE
EXTINGUISHER BOTTLE
**ON A/C A330-200F
APU GENERATOR
VENT SURGE TANK VENT SURGE TANK
FUEL TRIM TANK

APU OIL TANK
APU FIRE EXTINGUISHING LINES
DISCHARGE INDICATOR
OUTER
FUEL TANK APU BATTERY
CENTER FUEL TANK FUEL
TRIM TANK
APU FIRE
INNER FUEL TANK DETECTORS
APU FUEL LINE VENT SURGE TANK
Location
INNER FUEL TANK
OUTER FUEL TANK
Hazardous Materials
VENT SURGE TANK
@A330-200F
FIGURE-09-10-15-991-001-E01
09-10-15
FUEL LP VALVES PASSENGER AND CREW
CARGO FIRE OXYGEN BOTTLES
BATTERY 1 EXTINGUISHER BOTTLES PORTABLE FIRE
OIL TANKS EXTINGUISHER BOTTLES
BATTERY 2 NITROGEN BOTTLES
HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR
ENGINE FIRE
EXTINGUISHER BOTTLES
ENGINE FIRE DETECTORS F_AR_091015_1_0010501_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 2
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-10-16-001-A01
General
1. This chapter gives details on the landing gears.
- For Landing Gear Footprints, see FIGURE 09-10-16-991-001-A.
- For Nose Landing Gear Description, see FIGURE 09-10-16-991-002-A.
- For Main Landing Gear Description, see FIGURE 09-10-16-991-003-A.
- For Nose Landing Gear Doors description, see FIGURE 09-10-16-991-004-A.
- For Main Landing Gear Doors description, see FIGURE 09-10-16-991-005-A.
Page 1
09-10-16 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
0.71 m
(2.3 ft)
CL
22.18 m
(72.8 ft)
1.39 m 5.34 m
(4.6 ft) (17.52 ft)
1.98 m
(6.5 ft)
10.7 m
(35 ft)
NOTE: DIMENSIONS IN METERS (FEET IN BRACKETS). F_AR_091016_1_0010101_01_00
Footprints
Landing Gear
FIGURE-09-10-16-991-001-A01
Page 2
09-10-16 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
RETRACTION ACTUATOR
CROSS MEMBER
MAIN FITTING
DRAGSTAY
TRUNNION
DOWNLOCK PIN
ACTUATOR
DRAGSTAY TORQUE LINKS
ASSEMBLY LOCKSTAY
DOWNLOCK
SPRINGS
STEERING ACTUATORS SLIDING TUBE
AXLE
TOWING BRACKET
F_AR_091016_1_0020101_01_00
Description
Nose Landing Gear
FIGURE-09-10-16-991-002-A01
Page 3
09-10-16 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

RETRACTION LINK FORWARD
PINTLE−PIN FITTING
RETRACTION LEVER CARDAN PIN
GEAR SUPPORT RIB 6
WING REAR SPAR
SHORTENING
LINKAGE FITTING
REAR PINTLE−PIN
FITTING
SHORTENING
MECHANISM
RETRACTION ACTUATOR
SIDE STAY
FITTING
MLG LEG
DOWNLOCK ACTUATOR
PITCH TRIMMER SIDE STAY ASSEMBLY
ARTICULATING
LINKS
TORQUE LINKS
BOGIE BEAM ASSEMBLY
BRAKE ROD
F_AR_091016_1_0030101_01_00
Description
Main Landing Gear
FIGURE-09-10-16-991-003-A01
Page 4
09-10-16 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
FORWARD DOORS
AFT DOOR
DOOR ACTUATOR
FIXED FAIRING
AFT DOOR
F_AR_091016_1_0040101_01_00
Doors
Nose Landing Gear
FIGURE-09-10-16-991-004-A01
Page 5
09-10-16 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DOOR ACTUATOR
HINGED DOOR
FIXED FAIRING DOOR
MAIN DOOR
F_AR_091016_1_0050101_01_00
Doors
Main Landing Gear
FIGURE-09-10-16-991-005-A01
Page 6
09-10-16 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-20 RECOVERY PREPARATION
09-20-01 QUICK REFERENCE DATA
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-20-01-001-A01
General
1. This chapter is broken down as follows:
A. Aircraft Recovery Logic Charts DESC 09-20-01-002-A01.
B. Aircraft Recovery Process Document DESC 09-20-01-004-A01.
C. IATA Aircraft Recovery Quick Reference Check List TASK 09-20-01-869-801-A01.
Page 1
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-20-01-002-A01
NOTE : The charts are not in chronological sequence for recovery. Make a selection of the charts
applicable to each recovery scenario.
1. See DESC 02-10-01-002-A01 for description of aircraft recovery charts and the way to use them.
When you use these charts, the conditions that follow are assumed:
- Warnings and cautions are not included on the recovery charts.
- The aircraft operator has full responsibility for all the aircraft recovery operation.
- The recovery operation can only start when the local and state Investigative Authorities release
the aircraft.
- All company, local and state health and safety regulations are obeyed.
- All hazardous materials are identified and correctly handled.
- The standard ”Aircraft Status for Maintenance” is in general not available (see AMM 00
Introduction, Item 7).
- The aircraft is possibly in an unusual attitude and can be unstable.
- Some of the steps listed are possibly not in chronological sequence because each recovery
operation is different and the recovery procedure must be adapted.
- It is possible that some of the steps listed are completed more than one time.
Page 2
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART I
INCIDENT
(SEE 01−00−00)
THE AIRCRAFT OPERATOR

HAS FULL RESPONSIBILITY
FOR THE RECOVERY
PERSONNEL FROM THE AIRLINE,

ADVISE INTERNALLY ACCORDING
INVESTIGATIVE AUTHORITIES
TO AIRLINE PROCESSES
AND AIRPORT TO BE ADVISED
BASIC INCIDENT INFORMATION:

−GET AND RECORD INITIAL DATA
−FUEL ON BOARD
−ANY HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
−AIRCRAFT STATUS
−CURRENT AND FORECAST WEATHER
RECOVERY MANAGER ASSUMES RECOVERY TEAM SELECTED

RESPONSIBILITY ( SEE 09−20−02 )
PREPARE PERSONAL
EQUIPMENT
COMMUNICATE WITH
AIRPORT AND INVESTIGATIVE
REMOVE FDR AND CVR PER
AUTHORITIES, RECORD NAMES,
INVESTIGATIVE AUTHORITIES PREPARE LOCAL
POSITIONS AND CONTACT AIRCRAFT
NUMBERS
RECOVERY
EQUIPMENT
AIRCRAFT RELEASED BY LIAISE WITH

INVESTIGATIVE AUTHORITY RECOVERY
MANAGER
GO TO CHART IIA
(SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−002 )
NOTE: THE CHARTS ARE NOT IN A CHRONOLOGICAL SEQUENCE FOR A RECOVERY.

F_AR_092001_1_0010101_01_01

Chart I
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-001-A01
Page 3
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART IIA
INITIAL SURVEY OF AIRCRAFT
SEE 02−40−01 FOR HEALTH

& SAFETY DETAILS
STEP DO A CHECK FOR OBVIOUS GO TO CHART IX

A STRUCTURAL DAMAGE ( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−009 )
STEP IDENTIFY SIGNS OF SEE SRM 51−11−00

B DISTORSION, BUCKLING,
AND GO TO STEP C
CRACKING ETC.
YES GO TO CHART IV STEP A

( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−004 )
STEP ARE THERE VISIBLE FLUID
C LEAKS?
NO
GO TO STEP D
YES GO TO CHART VI
( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−006 )
STEP DOES THE AIRCRAFT HAVE
D TO BE STABILIZED?
NO
GO TO STEP E
STEP GO TO CHART XIII

LANDING GEAR STATUS
E ( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−013 )
IDENTIFY MISSING
STEP COMPONENTS SUCH AS GO TO CHART IIB
F LANDING GEAR, FLAPS, STEP G
ETC.

F_AR_092001_1_0020101_01_00

Chart IIA (Sheet 1 of 2)
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-002-A01
Page 4
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART IIB
INITIAL SURVEY OF AIRCRAFT CONT’D
GO TO CHART XI
STEP WEIGHT AND CG POSITION ( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−011)
G MANAGEMENT AND COMPLETE WORKSHEETS
( SEE 03−00−00 AND SEE 09−50−01)
YES SEE SRM 51−11−00 IF

APPLICABLE AND GO TO STEP I
STEP ARE THERE ANY STRUCTURAL
H CONCERNS?
NO
GO TO STEP I
YES ADVISE HAZMAT TEAM AND GO

TO STEP J
STEP ARE THERE ANY ENVIRONMENTAL
I CONCERNS?
NO
GO TO STEP J
YES ADVISE HAZMAT RESPONSE

ARE HAZARDOUS MATERIALS TEAM AND GO TO STEP K
STEP IDENTIFIED AND ARE THEY OF
J CONCERN? SEE 09−10−05 AND
SEE 09−10−15 FOR LOCALIZATION NO
GO TO STEP E
INSTALL PROTECTIVE COVERS:

YES ENGINES, PITOT HEADS, ETC.
AND GO TO CHART III
STEP WILL THIS BE A LENGTHY ( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−003 )
K RECOVERY?
NO
GO TO STEP D

F_AR_092001_1_0020103_01_00

Chart IIB (Sheet 2 of 2)
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-002-A01
Page 5
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART III
IS AIRCRAFT ECONOMICALLY RECOVERABLE?
NOTE: MAKE THE DECISION WITH

PROCEED AS "YES" UNTIL INPUT FROM THE OPERATOR,
FURTHER NOTIFICATION INSURANCE SURVEYER AND
AIRCRAFT MANUFACTURER
NO YES
WILL SECONDARY DAMAGE

PREPARE FOR RECOVERY
BE ACCEPTABLE?
AFTER RELEASE BY
INVESTIGATIVE AUTHORITIES SEE 02−00−00
WHO WILL RECOVER

AIRCRAFT?
AIRLINE CONTRACTOR AIRPORT
GO TO CHART VII SIGN CONTRACT, MAKE SURE

(SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−007 ) THAT ARM PROCEDURES ARE
FOLLOWED, RELEASE FORMS
AND WAIVERS
ASSIGN AIRLINE
REPRESENTATIVE TO
OVERSEE RECOVERY AND
OBTAIN REPORT
END

F_AR_092001_1_0030101_01_00

Chart III
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-003-A01
Page 6
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART IV
IDENTIFY FLUID LEAKS
MAKE SURE AIRCRAFT IS CORRECTLY GROUNDED
"B" HYDRAULIC
"A" FUEL "C" LAVATORY "D" CARGO "E" WATER
OR ENGINE OIL
ISOLATE ATTEMPT SPILL ADVISE HAZMAT DRAIN SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL CONTAINMENT TEAM TO IDENTIFY,
POWER (SEE CONTAIN AND
CHART IX FOR DETAILS REMOVE
SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−009 )
DRAIN SYSTEM IF MAKE SURE

IDENTIFY SOURCE IDENTIFY SOURCE ACCESS AVAILABLE HAZMAT TEAM
AWARE OF ANY
GROUND SPILLAGE
ATTEMPT SPILL ATTEMPT SPILL
CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT
CAN LINES BE CAN LINES BE GO TO GO TO

CAPPED, VALVES CAPPED, VALVES "D" "E"
BE CLOSED, BE CLOSED, ETC?
HOLES PLUGGED,
ETC.? YES NO
NO YES
DEFUEL OF GO TO DRAIN GO TO CHART IIA

AIRCRAFT "B" SYSTEM STEP D
BECOMES (SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−002 )
PRIORITY
GO TO CHART X GO TO
(SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−010 ) "C"

F_AR_092001_1_0040101_01_00

Chart IV
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-004-A01
Page 7
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART V
REMOVAL OF CARGO
(SEE 05−50−00)
NO CAN CARGO DOOR BE YES

REMOVAL ACCESSED?
CATERING
CONTROL EXCAVATE/PREPA
CG DURING RE ROADWAY TO
OFF−LOAD ALLOW ACCESS
TO DOOR
CAN ELECTRICAL
NO POWER TO THE YES
AIRCRAFT BE
ESTABLISHED?
OPERATE DOORS
NORMALLY
CAN
NO CARGO MANUALLY
YES
DOOR BE OPERATE
OPENED DOORS UNLOAD AS
MANUALLY MUCH AS
POSSIBLE
NO MANUALLY (MAY
BE NECESSARY
CAN DOOR BE
TO CUT
UNLOCKED
YES CONTAINERS
AND HOISTED
FOR ACCESS)
WITH A CRANE?
CAN CARGO
LOADING YES
HOIST DOOR TO SYSTEM (CLS)
OPEN BE USED?
NO
UNLOAD CARGO CONTROL CG

COMPARTMENTS DURING OFF−LOAD
CONTACT AIRBUS FOR
FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS
GO TO CHART VI STEP G
( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−006 )
F_AR_092001_1_0050101_01_01

Chart V
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-005-A01
Page 8
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART VI
STABILIZE AIRCRAFT
(SEE 04−20−00)
STEP MAKE SURE AIRCRAFT IS

GO TO STEP B
A CORRECTLY GROUNDED
STEP CALCULATE ANTICIPATED

B LOADS AND CONFIRM CG GO TO STEP C
LOCATION (SEE 03−00−00)
YES GO TO CHART XII

( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−012 )
STEP IS THIS STRAIGHT

NO
C DEBOGGING? GO TO STEP D
YES GO TO CHART XIV

STEP IS TETHERING/SHORING ( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−014 )
D REQUIRED? (SEE 04−30−00)
NO
GO TO STEP E
YES GO TO CHART XVI

STEP IS IT NECESSARY TO ( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−016 )
E DEFUEL OR TRANSFER
FUEL?
NO
GO TO STEP F
STEP REMOVE CARGO AND

F CATERING EQUIPMENT GO TO CHART V
( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−005 )
MAKE SURE CG IS
CONTROLLED
REMOVE MAJOR
COMPONENTS THAT ARE GO TO CHART IIA STEP E
STEP DAMAGED OR NECESSARY ( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−002 )
G FOR WEIGHT REDUCTION
OR CG CONTROL
(SEE 03−50−01)

F_AR_092001_1_0060101_01_01

Chart VI
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-006-A01
Page 9
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART VII
PREPARE TO LEVEL/LIFT AIRCRAFT

(SEE 06−00−00)
SELECT METHOD
PNEUMATIC STEP−BY−STEP
JACKS CRANE
LIFTING BAGS COMBINATION
SEE 06−60−00
CALCULATE EXPECTED
LOADS AND RECORD
(SEE 06−10−00)
CONFIRM STRUCTURAL
CONFIRM SOIL STABILITY
INTEGRITY OF LIFTING SELECT RECOVERY TOOLING * ( SEE 04−50−00 * )
POINTS/AREAS *
CONTROL CG AND MONITOR

LOAD RECORDS
(SEE 03−00−00)
GO TO CHART VIII
(SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−008 )
* : BEFORE CONSIDERING WHICH LEVELING /LIFTING OPTION TO USE YOU MUST MAKE
AN ACCURATE WEIGHT AND CG ANALYSIS − THIS WILL GIVE YOU THE OPTIMUM
POSTIONS AND LOADS FOR THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT.
F_AR_092001_1_0070101_01_01

Chart VII
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-007-A01
Page 10
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART VIII
PREPARE TO LIFT AIRCRAFT
(SEE 06−00−00)
CONTROL CG WITH BALLAST, FUEL, TETHERING ETC.
SELECT LIFTING ENTRY POINTS
FWD JACK SEE 06−30−00 AND FOLLOW LIFTING

POINT PROCEDURE SEE 06−60−00
FUSELAGE
PNEUMATIC SEE 06−40−00 AND FOLLOW LIFTING
FWD
LIFTING BAGS PROCEDURE SEE 06−60−00
SECTION
CRANE AND SEE 06−50−00 AND FOLLOW LIFTING

SLING PROCEDURE SEE 06−60−00
FUSELAGE
AFT
SECTION
CRANE AND SEE 06−50−00 AND FOLLOW LIFTING

SLING PROCEDURE SEE 06−60−00
WING JACK SEE 06−30−00 AND FOLLOW LIFTING

POINT PROCEDURE SEE 06−60−00
WING

GO TO CHART XV
( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−015)
NOTE: THE CHARTS ARE NOT IN A CHRONOLOGICAL SEQUENCE FOR A RECOVERY

F_AR_092001_1_0080101_01_02

Chart VIII
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-008-A01
Page 11
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART IX
AIRCRAFT BATTERIES
NO IS THERE OBVIOUS STRUCTURAL YES

DAMAGE AND/OR FUEL LEAKING?
NO IS IT BENEFICIAL TO LEAVE YES DISCONNECT AND ISOLATE

BATTERIES CONNECTED? BATTERIES (REMOVE IF POSSIBLE).
AS SOON AS AIRCRAFT IS
STABILIZED
DISCONNECT AND LEAVE BATTERIES

ISOLATE BATTERIES, AS CONNECTED BUT MAKE
SOON AS AIRCRAFT IS SURE BATTERIE MASTER
STABILIZED IS OFF UNLESS IF NEEDED
GO TO CHART IIA STEP B

( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−002 )
F_AR_092001_1_0090101_01_00

Chart IX
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-009-A01
Page 12
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART X
DEFUEL
(SEE 05−10−00)
CONSIDER LEAVING FUEL ONBOARD FOR CG CONTROL
NORMAL PRESSURE DEFUEL WITH ALL AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS

1.
SERVICEABLE ( SEE 05−40−01)
SUCTION DEFUEL WHEN NO ELECTRICAL POWER AVAILABLE

2.
(SEE 05−40−02)
DEFUEL USING AN EXTERNAL WIRING HARNESS (EWH)

3.
(SEE 05−40−03)
GO TO CHART IV STEP B
(SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−004)
4. DRAIN REMAINING FUEL (SEE 05−40−04)

F_AR_092001_1_0100101_01_02

Chart X
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-010-A01
Page 13
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART XI
WEIGHT AND CG POSITION MANAGEMENT

(SEE 03−00−00)
GET THE REQUIRED DATA TO CALCULATE NRW AND

ASSOCIATED CG POSITION
GET OEW (OR DOW) AND ASSOCIATED CG POSITION
SEE 05−30−00 AND COMPLETE

CALCULATE EFFECT OF REMAINING FUEL QTY WORKSHEETS ( SEE 09−50−01)

CALCULATE EFFECT OF REMAINING/ADDED ITEMS WORKSHEETS ( SEE 09−50−01)
CALCULATE EFFECT OF LARGE COMPONENT SEE 03−50−01 AND COMPLETE

MOVEMENT WORKSHEETS ( SEE 09−50−01)

CALCULATE EFFECT OF REMOVED/MISSING ITEMS WORKSHEETS ( SEE 09−50−01 )

CALCULATE NRW AND ASSOCIATED CG POSITION
WORKSHEETS ( SEE 09−50−01 )
GO TO CHART IIB STEP H

( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−002 )

F_AR_092001_1_0110101_01_01

Chart XI
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-011-A01
Page 14
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART XII
DEBOGGING
(SEE 07−30−00)
CONFIRM WEIGHT AND CG LOCATION (SEE 03−00−00)
CONFIRM NO FUEL LEAKS AND ALL LANDING GEARS INTACT
MAKE AIRCRAFT AS LIGHT AS PRACTICAL
CONSULT AIRPORT AUTHORITY FOR RECENT EXCAVATIONS
CONFIRM SOIL STABILITY USING APPROPRIATE METHOD
NO YES
WILL SOIL REQUIRE STABILIZING?
EXCAVATE AREA AROUND

LANDING GEAR
CONFIRM NO
ROADWAY
PREPARATION PREPARE ROADWAY USING
REQUIRED GRAVEL, STEEL PLATES,
PLYWOOD OR MATS AS
NECESSARY (SEE 07−20−00)
PREPARE TO TOW OR WINCH

AIRCRAFT (SEE 07−40−00)
GO TO CHART XV STEP A
( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−015 )

F_AR_092001_1_0120101_01_01

Chart XII
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-012-A01
Page 15
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART XIII
LANDING GEAR
(SEE 02−30−01)
NO YES
ARE ALL LANDING GEARS DOWN AND LOCKED?
1. NLG RETRACTED, COLLAPSED OR MISSING

(SEE 06−60−01) INSTALL LANDING GEAR
LOCKS
CONFIRM LANDING GEAR

SECURE
ONE MLG RETRACTED,
2.
COLLAPSED OR MISSING (SEE 06−60−02 )
GO TO CHART IIA STEP F
( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−002)
ALL MLG RETRACTED,

3.
COLLAPSED OR MISSING (SEE 06−60−03)
GO TO CHART IIA STEP F

( SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−002)
NLG AND ONE MLG
4. RETRACTED, COLLAPSED OR MISSING
(SEE 06−60−04)
ALL LG RETRACTED, COLLAPSED OR MISSING

5.
(SEE 06−60−05)
NOTE: THE CHARTS ARE NOT IN A CHRONOLOGICAL SEQUENCE FOR A RECOVERY

F_AR_092001_1_0130101_01_01

Chart XIII
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-013-A01
Page 16
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART XIV
TETHERING / SHORING
(SEE 04−30−00)
NO YES
ARE TETHERING FITTINGS AVAILABLE?
ATTACH TETHERS TO ATTACH FITTINGS TO

DOORWAYS AIRCRAFT
FIXTURES, FLAP (SEE 04−30−00)
BEAMS AND LANDING
GEAR (SEE 04−30−00)
PREPARE SHORING IF REQUIRED
INSTALL GROUND ANCHORS
SELECT APPROPRIATE TETHER

CABLES
INSTALL TENSIONING DEVICES

MONITOR AND RECORD LOADS
GO TO CHART VI STEP E
(SEE FIGURE 09−20−01−991−006 )

F_AR_092001_1_0140101_01_01

Chart XIV
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-014-A01
Page 17
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
CHART XV
TOWING
(SEE 07−40−00)
YES "A" ARE ALL LANDING GEARS NO "B"

SERVICEABLE?
CALCULATE PROJECTED LOADS

(SEE 07−40−04)
ATTACH SHACKLES TO MAIN

LANDING GEAR TOW LUGS
SEE 07−60−00 FOR

PREPARE AND ATTACH CABLES DETAILS ON MOVING
FOR TOWING AIRCRAFT
MOVE AIRCRAFT TO
ARRANGE PULLEY IF REQUIRED INSPECTION FACILITY
MAKE SURE SITE RETURNED

ATTACH DYNAMOMETER TO
TO NORMAL
CABLE SYSTEM
PREPARE REPORT
USE APPROPRIATE MEANS TO (SEE 08−00−00)
STEER NOSE GEAR
PULL AIRCRAFT STEADILY BACK

END
ONTO HARD SURFACE
RECORD BREAK−AWAY AND

PULLING FORCES FROM
DYNAMOMETER
F_AR_092001_1_0150101_01_02

Chart XV
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-015-A01
Page 18
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-20-01-004-A01
Airline Aircraft Recovery Process Document
1. Airlines should consider the preparation of an internal Aircraft Recovery Process Document. This
document will help the airline to prepare for an aircraft recovery, because it will contain full
instructions about how to organize and prepare for a good recovery.
It must give the steps on how each airline can do an aircraft recovery, from the time an incident is
notified, to the movement of the aircraft to an inspection or repair facility.
Help to prepare a process document of this type is available if you contact the IATA Aircraft
Recovery Working Group at the website that follows:
A. Proposed Coverage
(1) The goals of the Aircraft Recovery Team, these should be clearly stated. Some ideas to
include are:
- How the Recovery Team can react,
- What authority the Recovery Team has,
- The promotion of aircraft recovery awareness,
- How to share aircraft recovery data with the manufacturer, other operators and special
interested groups,
- Coordination of resources.
(2) A current and up-to-date list of the Recovery Team Managers and Recovery Team
Leaders.
This must include office, home, fax, pager and cell phone numbers. The same information
should be available for all other members of the recovery team.
(3) A list of applicable aircraft to recover by the Recovery Team.
This could include aircraft owned or leased by the airline and aircraft from subsidiary
airlines and/or contracted airlines.
(4) Procedures to follow when there is a known incident.
These must highlight the need to keep and record all important data.
(5) Current list of applicable government agencies with contact numbers.
(6) How each team member can prepare.
This must include suggestions on what items of clothing and equipment should be
available in a personal ”go kit”. Vaccinations and visas should also be done.
(7) A full list of airline support staff and contact numbers.
This should include structural and power plant engineering staff, tooling and equipment
technicians, weight and balance, purchasing and logistic personnel.
Page 19
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(8) A current and full list of all company-owned aircraft recovery equipment.
This should include the location, size and weight of all containers in where the equipment
is stored.
(9) A current copy of the IATP D/E pools ground handling equipment, ground maintenance
equipment and aircraft recovery kits.
These data are now available at the website that follows:
NOTE : This chapter gives references to web sites for information only. Airbus shall not
be held liable for web site or document content and for update or change of
addresses.
(10) A list of the local availability of general aircraft recovery materials and equipment. made by
the company.
This list should include materials and equipment such as plywood and steel sheets, crushed
rock, cribbing, cranes, heavy equipment etc.
You can be prepare this list with the ICAO Removal of disabled aircraft Document 9137-
AN/898 as a guide.
(11) An Aircraft Recovery Manual (ARM) for each fleet type operated and its storage locations.
(12) The size of the cargo doors of each fleet type operated.
This will helps to move equipment if the incident is at a different airport.
(13) A list of all company-owned tooling, that includes recovery tooling such as pneumatic
lifting bags, jacks, slings, etc.
This can include their location and properties such as capacity, compressed and extended
heights, arc movement capability, etc.
Page 20
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-20-01-005-A01
Off Runway Incident Reporting Proforma
1. General
This ”Off-Runway” Incident Form is designed to support the evaluation of ”off runway” in-service
incidents. It helps to make technical judgement and to decide the quickest disposition of actions
necessary to return the aircraft landing gear to service.
Page 21
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
EACH "OFF−RUNWAY" INCIDENT COMPRISES UNIQUE CIRCUMSTANCES

WHICH REQUIRE INDIVIDUAL ASSESSMENT AND DISPOSITION.
THIS "OFF−RUNWAY" INCIDENT FORM IS DESIGNED TO SUPPORT THE

EVALUATION OF "OFF−RUNWAY" IN−SERVICE INCIDENTS. IT HELPS TO
MAKE TECHNICAL JUDGEMENT AND TO DECIDE THE QUICKEST DISPOSITION
OF ACTIONS NECESSARY TO RETURN THE AIRCRAFT LANDING GEAR TO SERVICE.
FILL IN ALL SECTIONS AS FULLY AS POSSIBLE AND SUPPLY AS MANY

PHOTOGRAPHS AS POSSIBLE TO SHOW THE INCIDENT
AIRLINE
DATE AND (LOCAL) TIME OF INCIDENT
AIRPORT
AIRCRAFT TYPE INCLUDING DASH NUMBER
AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION
MSN
F_AR_092001_1_0200111_01_00
Off Runway Proforma

Introduction (Sheet 1 of 9)
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
Page 22
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
SECTION 1
**ON A/C A330-200F
SUPPLY PHOTOGRAPHS TO SHOW THE INCIDENT. THESE MUST INCLUDE VIEWS OF THE TAXIWAY, RUNWAY,
AIRPORT, BUILDINGS AND THE POSITIONS OF ALL OBSTACLES THAT THE AIRCRAFT TOUCHED DURING THE
INCIDENT. YOU MUST ALSO SHOW THE PATH OF THE LANDING GEAR. SHOW THE CROSS SECTION OF THE RUNWAY
A
AND THE ADJACENT GROUND THAT THE AIRCRAFT MOVED ACROSS, WITH THE APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS OF ALL
STEPS AND GRADIENTS.
GIVE THE APPROXIMATE DISTANCES AND TRAJECTORY OF THE AIRCRAFT DURING THE INCIDENT, WITH THE
ATTITUDE OF THE AIRCRAFT AFTER THE INCIDENT.
SUPPLY PHOTOS TO SHOW THE ITEMS BELOW :
− THE APPLICABLE LANDING GEAR (THE TWO SIDES, FRONT, REAR ELEVATIONS AND ALL AREAS OF DAMAGE)
BEFORE AND AFTER RECOVERY
− THE AIRCRAFT BEFORE RECOVERY IN ITS REST POSITION OFF THE RUNWAY.
− THE TRACKS MADE BY EACH LANDING GEAR OFF THE RUNWAY AND ALL SKID MARKS ON THE RUNWAY
− RECOVERY OF THE AIRCRAFT
Off Runway Proforma

@A330-200F
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
09-20-01
F_AR_092001_1_0200112_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 23
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_092001_1_0200113_01_00
DETAILED WRITTEN DESCRIPTION OF "OFF−RUNWAY" INCIDENT
SECTION 2
Off Runway Proforma

FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
Page 24
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_092001_1_0200114_01_00
WIND DIRECTION AND SPEED AT TIME OF INCIDENT
10 KNOTS
SECTION 3
RUNWAY
Off Runway Proforma

FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
Page 25
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
SECTION 4 − METRICS
**ON A/C A330-200F
(A) APPROXIMATE AIRCRAFT WEIGHT METRIC TONNES OR IMPERIAL TONS
(B) AIRCRAFT CENTER OF GRAVITY METERS FROM CENTERLINE OR FEET FROM CENTERLINE OR %MAC
(C) FLIGHT PHASE OF AIRCRAFT AT TIME OF INCIDENT−TICK APPROPRIATE PHASE
LOW SPEED TAXIING / MANEUVERING HIGH SPEED TAXIING−TAKE−OFF HIGH SPEED TAXIING−LANDING
TOUCH DOWN TOWING (WITH TOWBAR) TOWING (TOWBARLESS) OTHER
(D) DISTANCE RUN OFF RUNWAY BY EACH GEAR (I.E. TRACK LENGTH MADE BY EACH GEAR).
NLG METERS RHMLG METERS LHMLG METERS
OR
NLG FEET RHMLG FEET LHMLG FEET
(E) APPROXIMATE AIRCRAFT GROUND SPEED AS FUNCTION OF INCIDENT TIME
AT BEGINNING OF INCIDENT KNOTS AT END OF INCIDENT KNOTS
Off Runway Proforma

TIME FROM START OF INCIDENT (FIRST GEAR OFF RUNWAY) TO AIRCRAFT AT REST SECONDS DIFFICULT TO
Section 4-1 (Sheet 5 of 9)

@A330-200F
EVALUATE AT THE TIME OF SUCH AN EVENT
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
(F) RUNWAY / TAXIWAY SURFACE CONDITION−TICK AS APPROPRIATE
DRY DAMP WET FLOODED SNOW ICE OTHER
09-20-01
F_AR_092001_1_0200115_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 26
(G) OFF−RUNWAY SURFACE NATURE AND CONDITIONS: TICK OR SPECIFY AS APPROPRIATE
**ON A/C A330-200F
(1) TYPE OF GROUND − SAND CLAY STONY OTHER
(2) NATURE OF SURFACE − FLAT UNDULATING STEPPED/BANKED OTHER
(3) CONDITION OF GROUND − DRY WET FLOODED SNOW ICE
HARD SOFT WATER LOGGED OTHER
(4) WEATHER CONDITIONS AT TIME OF INCIDENT − PLEASE GIVE DETAILS
(5) VISIBILITY − DAY NIGHT VISIBILITY METERS
(H) WERE ANY OBSTACLES TOUCHED DURING THE INCIDENT − PLEASE TICK AS APPROPRIATE.
NONE RUNWAY LIGHTS KERB STONE DRAINAGE CHANNELS ROCKS HOLES, BURROW
OTHER
SUPPLY DRAWING OR PHOTOGRAPH AND APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS OF ANY OBSTACLES RUN OVER
Off Runway Proforma

@A330-200F
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
09-20-01
F_AR_092001_1_0200116_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 27
(I) BRAKING APPLICATION
**ON A/C A330-200F
WERE BRAKES APPLIED DURING THE INCIDENT YES NO
IF YES, AT WHAT POINT IN THE INCIDENT WERE THE BRAKES APPLIED
APPROXIMATE LENGTH OF ON−RUNWAY AND OFF−RUNWAY SKID MARKS IF APPLICABLE:
PLEASE SUPPLY PHOTOGRAPHS OF SKID MARKS IF APPLICABLE
ON−RUNWAY SKID MARK DISTANCE METERS OR FEET
OFF−RUNWAY SKID MARK DISTANCE METERS OR FEET
(J) WERE THRUST REVERSERS DEPLOYED DURING INCIDENT YES NO
(K) APPROXIMATE AIRCRAFT VELOCITY IN 3 AXES
Off Runway Proforma

VERTICAL m/s FORWARD m/s LATERAL m/s
@A330-200F
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
OR SAME COMMENT AS ABOVE
VERTICAL ft/s FORWARD ft/s LATERAL ft/s
(L) NLG STEERING ANGLE (FUNCTION OF TIME IF POSSIBLE) START ° FINISH °
MAX DEVIATION OF NOSE WHEEL STEERING ANGLE RELATED TO DIRECTION OF TRAVEL.
09-20-01
DURING OFF−RUNWAY TRAJECTORY ° AT REST °
(M) ENGINE THRUST, AT REST 0% 5% 10% OTHER%
DURING OFF−RUNWAY TRAJECTORY 0% 5% 10% OTHER%
(N) RESTING ATTITUDE OF AIRCRAFT OFF RUNWAY ROLL ° PORT OR STARBOARD
PITCH ° NOSE DOWN OR NOSE UP
F_AR_092001_1_0200117_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 28
SECTION 5
**ON A/C A330-200F
DEPTH AND NUMBER OF WHEELS IN GROUND: ENTER VALUES IN TABLE.

MARK WHEELS THAT RUN OFF−RUNWAY WITH A CROSS IN THE DIAGRAM
BELOW, E.G.
DEPTH IN GROUND
IN RESTING DURING RUN
L R WHEEL
ATTITUDE OFF RUNWAY
mm in mm in
1
2
3
4
Off Runway Proforma

5
@A330-200F
FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
6
7
8
L
R
09-20-01
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
F_AR_092001_1_0200118_01_00
Oct 01/11
Page 29
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
F_AR_092001_1_0200119_01_00
DESCRIPTION OF TNE RECOVERY (SUPPLY PHOTOGRAPHS):
SECTION 6
Off Runway Proforma

FIGURE-09-20-01-991-020-A01
Page 30
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
TASK 09-20-01-869-801-A01
IATA Aircraft Recovery Quick Reference Check List
1. General
This guide was prepared and given by the IATA Aircraft Recovery Working Group. It is a general
guide and for use as a checklist during an aircraft recovery incident.
2. Inspections
Not Applicable.
Not Applicable.
4. Procedure
Subtask 09-20-01-869-001-A01
A. Before you are on the site
(1) Get the initial information about the incident.
(2) Contact local airline/agent/own representative.
(3) Prepare and make a selection of personnel/equipment/manuals.
(4) Check availability of IATP-kits and order if necessary.
NOTE : IATP website and recovery kits are available fort IATP members only.
Subtask 09-20-01-869-002-A01
B. When you are on the site
(1) Make necessary contact with local security/fire fighting brigade to secure the site, and give
area map.
(2) Give careful instructions for an aircraft recovery plan.
(3) Get necessary approval from local authorities to start the recovery operation.
(4) Make sure:
(a) Communication to/from site works correctly,
(b) Transportation to/from site is possible,
(c) Necessary accommodation and facilities can be available on site.
(5) Contact local airlines, airport authorities and local suppliers for help with.
(a) Heavy machinery/cranes, etc.
(b) Access roads, building materials.
(c) Timber/gravel/sand/steel plates, etc.
Page 31
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
(d) Lighting equipment.

(6) Remove all necessary weight possible from the aircraft if needed.
(a) Make sure there are documents on restricted articles and hazardous material.
(b) Remove fuel and liquids if possible.
(c) Remove baggage and cargo if possible.
(d) Remove all unwanted and discarded material from the galleys and lavatories.
(7) Calculate the aircraft weight and CG.
(8) Make sure the recovery plan is still valid and all safety precautions have been taken.
(9) Remove all necessary aircraft components if needed.
(a) To lighten aircraft,
(b) To keep wind-induced loads to a minimum,
(c) To observe instructions from local authorities.
(10) Make preparation for
(a) Tethering/Shoring.
(b) Leveling/Lifting.
(c) Moving the aircraft.
(11) Prepare to put the aircraft in a hangar or to park it.
Page 32
09-20-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-20-02 RECOVERY TEAM
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-20-02-001-A01
Composition of the Recovery Team
1. General
Airbus recommends that each airline:
- Prepare an internal Aircraft Recovery Process document (see DESC 09-20-01-004-A01).
- Make an Aircraft Recovery Team, with reference to this document.
For this team, it is recommended:
- To take the volunteers from the aircraft maintenance branch. These volunteers should have a
strong interest in the aircraft recovery process and a good technical background.
- That the members of the Aircraft Recovery Team stay a part of the team (even when they have
promotions or move to different internal departments) so that their experience is not lost.
2. The Manager
Airbus recommends that each Aircraft Recovery Team have a manager to control the activities of the
Aircraft Recovery Team and any aircraft recovery incidents.
A. The Manager should have:
- Experience as an Aircraft Maintenance Production Manager with the related responsibilities,
- Experience and/or knowledge related to aircraft recovery.
B. The Manager should:
- Supervise the Aircraft Recovery Team and their related activities,
- Organize regular meetings and exercises with the Aircraft Recovery Team,
- Be the interface with the airport, local and state authorities for aircraft recovery,
- Represent his airline, on the International Airline Transport Association’s (IATA), Aircraft
Recovery Working Group (ARWG) and the International Airline Technical Pool (IATP)
related to aircraft recovery.
3. Team Leaders
Depending on the size of the airline, there can be one or more Team Leaders.
A. The Team Leaders should have:
- Experience as an Aircraft Maintenance Production Team Leader or Foreman,
- Good technical and leadership qualities,
- Experience and/or knowledge of aircraft recovery,
- Good knowledge of jacks, pneumatic lifting bags and cranes.
B. The Team Leaders should:
- Report to the Aircraft Recovery Manager,
- Control the company-owned aircraft recovery equipment and make sure that it is always
serviceable,
Page 1
09-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
- Make recommendations and suggestions related to the purchase of aircraft recovery

equipment,
- Supervise the on-site aircraft recovery steps.
4. Structures Engineer and Systems Engineer
The Structure Engineer and Systems Engineer should:
- Analyze damage to the aircraft,
- Prepare the drawings necessary for temporary repairs,
- Help the Recovery Manager and Team Leader with decisions related to aircraft recovery.
5. Planner or Purchasing Agent
The Planner or Purchasing Agent should:
- Know how to get access to the nearest aircraft recovery kit,
- Have contact information for local heavy equipment operators,
- Know where to get general aircraft recovery materials,
- Organize the leasing of equipment when necessary.
6. Licensed Aircraft Technicians
The Licensed Aircraft Technicians should:
- Have good technical knowledge,
- Have a valid aircraft maintenance license for the specific aircraft type.
- Report to the Aircraft Recovery Team Leader,
- Do the specific aircraft maintenance tasks assigned by the Team Leader.
Page 2
09-20-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-30 TOOLING AND EQUIPMENT
09-30-01 AIRCRAFT RECOVERY EQUIPMENT TOOLING AND MATERIALS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-30-01-002-A01
General
1. General
It can be necessary for operators to use tools during the recovery process.
There are two categories of aircraft recovery tooling and equipment:
- General recovery equipment
- Specialized recovery equipment
You can get these tools at the airport (contact the airport Authorities or IATP if you are a member),
or locally (contact local vendors).
2. General Materials, Equipment and Tooling
The general materials, equipment and tooling that follow are usually available locally (this is not a
full list) :
- Work lights, floodlights,
- Ballast bags,
- Sheets of plywood, steel plate, planking, etc.,
- Cribbing timber (railroad ties) to make platforms,
- Stones, gravel, broken asphalt to be compacted to make roadways,
- Trailers and padded materials (mattresses, rubber padding, tires, sandbags) to move damaged
aircraft,
- Bulldozers, forklifts, crane, winching vehicles, excavators,
- Towing tractor,
- Cables, ropes, pulley blocks, ladders,
- Mobile shelter-trailer, commercial transport equipment,
- Wooden/steel beams,
- Flatbed trucks and trailers,
- Pumps, hoses and storage for fuel and/or water,
- Hand pump for manual doors opening/closing,
- On-site communication equipment (telephones, faxes, interphone headsets),
An electrical or air power supply can be necessary for some of these tools. Thus, other equipment can
be necessary:
- Mobile electrical power unit (min. 5 kW),
- Mobile air power unit (min. 7 bar (102 psi)).
NOTE : The ICAO Airport Services Manual, part 5, Document 9137-AN/898, ”Removal of Disabled
Aircraft” gives a list of recommended materials and equipment.
Page 1
09-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
3. Lifting and Tethering Material

The general materials, equipment and tooling that follow will be useful for the lifting and tethering of
the aircraft.
A. Slings/straps - Nylon, Dacron, Carbon Fiber
These slings/straps are moisture and mildew resistant. As they dry quickly, it is possible to put
them into storage a short time after use.
You can get them in almost all widths and lengths with different end attachments. You can get
nylon straps/slings with single or double strength with single or multiple bands.
All these slings/straps help prevent damage to the aircraft skins when you lift the aircraft at the
forward fuselage. But it is important to protect the straps from sharp edges and small radiuses.
Make sure that the slings/strap has a label, which gives the rate loads.
Do an inspection of the straps before you use them.
B. Wire Rope
Usually, a 6X19 type rope made from improved plow strength steel is used for recovery
operations.
C. Chain
All types of hoisting chains made from good quality material will give very good results.
D. Rope - Manila, Nylon, Polypropylene
There are good general-purpose ropes but they are not recommended for lifting or tethering
tasks.
Page 2
09-30-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-30-02 AIRCRAFT RECOVERY TOOLING
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-30-02-001-B01
General
1. Table 1 gives the list of tools referenced in the ARM.
NOTE : Any comparable equipment may be used provided that it satisfies the requirements of the
procedure. Other conventional suppliers of recovery material can provide items of the kits
set.
Page 1
09-30-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
VENDOR/
PART NUMBER NOMENCLATURE REFERENCES
SUPPLIER
460007174 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, MLG TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02
97A28002117002 PURGING TOOL TASK 05-40-04-650-802-A01
97F32001001000 CONTROL UNIT-LEG FREE FALL ACTUATOR TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01
98A28104000000 PURGING TOOL - WATER DRAIN TASK 03-20-02-970-801-A01
TASK 05-40-04-650-802-A01
98A52008509000 SLING-UNIVERSAL, DOORS TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01
98A52307628000 LOCK - SAFETY, CARGO DOOR ACTUATORS TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01
98F07103500001 ADAPTOR-JACK NOSE TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01
98F07104000002 PAD-JACKING, SET-WING TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01
98F07203000 MOORING FITTING DESC 04-30-00-001-A01
98F07203016000 NLG BELLY FAIRING PROTECTION TASK 06-30-00-581-802-B01
98F09101002000 CABLE, TOWING-MLG TASK 07-40-02-584-801-A01
98F09103500000 CABLE, TOWING-MLG TASK 07-40-02-584-801-A01
98F10201000000 MOORING KIT TASK 04-30-00-556-801-A01
98F32104013000 COLLAR-SAFETY, MLG DOOR TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02
98F32104022000 DRIVE-SPLINED TASK 04-80-20-867-801-A01
98F32204001001 COLLAR-SAFETY, NLG DOOR TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02
98F52308227002 STRUT - SUPPORT, CARGO DOOR TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01
98F52308279000 BAR - R/I ACTUATOR TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01
98F523087389000 STRUT - SUPPORT, MAIN DECK CARGO DOOR TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01
98F52308751000 MDCD-MANUAL OPERATION ROD (A/C Onboard Flight TASK 04-80-13-869-801-A01
Kit 2)
D23156000 PIN-SAFETY TASK 07-40-02-584-801-A01
TASK 07-40-01-584-802-A01
TASK 07-40-01-584-801-A01
D23304000 PIN - GROUNDLOCK, NLG TASK 02-30-01-481-802-A02
Page 2
09-30-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
VENDOR/
PART NUMBER NOMENCLATURE REFERENCES
SUPPLIER
D97B00-003 MECHANICAL - ACTUATOR TASK 05-40-03-650-802-A01
TASK 05-40-02-650-801-A01
GSE NLG WHEEL JACK TASK 02-30-01-867-803-A01
GSE MLG WHEEL JACK TASK 02-30-01-867-803-A01
Tools and Equipment
TABLE 1
Page 3
09-30-02 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-30-03 IATP AIRCRAFT RECOVERY KITS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-30-03-001-A01
General
1. IATP Recovery Kits
The International Airline Technical Pool provides a number of aircraft recovery kits at strategic
locations around the world.
Currently, there are ten of these kits and they are maintained by provider airlines.
NOTE : The kits are also available on a rental basis to non-member operators.
Information on kits content, purpose, capability, providers locations etc. should be available
from:
2. Location of the Main Kits
Current locations of the IATP kits and their provider are given in Table 1 :
London, England LHR British Airways
Paris, France ORY Air France
Johannesburg, South Africa JNB South Africa Airways
Tokyo, Japan NRT Japan Airlines
New York, USA JFK Delta Airlines
Chicago, USA ORD American Airlines
Los Angeles, USA LAX American Airlines
Honolulu, USA HNL United Airlines
Sydney, Australia SYD Quantas Airlines
Mumbai, India BOM Air India
IATP Recovery Kits
TABLE 1
The Table 2 gives details on kit suppliers and contacts.
Page 1
09-30-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
COMPANY CODE KIT GIVEN FAMILY SITA MAILING ADDRESS

LOCATION NAME NAME CODE
American AA LAX Julie McClain HDQTPAAAmerican Airlines
Airlines ORD 3800 N. Mingo Rd. MD
523
Tulsa OK 74158
Air France AF ORY Philippe Guillem ORYJOAFAir France
Orly Sud 124
F-94396 Orly Aerogare
Cedex
Air India AI BOM KG Shekar BOMELAIAir India Line Stations,
Engineering Dept
Old Airport
KALINA MAHARASTRA
400029 INDIA
British BA LHR Brian Deacon LHRKEBABritish Airways PLC
Airways BA Maintrol
3rd Floor Europe House
Waterside, PO Box 365
HARMONDSWORTH
WEST DRAYTON UB7
0GB
Delta Airlines DL JFK Terry Lucas ATLTEDLDelta Airlines
P.O. BOX 20706
ATLANTA GA 30320 USA
Japan JL NRT Satoru Arasaki TYOJPJL Japan Airlines
Airlines 3-5-1, HANEDA AIRPORT
M1 BLDG
OTA-KU TOKYO
144-0041
Qantas QF SYD Jean-Marie L’Eveille SYDEDQFQantas Airways Ltd
Sydney
Distribution Center
SYDSDC/1
263-271 Coward Road
Mascot N.S.W 2020
AUSTRALIA
Page 2
09-30-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
COMPANY CODE KIT GIVEN FAMILY SITA MAILING ADDRESS

LOCATION NAME NAME CODE
South African SA JNB Charlie Haman JNBMPSASouth African
South Africa Airways
Technical
Technical Area
JOHANNESBURG
International Airport
United UA HNL Connie Showalter SFOPSUAUnited Airlines
Airlines S.F. Maintenance Base-
SFOUS
San Francisco International
Airport
SAN FRANCISCO CA
94128 USA
Kit Suppliers and Contacts
TABLE 2
Page 3
09-30-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-30-03-002-A01
Example of IATP Recovery Kit
1. This section gives an example of an IATP recovery kit that can be found at main airports. It is only
an example and does not reflect the exact content of all main IATP kits.
Table 1 gives an example of basic recovery kit.
Table 2 gives an example of supplementary kit.
Quantity Description
90 PNEUMATIC BAGS (SINGLE ELEMENT)
1 MASTER CONTROL CONSOLE
5 REMOTE CONTROL CONSOLE
5 AIR DISTRIBUTORS
6 MANIFOLD (CONTROL CONSOLE)
85 PNEUMATIC HOSES
6 WINCHES
6 WIRE ROPES
6 EARTH ANCHORS
16 PLASTIC FOAM PROTECTION PADS (50 mm (2
in) thick)
1 ROLL POLYTHENE SHEET (500 gauge, 7.3 m
(287 in) wide)
1 AIR COMPRESSOR
2 REGENT TRIPOD CRASH JACKS
Capacity - 710 mm (28 in) to 1730 mm (68 in), 80
tons
Capacity - 1730 mm (68 in) to 3560 mm (140 in),
100 tons
1 COMPRESSOR SPARES AND BAG REPAIR KIT
Basic Recovery Kit
TABLE 1
2 PNEUMATIC BAGS
2 PNEUMATIC HOSE REELS
4 MANIFOLD CONTROL CONSOLE / AIR
CONTROL CONSOLE WITH 10 OUTLETS
4 PROTECTION PADS
Page 4
09-30-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
4 WIRE ROPE (CAPACITY OF TOWING A CODE
E/F AIRCRAFT)
2 BODY LIFTING SLING (CAPACITY OF LIFTING
A CODE E/F AIRCRAFT)
1 AIR COMPRESSOR (FOR SYNCRO JACKS)
2 SPREADER BARS (INCLUDES SLINGS AND
SHACKLES)
1 AIR COMPRESSOR
Supplementary Recovery Kit
TABLE 2
Page 5
09-30-03 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
09-50 CALCULATION WORKSHEETS
09-50-01 WEIGHT AND CG CALCULATION WORKSHEETS
**ON A/C A330-200F
DESC 09-50-01-001-A01
Worksheets
1. General
It is necessary to use these worksheets in relation with chapter 03-50-01.
A. Interim Worksheet:
- Fuel Remaining on Board Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-001-A.
- Cargo and Baggage Remaining Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-002-B.
- Total Traffic Load Remaining Effect. See .
- Ballast Added Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-004-A.
- Waste Water Remaining Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-005-A.
- Non OEW Catering Equipment Added Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-006-A.
- Large Component Movement Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-007-A.
- Potable Water Removed Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-008-A.
- Cockpit and Cabin Crew Removed Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-009-A.
- Catering Equipment Removed Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-010-A.
- Large Component Removed/Missing Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-011-A.
- Hydraulic Fluids Removed Effect. See FIGURE 09-50-01-991-012-A.
B. NRW & Related H & Y Moment Worksheets
- NRW & Related H, & Y Moment Worksheet Calculation from OEW. See FIGURE
09-50-01-991-013-A.
- NRW & Related H, & Y Moment Worksheet Calculation from DOW. See FIGURE
09-50-01-991-014-A.
Page 1
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
WEIGHT MOMENT MOMENT

(kg or lb) Weight x H−arm Weight x Y−arm
(kgm or lb.in) (kgm or lb.in)
TO TO TO TO TO TO
SUBTRACT ADD SUBTRACT ADD SUBTRACT ADD
LH OUTER TANK
LH INNER TANK
CENTER TANK
TRIM TANK
RH INNER TANK
RH OUTER TANK
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0010101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Fuel Remaining on Board Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-001-A01
Page 2
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
MOMENT MOMENT
WEIGHT
Weight x H−arm Weight x Y−arm
(kg or lb)
TO TO TO TO TO TO
TOTAL FORWARD
CARGO
REMAINING
EFFECT
TOTAL AFT
CARGO
REMAINING
EFFECT
TOTAL BULK
CARGO
REMAINING
EFFECT
TOTAL MAIN DECK

CARGO
REMAINING
EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0020201_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Cargo and Baggage Remaining Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-002-B01
Page 3
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
L/H WING
BALLAST
ADDED EFFECT
R/H WING
BALLAST
ADDED EFFECT
MAIN DECK
BALLAST
ADDED EFFECT
FORWARD CARGO
BALLAST
ADDED EFFECT
AFT CARGO
BALLAST
ADDED EFFECT
BULK CARGO
BALLAST
ADDED EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0040101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Ballast Added Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-004-A01
Page 4
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
MOMENT MOMENT
WEIGHT
(kg or lb)
TO TO TO TO TO TO
WASTE WATER
REMAINING IN
TANK No 1
EFFECT
WASTE WATER
REMAINING IN
TANK No 2
EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0050101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Waste Water Remaining Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-005-A01
Page 5
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
NON OEW
CATERING
EQUIPMENT
ADDED EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0060101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Non OEW Catering Equipment Added Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-006-A01
Page 6
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
MOMENT MOMENT
WEIGHT
(kg or lb)
TO TO TO TO TO TO
NLG RETRACTION
EFFECT
LH MAIN LG
RETRACTION
EFFECT
RH MAIN LG
RETRACTION
EFFECT
SLATS/FLAPS
EXTENSION
EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0070101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Large Component Movement Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-007-A01
Page 7
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
TANK N°1
POTABLE WATER
REMOVED
EFFECT
TANK N°2
POTABLE WATER
REMOVED
EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0080101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Potable Water Removed Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-008-A01
Page 8
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F
MOMENT MOMENT
WEIGHT
(kg or lb)
TO TO TO TO TO TO
COCKPIT CREW
REMOVED
EFFECT
CABIN CREW
REMOVED
EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0090101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Cockpit and Cabin Crew Removed Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-009-A01
Page 9
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
CATERING
EQUIPMENT
REMOVED EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0100101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Catering Equipment Removed Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-010-A01
Page 10
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
LH WING
COMPONENT
REMOVED/
MISSING EFFECT
RH WING
COMPONENT
REMOVED/
MISSING EFFECT
FUSELAGE
COMPONENT
REMOVED/
MISSING EFFECT
VERTICAL TAIL
COMPONENT
REMOVED/
MISSING EFFECT
HORIZONTAL TAIL
COMPONENT
REMOVED/
MISSING EFFECT
PYLON AND NACELLE

COMPONENT
REMOVED/
MISSING EFFECT
LANDING GEARS
COMPONENT
REMOVED/
MISSING EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0110101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Large Component Removed/Missing Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-011-A01
Page 11
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
TOTAL
HYDRAULIC
FLUIDS REMOVED
EFFECT
TOTAL
F_AR_095001_1_0120101_01_00
Interim Worksheet
Hydraulic Fluids Removed Effect
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-012-A01
Page 12
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
OEW
FUEL REMAINING ON
BOARD EFFECT
CARGO AND BAGGAGE

REMAINING IN THE
LOWER DECK EFFECT
TOTAL TRAFFIC LOAD

REMAINING ON THE
UPPER DECK EFFECT
BALLAST ADDED EFFECT
WASTE WATER
REMAINING EFFECT
NON OEW CATERING

EQUIPMENT ADDED
EFFECT
LARGE COMPONENT
MOVEMENT EFFECT
POTABLE WATER
REMOVED EFFECT
COCKPIT AND CABIN

CREW REMOVED EFFECT
CATERING EQUIPMENT
REMOVED EFFECT
LARGE COMPONENT
REMOVED/MISSING
EFFECT
HYDRAULIC FLUIDS
REMOVED EFFECT
TOTAL
− − −
= = =
NRW H−arm Y−arm
(kg or lb) moment moment
RESULTS (kgm or (kgm or
lb.in) lb.in)
F_AR_095001_1_0130101_01_00
NRW & Related H, & Y Moment Worksheets

NRW & Related H, & Y Moment Worksheet Calculation from OEW
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-013-A01
Page 13
09-50-01 Oct 01/11
@A330-200F
**ON A/C A330-200F

TO TO TO TO TO TO
DOW
FUEL REMAINING ON
BOARD EFFECT
CARGO AND BAGGAGE

REMAINING IN THE
LOWER DECK EFFECT
TOTAL TRAFFIC LOAD

REMAINING ON THE
UPPER DECK EFFECT
BALLAST ADDED EFFECT
WASTE WATER
REMAINING EFFECT
LARGE COMPONENT
MOVEMENT EFFECT
POTABLE WATER
REMOVED EFFECT
COCKPIT AND CABIN

CREW REMOVED EFFECT
CATERING EQUIPMENT
REMOVED EFFECT
LARGE COMPONENT
REMOVED/MISSING
EFFECT
HYDRAULIC FLUIDS
REMOVED EFFECT
TOTAL
− − −
= = =
NRW H−arm Y−arm
(kg or lb) moment moment
RESULTS (kgm or (kgm or
lb.in) lb.in)
F_AR_095001_1_0140101_01_00
NRW & Related H, & Y Moment Worksheets

NRW & Related H, & Y Moment Worksheet Calculation from DOW
FIGURE-09-50-01-991-014-A01
Page 14
09-50-01 Oct 01/11

@airbus: Issue: Apr 01/10 Rev: Oct 01/11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

@airbus: Issue: Apr 01/10 Rev: Oct 01/11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

@airbus: Issue: Apr 01/10 Rev: Oct 01/11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

@AIRBUS

AIRCRAFT RECOVERY MANUAL

The content of this document is the property of Airbus.

Issue: Apr 01/10 Rev: Oct 01/11

Revision No. 2 - Oct 01/11

LOCATIONS CHG DESCRIPTIONS OF CHANGE

LOCATIONS CHG DESCRIPTIONS OF CHANGE

LOCATIONS CHG DESCRIPTIONS OF CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE CONTENT

Revision No. 2 - Oct 01/11

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

CONTENT CHG LAST REVISION

02-30-01-867-803-A01 Jacking for Wheel Change

03 WEIGHT AND CG MANAGEMENT

04-50 SOIL STABILITY

05-40-04-650-802-A01 Drain Remaining Fuel

06 LEVELING AND LIFTING

07 MOVING THE AIRCRAFT

07-60-02-001-A01 Moving Damaged Aircraft with Cranes

08 POST RECOVERY CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

**ON A/C A330-200F

**ON A/C A330-200F

01-00-02 SEQUENCE OF THE DOCUMENT

**ON A/C A330-200F

**ON A/C A330-200F

**ON A/C A330-200F

B. Glossary of terms and list of abbreviations.

**ON A/C A330-200F

**ON A/C A330-200F

01-10 RELATED DATA

01-10-01 RELATED DATA

**ON A/C A330-200F

**ON A/C A330-200F

01-20 GENERAL AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS

01-20-01 GENERAL AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS

**ON A/C A330-200F

**ON A/C A330-200F

NOTE : * Dynamic payload between WV000 and WV001.

**ON A/C A330-200F

**ON A/C A330-200F

LOCATION OF RECOVERY AIRCRAFT SECURITY

AIRCRAFT DAMAGE OPERATION CONTROL−

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND